JP7285597B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, display effects using character images, patterns, and the like can be performed.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of techniques for enhancing the interest in games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the problems described above, and can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine comprising display means having a first display area capable of displaying a plurality of types of images and a second display area capable of displaying a plurality of types of images ,
one of the plurality of types of images is a pending icon;
The display means is
a first effect of displaying the plurality of pending icons side by side in a first state in the first display area ;
After the first effect, in the first display area, the arrangement of the plurality of pending icons displayed on the display means while maintaining the display of the plurality of pending icons is changed from the first state to the second state. A second production that changes to the state of 2,
After the second effect, in the first display area, in a state in which the plurality of pending icons are displayed, the arrangement of the plurality of pending icons displayed on the display means is changed from the second state to the above A third effect that changes to the first state ;
a fourth effect of displaying a plurality of the pending icons in the second display area while not displaying the plurality of pending icons in the first display area after the third effect; , and
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the second effect, the arrangement of the plurality of reserved icons is changed from the first state to the second state without changing the intervals between them.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM; FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4 and T10; It is explanatory drawing of jackpot classification determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-work-time-saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a time saving state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9; 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior determination processing. 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of big hit determination processing. It is the 1st flow chart of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is the second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of game state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessary product processing. 4 is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing; It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 9 is a flowchart of V-region sensor detection processing; It is a flow chart of the number of pending ball processing. 4 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a prior determination information storage area; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of basic production|presentation pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of chance up production|presentation pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing in the middle of fluctuation production. 4 is a flowchart of display control processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating upward movement of the left sub-display device 10L; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of clockwise rotation of the left sub-display device 10L; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second mode of the left sub-display device 10L; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating upward movement of the right sub-display device 10R; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating left rotation of the right sub-display device 10R; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the right sub-display device 10R; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating upward movement of the left and right sub-display devices 10; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an advancing movement of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a rotation operation of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the rotation motion of the second movable accessory 15; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first combination effect of the first and second movable accessories; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second combination performance of the first and second movable accessories; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a sub-display-device-linked effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a sub-display-device-linked effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a sub-display-device-linked effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a sub-display-device-linked effect D; It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative-design fluctuation|variation stop production|presentation A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative-design fluctuation|variation stop production|presentation B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative-design fluctuation|variation stop production C. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative-design fluctuation|variation stop production D. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a special variation effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a special variation effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a special variation effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a special variation effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a character display effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a character display effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a character display effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a character display effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of selection effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of selection effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a selection effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a selection effect D; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a multiple-image pseudo-continuous effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a multiple-image pseudo-continuous effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a multiple-image pseudo-continuous effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a multiple-image pseudo-continuous effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an image display effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an image display effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an image display effect C; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an image display effect D; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a sub-display effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a sub-display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a sub-display effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a sub-display effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pending arrangement direction change effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pending arrangement direction change effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pending arrangement direction change effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pending arrangement direction change effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pending display effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pending display effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pending display effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pending display effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pending movement effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pending movement effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pending movement effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pending movement effect D; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the information display effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the information display effect B; It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the said information display production|presentation C. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the said information display production|presentation D. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pending icon-linked effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pending icon-linked effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pending icon-linked effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a suspended icon-linked effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pending change suggestion effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pending change suggestion effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pending change suggestion effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pending change suggestion effect D; It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design display mode production|presentation A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design display mode production|presentation B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design display mode production|presentation C. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design display mode production|presentation D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design variation production|presentation A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design variation production|presentation B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design variation production|presentation C. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design variation production|presentation D. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a pseudo continuous effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pseudo-continuous effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pseudo-continuous effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a pseudo-continuous effect D; It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design facing production|presentation A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design facing production|presentation B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design facing production|presentation C. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design facing production|presentation D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design look-ahead display effect|action A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design look-ahead display performance B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design look-ahead display effect C. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design look-ahead display effect D. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design look-ahead production|presentation A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design look-ahead production B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design look-ahead production|presentation C. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design look-ahead production|presentation D. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an operation image tilt display effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an operation image tilt display effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an operation image tilt display effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying an operation image tilt display effect D; It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design button stop production|presentation A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decoration design button stop production|presentation B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design button stop production C. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative design button stop production|presentation D. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an icon display effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying an icon display effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying an icon display effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying an icon display effect D; It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the production|presentation execution confirmation production|presentation A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the production|presentation execution confirmation production|presentation B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the production|presentation execution confirmation production|presentation C. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the production|presentation execution confirmation production|presentation D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the reach development selection production|presentation A. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating reach development selection effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of reach development selection effect C; It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the reach development selection production|presentation D. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a two-direction group effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a two-direction group effect B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a two-direction group effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a two-direction group effect D; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a winning ball display effect A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a winning ball display effect B; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a winning ball display effect C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a winning ball display effect D;

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1 . again,
The forward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the backward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player to the gaming machine 1 .

The game machine 1 is a pachinko game machine that shoots game balls based on a player's shooting operation, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning when the game balls win in a specific winning device. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 , and the game board 2 is provided inside the game machine frame 50 .
is installed. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have it. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame. ) 62 , an effect button 63 , a frame lamp 66 , a speaker 67 and a select button 68 . An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and shoots the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 . The performance button 63 is a batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61
, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The frame lamp 66 is arranged above the front frame 53, and performs light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right sides of the front frame 53, and produce sound during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, a main display device 7, a sub display device 10, an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, and a fixed winning device (navel) 1.
9, a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, a first
A big winning device (first attacker) 31, a second big winning device (second attacker) 36, a big winning opening opening start opening 17, a general winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), an out opening 16, A display device 40 is provided.

The game area 3 is an area where the game balls shot by operating the handle 60 flow down.
A plurality of game nails are protruded for guiding game balls. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball shot by operating the handle 60 upwards of the game area 3 . The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3 . Here, some of the board lamps 5 are connected to the right frame lamp 66R and the left frame lamp 66L, and configured so that the form and light emission are continuous.

The main display device 7 is an image display device provided near the center of the game area 3 and having a display screen 7a. The main display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 includes production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C,
8R has an effect pattern display area in which variably displayed (also referred to as variable display) is performed.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A middle effect pattern (middle decoration pattern) 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of patterns representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which will be described later. The main display device 7 displays a first special symbol and a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, according to a combination of performance symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a jackpot is won, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". In the case of a miss, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose pattern such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the main display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the pattern display area may not be fixed. Moreover, as a mode of the variable display of the effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or a mode other than that may be used. It is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set as to what combination of performance symbols to stop display according to each lottery result. After that, the production pattern 8L,
The effect of displaying 8C and 8R is "variation effect of effect pattern", "variation effect of decorative pattern" or
It is also simply called “variation effect” or “variation display”. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the performance in the period from when the special symbols start to stop until it stops (also called a special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance). Therefore, even if there is a case in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbols start to fluctuate until they stop, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the variable performance of the decorative symbols.

The main display device 7 can display, on the display screen 7a, a big winning performance performed in parallel with a big winning game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc., in addition to the performance pattern changing performance. In the production design variation production, production images such as a background image and a character image may be displayed in addition to the production design. In addition to the performance symbols, the main display device 7 also has an identification display (fourth symbol, not shown) that can suggest that the special symbols are changing or that the special symbols are drawn. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth pattern) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3 .

The sub-display device 10 includes a left sub-display device 10L and a right sub-display device 10R, which are image display devices arranged in front of the main display device 7, respectively. Each of the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R is a movable gimmick having a display screen, and is configured so that the position and orientation of the display screen can be changed by a mechanism (not shown). The left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R may be liquid crystal display devices like the main display device 7, or other image display devices such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, and a dot matrix. may be The left sub-display device 10L is arranged at the lower left of the main display device 7 and has a first pending image display area in which the pending image 9A is displayed. In the first reserved image display area, a reserved image 9A is displayed according to the number of stored first special figure reservations, which will be described later. The right sub-display device 10R is arranged on the lower right side of the main display device 7 and displays the reserved image 9B.
is displayed, and a reserved digested image display area in which the reserved digested image 9C is displayed. have. In the second reserved image display area, a reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations, which will be described later. The pending images 9A and 9B are images representing pending and are also called pending icons 9A and 9B. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also called the pending image 9C or the pending icon 9C. The first pending icon and the second pending icon are collectively referred to simply as pending icons. By the display of the pending images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure suspension displayed on the first special figure suspension display 43a described later, and the second special figure suspension displayed on the second special figure suspension display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays a pending digest image 9C. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the currently varying performance symbols (the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) on the display screen 7a or the display screen of the sub display device 10, and the display of the pending digested image 9C allows the first special It is possible to display to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the figure reservation or the second special figure reservation is digested ("extraction of special figure suspension" to be described later).

On the left and right sides of the main display device 7 are the first board movable bodies 1, which are movable so-called gimmicks.
4 (also referred to as the first movable accessory 14) is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that two semicircular members arranged on the left and right sides are movable in the left and right direction. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) on the left and right sides of the main display device 7, and moves from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to approach each other ( advance) and stop at the advanced position in front of the display screen 7a (FIGS. 53 to 55). First movable accessory 1
4 covers part of the main display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

On the upper side of the main display device 7, there is a second board movable body 15 (which is a movable so-called gimmick).
Also called a second movable accessory 15) is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) labeled with "OARO" is movable in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the main display device 7, and is displayed by moving (advancing) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a (Figs. 56-59). The second movable accessory 15 covers part of the main display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage portion 11 is formed below the sub-display device 10 . The stage part 11 is
It has a shape that can guide a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to a first starting port 20 which will be described later. A warp section 12 is provided on the left side of the sub display device 10 . Warp part 12
has an entrance portion into which game balls flow in and an exit portion into which game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance portion flow out to the stage portion 11 from the exit portion.

The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the central opening of the front frame 53 , and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the illumination panel 18 . That is, the illumination panel 18 is arranged in front of the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, and the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10
The image displayed in is visible through the illumination panel 18 . The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on the main surface by irradiating light from the LEDs from the end surface. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display several types of images in a plurality of types of colors depending on the direction and color of light emitted from the LEDs.

A fixed prize winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the main display device 7 in the game area 3, and is a first start hole (first start prize hole, first ball entry) in which the ease with which a game ball enters is always unchanged. port, fixed starting port) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 is the first special symbol lottery (
It is an opportunity for the jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is a trigger for the acquisition of the jackpot random number and the like and the jackpot determination.

A normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and has a second starting port (second starting winning port, second ball entrance, variable starting port) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is the lottery of the second special pattern (small hit and big hit lottery)
has become an opportunity for The electric chew 22 has a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21 , and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23 . The movable member 23 is driven by an electric tuning solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient for the electric chew 22 that it is easier for the ball to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball into.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers acquisition of a normal symbol random number (hit random number), hit determination, and the like.

Here, "special symbol jackpot lottery" means that when a game ball wins in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, a jackpot random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained jackpot random number is used. It refers to a process of determining whether or not a big win is made by comparing with a value corresponding to a predetermined "big win". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variable display of special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and the predetermined variation is performed. When the time elapses, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the main display device 7, a pattern matching game for variably displaying a performance pattern is performed in synchronism with the variable display of the special pattern, and by this pattern matching game, the player is notified of the lottery result of the big win more effectively.

In addition, when the game ball wins the second start port 21, the "special symbol lottery lottery"
Acquire a small hit random number for special symbol determination, and set the obtained small hit random number in advance.
By comparing with the value corresponding to "small hit", it refers to the process of determining whether or not it is a small hit.
The lottery result of this "small hit" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variable display of the special symbols is performed on the second special symbol display device 41b described later, and a lottery is drawn after a predetermined variation time has elapsed. A special symbol corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. On the main display device 7, a pattern matching game for variably displaying performance symbols in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols is performed, and the result of the lottery for the small win is reported to the player more effectively by this pattern matching game. .

In addition, the "lottery of normal symbols" means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for normal symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means the process of judging whether or not it is a hit. As for the lottery result of this normal pattern, the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the lottery result is not immediately reported, but the normal pattern is displayed in a normal pattern display device 42 to be described later, and a predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time elapses, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lighted or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged above the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and the first big winning port (first special winning port) 30 and , a V region 39 , a non-V region 70 , and a V opening/closing member 71 . The first big prize winning opening 30 is provided with an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that permits or inhibits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first grand prize winning solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 has a V area (specific area) 39 and a V area sensor 39a (see FIG. 3) inside.
), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3), a first prize winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 ( 3) and. The V area (specified area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specified area) 70 are configured as areas inside the first big winning device 31 through which game balls that have passed through the first big winning hole 30 can pass. . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 30 . The V area sensor 39 a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member 71 is
The game balls passing through the first big winning hole 30 are distributed to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70.例文帳に追加The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 . The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to release the game ball. In the first state (rotating state) in which the V region 39 is allocated, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized,
It becomes the second state (stop state) in which the game balls are distributed to the non-V area 70 at the origin. It should be noted that the V opening/closing member 71 moves the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to the V area 3 without being limited to rotational movement.
9 or the non-V area 70 . That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it becomes a retracted state (first state) in which the game balls are distributed to the V area 39, and the V
When the opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the advanced state (
second state). In the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 triggers a transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. That is, the V region 39 is a variable probability operating port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a variable probability operating port. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31 . The first prize-winning device discharge sensor is V
It is provided at a point where the area 39 and the non-V area 70 join downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, small winning attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged above the first big winning port 30 in the game area 3, and is the second big winning port (second special A winning opening) 35 is provided. The second big prize winning opening 35 includes an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state. This second big winning device is activated when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 and wins a small winning lottery.
It is a small hit attacker.

The large winning opening opening start opening 17 is arranged above the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3,
When the game ball passes, the first big prize winning opening 30 is opened.

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3 . The out port 16 is the game area 3
, and discharges out of the game area 3 the game balls that have not won in any of the winning holes. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2 . The details of the display devices 40 will be described later.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 3B on the right side.
There is. A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, "
It's called right-handed. In the game machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning to the first start hole 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, by hitting to the right, pass through the gate 28, the second starting port 21, the first big prize winning port 30, and
It is configured so that the player can aim to win a prize in the second big prize opening 35. - 特許庁

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the indicators 40. As shown in FIG. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a,
The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b and the normal figure reservation indicator 44 are included. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a displays the number of memory of operation reservation (1st special figure reservation) of the 1st special design indicator 41a.
The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of memory of operation reservation (2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special design indicator 41b. Normal pattern holding display 44 is normal pattern display 42 operation holding (normal pattern holding)
display the number of memories of The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20. - 特許庁The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Below, the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are named generically, and it is also called a "special design." Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display device 41". Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

The special symbol display device 41 variably displays (changes display) the special symbol (identification information), and then displays it in a stopped state, so that a lottery (jackpot lottery) based on the winning of the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is performed. Notify the results. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (jackpot pattern) of a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big prize opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped jackpot pattern (type of jackpot won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) for opening the second big winning hole 35 is performed. In addition, the big winning mouth in the jackpot game (first
The opening pattern of the big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35) will be described later.

The special symbol display device 41 notifies the result of the lottery (small winning lottery) based on the winning to the second starting port 21 by displaying the special symbol (identification information) variably (variably displaying) and then stopping the display. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (small winning pattern) of a predetermined small winning stop mode, a special game (small winning game) is performed to open the second big winning hole 35 in a predetermined opening pattern. In addition, the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 in the small winning game will be described later.

The special symbol display device 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol winning lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described later), "○○●●○○●●"
(○: lights up, ●: lights out). When a small prize is won, a small prize pattern in which the first and second LEDs from the left are lit is displayed, such as "○○●●●●●●" (○: lights up, ●: lights out). If it is a mistake, the LED on the far right like "●●●●●●●○"
Display the lost pattern with only lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed (variably displayed) for a predetermined variable time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may light so that the light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is that each LED is a stop display (
The lighting display in a specific mode is not limited to the above mode, and any lighting mode can be used. For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (enters a ball), the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the win are , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning to the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special figure reservation, the second start opening 21
If it is a winning prize, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as a second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Digestion of special figure reservation" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation and execute variable display of special symbols for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, the first start port 20 or the second
When the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, when the variable display of the special symbols is being executed or the winning is during the execution of the special game. However, the right of the big winning lottery for the prize can be reserved with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43 . The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a and the 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b are each constituted by four LEDs, for example.
Each special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on LEDs corresponding to the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stopping the display. A normal pattern to be stopped and displayed (a normal pattern stop pattern, a normal pattern derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal pattern selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stop pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (a normal pattern of a predetermined stop mode, ie, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal winning pattern with both LEDs lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: unlit). If the lottery result is a loss, the right LED
Displays a normal losing pattern with only lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the normal losing pattern. Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the normal symbols are varied and displayed for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, both LEDs may alternately light up. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode, and any lighting mode can be employed as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted display in a specific mode). For example, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously in the aspect of the variable display.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5) as a normal pattern reservation. memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. The digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the normal design random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the normal design variable display is performed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, the gate 28
If the variable display of normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball into the game ball cannot be performed immediately after its passage,
That is, even if there is a prize during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game, it is possible to reserve the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . The normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal map reserves by lighting the LEDs by the number of normal map reserves.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 ( 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control section. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls effects executed as the game progresses, and the image control board 100,
Together with the lamp control board 107 and the sound control board 106, it constitutes a sub-control section. It should be noted that the sub-control section can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90 .

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80,
The game progress of the game machine 1 is controlled according to the program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later.
The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. Game control microcomputer 81
, transmits and receives data to and from other boards or the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87 . The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88 . The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the large winning opening opening sensor 17a, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, the Second winning opening sensor 35a
, a V-area sensor 39a, a non-V-area sensor 70a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a. As the solenoids connected via the relay board 88, the electric tuning solenoid 2
4, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, the second big winning opening solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 are exemplified. The large winning opening opening start opening sensor 17a detects the large winning opening opening starting opening 1
7 and detects a game ball entering the big winning opening opening starting opening 17.例文帳に追加The first starting hole sensor 20 a is provided inside the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20 . The second starting port sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 2
A game ball that has won 1 is detected. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28,
A game ball passing through the gate 28 is detected. The first big winning hole sensor 30a detects the first big winning hole 3
0, and detects a game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 30.例文帳に追加The second big winning hole sensor 35 a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 . The V area sensor 39a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big winning hole 30,
A game ball passing through the area 39 is detected. The non-V area sensor 70 a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70 . The normal winning hole sensor 27 a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the normal winning hole 27 . The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22 . The first big winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31 . The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31 .

The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, a second special symbol reservation display device 43b, and a general pattern reservation. Display 4
Display control for 4 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 .
The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120 , a rental ball payout device 130 and a card unit 135 , and is connected with a launcher 112 via a launch control circuit 111 . The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. Prize balls to be dispensed are detected by a prize ball sensor 122 for counting. Ball rental device 13
0 pays out the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rented ball motor 131 of the rented ball payout device 130 based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rented balls. The rented balls to be paid out are detected by a rented ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 is
It includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60 , the shooting device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the shooting volume 115 . Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

A sub control board 90 ( FIG. 4 ) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95 .
The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the game effect of the game machine 1 according to a program. The production control microcomputer 91
It includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs and the like for controlling effects as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub-CPU 92 that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. . Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. Production control microcomputer 91
transmits/receives data to/from another board or the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 91 . Sub control board 9
0 is connected to the image control board 100 , the sound control board 106 , the lamp control board 107 and the relay board 108 via the input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the main display device 7 and the sub display devices 10 (left sub display device 10L, right sub display device 10R) according to a program. Do. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102 , a ROM 103 and a RAM 104 .
In the ROM 103, in addition to programs for performing display control, still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, specifically, characters, items, graphics, characters, numbers and symbols are stored. etc. (including production patterns) and image data such as background images are stored. A RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data.
The CPU 102 executes programs stored in the ROM 103 . The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the image control microcomputer 10 based on the command received from the main control board 80 .
1 controls the display of the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 . The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the performance control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106 , and based on commands received from the main control board 80 , the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 . etc. is output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . Note that the audio control board 1
06 may be implemented with a CPU, and the CPU may execute voice control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be implemented with a ROM, and the audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, the image control board 10
The sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of 0.

The sub-display device 10, the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . In other words, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and creates the light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the sub-display device 10, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. FIG. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the sub display device 10, the first movable accessory 14, and the second
Operation pattern data (driving data) for determining the operation mode of each movable accessory 15 is created, and the sub-display device 10, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 are operated according to the operation pattern data. Control. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon.
The CPU may be caused to control the lighting of lamps and control the operation of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM
may store data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns.

A performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108 . The effect button detection switch 63a is the effect button 63 (Fig. 1
) is pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. FIG. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the sub ROM 93. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6(B) shows the sub-R
FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the AM 94; FIG.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) contains a jackpot determination table T1, a ready-to-win determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T.
4, a big win type determination table T5, a variation pattern determination table T6, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, a big winning opening pattern determination table T8, a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9, and a small win determination table. T10 and are stored.
These determination tables, main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81
In , it is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special figure pending storage area 85, and a normal figure pending storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command to be output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main processing (described later), and is a pre-determining command, a pending pitch command, A variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is for main control main processing (described later).
, is an area where flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set, such as a jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first prize flag, second prize flag, small hit flag, V flag, variable probability flag, time saving flag, etc. is set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variable counter, a time saving counter and the like are set. The special action status set area 84d is an area in which a status is set for special action processing, which will be described later. The special figure reservation storage area 85 is the first special figure reservation storage area 8 in which the first special figure reservation is stored.
5a and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation a first storage area for storing;
A second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. Second special figure reservation storage area 8
In 5b, a first storage area and a second storage area for storing random number groups (holding information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure reservation , a third storage area, and a fourth storage area. The general pattern reservation storage area 86 stores the first, second, third, and fourth general pattern reservations.
A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storing random number groups (reserved information) such as normal symbol random numbers (per random numbers) corresponding to each item are provided. there is
In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 also contains a win type set buffer in which special stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the sub-display device 10 and the movable accessories 14 and 15. A drive data buffer and the like are provided.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a basic effect pattern determination table T52, a chance up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later), and is a pre-determination command, a pending ball number command, a variation start command, a variation A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area ( It is an output buffer), and a variable production start command, a command before the end of fluctuation, a variable production end command, an opening production start command, a round production start command, an ending production start command, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in a sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area where the counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, a first special figure pending effect counter, a second special figure pending effect counter, a general figure pending effect counter. ,
A probability variation production counter, a time saving production counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. Figure 7 (A
) indicates a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG.
) indicates a random number acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control section side. The game control microcomputer 81 has a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", and a "
Fluctuation pattern random number", "normal pattern random number (hit random number)", and "small hit random number" are configured to be acquired at the timing described later. The “jackpot random number” is a random number used for lottery (jackpot determination) to determine whether or not a jackpot will be won, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 65,535. "Jackpot type random number" is a lottery of the jackpot type that was won (jackpot type judgment)
It is a random number used for , and takes a value in the range from 0 to 127. "Reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect that indicates the result when the big hit determination is a loss, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. take.
Reach is a state in which only one of the plurality of production patterns (decorative patterns) that is variably displayed remains. It is a state (for example, the state of "7↓7") that is a combination of performance symbols indicating a jackpot winning. It should be noted that the production pattern that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state is displayed on the display screen 7
It may be displayed as if it is swaying within a. “Variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0-127.
“Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 . The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0-255. The “small hit random number” is a random number used for a lottery (small hit determination) as to whether or not a small hit is made, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 127. "Jackpot random number", "Jackpot type random number", "
“Reach random number” and “fluctuation pattern random number” are obtained based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21 . A “small hit random number” is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 . The random value group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is the first special figure reservation storage area 8
5a and acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is acquired based on passing through the gate 28 . The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 .

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "read-ahead effect random number" and a "chance-up random number" at timings described later. ``Random number for look-ahead effect'' is a random number used for determining the look-ahead effect at the time of variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The “chance-up random number” is a random number used for determining the chance-up effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The "read-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a pre-determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94 . The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 .

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4 and T10. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, FIG. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, and FIG. 8(E) , a diagram for explaining the small hit determination table T10.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (one of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8 (A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot" (approximate probability 1/397), and the jackpot random value is "0 to 164 Numerical values other than 16
5 to 65535)” is determined to be “losing”. again,"
In the high probability state”, if the jackpot random value is “0 to 649”, it is determined to be a “jackpot” (approximate probability 1/101), and the jackpot random value is a number other than “0 to 649 (650 to 65
535)” is determined to be “losing”. "Normal Probability State"
and the contents of the "high-probability state" will be described later.

The reach determination table T2 determines whether the reach random number (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "
It is a table referred to in order to determine whether it corresponds to "no reach". It should be noted that this reach determination table T2 is not referred to when the obtained jackpot random number value corresponds to "jackpot". In FIG. 8 (B), in the "non-time saving state", the reach random number is "0 to 1
3”, it is determined as “with reach”, and the reach random value is “a number other than 0 to 13 (1
4 to 127)” is determined to be “no reach”. again,"
In the time saving state ”, if the reach random value is “0 to 5”, it is determined to be “with reach”, and if the reach random value is “a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)”, “ It is shown that it is determined as "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-working time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the reach at the time of loss is less likely to be applied in the time saving state than in the non-working time saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure reservation by selecting more reach no loss with short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random number value (any one of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "win" or "loss". This table is referenced to determine whether to In FIG. 8 (C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 2", it is determined to be "hit", and the normal symbol random number is a number other than "0 to 2 (3 ~ 255)”, “Loss”
It is shown that it is determined that Also, in the "time saving state", the normal symbol random number is "0
~254", it is judged as "hit", and when the normal symbol random number is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)", it is judged as "losing".

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This table is referenced to In FIG. 8 (D), when the "non-time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and when the "time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second". is shown.

Small hit determination table T10, game control microcomputer 81 main control main processing (described later)
In, it is a table that is referred to determine whether the obtained small hit random value (any of 0 to 127) corresponds to "small hit" or "losing". It should be noted that this small hit determination table T10 is not referred to when the obtained big hit random number value corresponds to "big hit". In FIG. 8 (E), in all states (regardless of the game state), if the small hit random value is "0 to 63", it is determined as "small hit" (probability 1/2), If the numerical value is "a numerical value (64 to 127) other than 0 to 63", it is determined to be "losing". It should be noted that the small hit determination table T10 is a table that is referred to when a game ball wins in the second start hole 21 (not referred to when a game ball wins in the first start hole 20). Also, the small win determination table T10 is a table that is not referred to when a "big win" is determined.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), according to the jackpot type random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired, "jack type" and "special symbol It is a table referred to in order to determine "type". In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 1 stop design (special stop design) is determined as "jackpot design 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop design is determined as "jackpot design 2". When the jackpot type random number value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (real 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 40", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 2 A stop symbol (a special figure stop symbol) is determined to be a "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "41 to 82", the jackpot type is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 2 stop pattern (special figure stop pattern) is "jackpot pattern 2".
is determined. If the jackpot type random number is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is "1
6R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is determined, and the special figure stop design is determined as "jackpot design 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, special game "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", "ending (ED) command" can also be specified. "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot"
, "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passage scheduled jackpot" will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the non-time saving state.
FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the time saving state. Variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to for determining a variation pattern according to the variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) acquired in main control main processing (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. . In FIG. 10, for example, the first starting port 2 in a non-time saving state
0 won, it is determined to be "losing" in the jackpot determination table T1, it is determined to be "with reach" in the reach determination table T2, the number of pending balls is "1 to 2", and the variation pattern random value is "0 to 60", the variation pattern is determined to be "P7". Also, in the non-time-saving state, digest the hold of the second start-up port 21 (because it is difficult to win the second start-up port 21 in the non-time-saving state, the time-saving state (high probability high base state) ends and the normal state (non- When it becomes a time saving state, a low probability base state), the suspension of the second start port 21 is extinguished), and it is determined as "big hit" in the big hit determination table T1, and the big hit type determination table T
5, it is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" and "jackpot pattern 2 (21H)",
It is shown that when the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P22". In addition, in the non-time-saving state, the hold of the second start port 21 is digested, and it is determined as "small hit" in the small hit determination table T10, and the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to
127", the variation pattern is determined to be "P34".

In FIG. 11, for example, the first starting port 20 is won in the time saving state, it is determined as "losing" in the big hit determination table T1, and "no reach" in the reach determination table T2.
, and when the number of held balls is "3-4" and the variation pattern random number value is "0-127", the variation pattern is determined as "P56". Also, in the time-saving state, the second start port 21 is won, and it is determined as "big hit" in the big hit determination table T1, and is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" and "big hit pattern 2 (21H)" in the big hit type determination table T5. , when the fluctuation pattern random number is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P62". In addition, when the second start port 21 is won in the time saving state, it is determined as "small hit" in the small hit determination table T10, and the fluctuation pattern random number is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is "P74". is shown to be determined.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. For example, when the hold of the second starting port 21 is digested in the non-time saving state and it is determined as a small hit, the variation pattern is determined as "P34" and the variation time is determined as 15000 msec. In addition, when winning the second starting port 21 in the time saving state and it is determined as a small hit, the variation pattern is determined to be "P74" and the variation time is determined to be 3000 msec. In addition, during the time saving state (high probability high base state), it is also during the small hit rush (RUSH) period described later until the next big hit, that is, during the small hit rush period, when entering the second start port 21 Since the fluctuation time is 3000 msec and the small hit probability is 1/2, small hits occur frequently in a short time. During the small win rush period, the player can aim for a big win while increasing the number of game balls on hand. In addition, when it becomes reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes normal reach or super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different fluctuation times are set. SP
In 1 to 3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1-5 is, for example,
It may be the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream. In particular, SP5 is a variation pattern of dedicated reach in which a pseudo-jackpot suggestion effect is performed by winning the second start port 21 during a small hit rush (RUSH) period that occurs in a time-saving state (high-probability high-base state) described later ( "P62"). In addition, SP5 occurs during the pending digestion of the second start port 21 when the time saving state (high probability high base state) ends and becomes normal state (non-time saving state, low probability low base state) In this case also, a pseudo-jackpot suggestive effect can be performed (fluctuation pattern “P22”).

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric tube opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) in order to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 12(A), the open pattern of the electric tube 22 is determined as "open pattern 11" in the "non-time saving state", and the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 12" in the "time saving state". is shown. Figure 12 (B
) shows the contents of the open pattern 11 and the open pattern 12 . open pattern 11
Then, the power tube 22 is opened once for 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the number of times of opening is 3 times, the opening time per time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval)
The electric tube 22 is opened for 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have won a prize (prescribed number of winning prizes, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). 35 is a table referenced to determine the T.35 opening pattern. In FIG. 13(A),
As a big winning opening pattern in the jackpot game, the special figure stop pattern data is "11H",
At the time of "12H", "20H" or "21H", the opening pattern of the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", and the special figure stop symbol data is "1".
4H", "15H", and "22H", the opening pattern of the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 is determined as "opening pattern 22", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "13H" , the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 23". In addition, in FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "20H", the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 is determined as "opening pattern 25" as the big winning opening opening pattern in the small winning game. , When the special figure stop design data is "21H",
It is shown that the opening pattern of the second big winning hole 35 is determined as "opening pattern 26".

FIG. 13(B) shows the contents of opening pattern 21, opening pattern 22 and opening pattern 23 as the big winning opening opening pattern in the jackpot game. Open pattern 2
In 1, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the first big prize-winning port 30 is opened (long opening) with the number of times of opening 1 time and the opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening), and in the 14th and 16th rounds, the number of times of opening is 1 time and the opening time is 1. The opening (long opening) of the second big winning opening 35 is performed for 29.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). 0.1 second opening (short opening) of the second big winning opening 35, the number of times of opening is 1 at the 15th R
Once, the opening (short opening) of the first big winning opening 30 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). Open (short open) the second big winning hole 35 for 0.1 second, and at the 16th round,
The opening (long opening) of the second big winning opening 35 is performed with the number of times of opening being 1 and the opening time being 29.5 seconds. However, the opening of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is, if there is a predetermined number of game ball wins (regular winning number, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains Closed.

FIG. 13(C) shows the contents of open pattern 25 and open pattern 26 as the large winning opening open pattern in the small winning game. In the opening pattern 25, the second big prize winning opening 35 is opened once with an opening time of 1.0 second. In the opening pattern 26, the second big prize winning opening 35 is opened 5 times for an opening time of 0.3 seconds. That is, in the small winning game, the first big winning hole 30 is not opened, and only the second big winning hole 35 is opened. It should be noted that the opening pattern 25 is, when the "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" is achieved by the jackpot pattern 1 (20H) of the special figure 2, during the small hit rush period after the end of the big hit game, and the second after the end of the small hit rush. Reservation of the starting port 21 is performed during digestion. The opening pattern 26 is the second start port during the small winning rush period after the end of the big winning game and after the end of the small winning rush when the "16RV passage scheduled big win" is made by the big winning pattern 2 (21H) of the special figure 2. Twenty-one retentions are made during digestion. That is, the open pattern 26 is a variation pattern ("P62
”), it is an opening pattern of the small winning game that is performed after the big winning game. In other words, the big winning opening opening pattern in the small winning game is different between when the big win is achieved through the pseudo-big win suggestive performance and when the big win is achieved without the pseudo-big win suggestive performance.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. V opening and closing member opening pattern determination table T9, game control microcomputer 81 main control main processing (
later), it is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 according to the special figure stop design data (FIG. 9). In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", "20H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined as "opening pattern 31", When the special figure stop symbol data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined as "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", the opening pattern is determined as "open pattern 33", and the special figure Stop symbol data is "15H
or "22H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34". In FIG. 14B, an open pattern 31, an open pattern 32, and an open pattern 3 are shown.
3 and the contents of the open pattern 34 are shown. 2, 4, 6 in the open pattern 31
, in the 8th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, V with an opening time of 0.1 second
Short opening of the opening/closing member 71 is performed. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is reached. A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R's, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. 8
, In the 10th round, when the first prize is won in the first big prize hole 30, the V opening and closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is maximum. 31
. A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for 5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th rounds, the V opening/closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 second when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30.
, and when a second prize is won, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds for a long time. 4th,8th,10th,12th R
When the first prize is won, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-circuited with an opening time of 0.1 second. 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds of opening pattern 34
When the first prize is won, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-circuited with an opening time of 0.1 second.

4. Explanation of Big Wins, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "big wins", "small wins" and "losses" as a result of a big win lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "big win". In the case of "small win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying the "small win symbol". In the case of "losing", the special symbol display 41 stops and displays "losing". When the jackpot is won, the jackpot game opens the jackpots (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), the opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and the ending after the final round game ends (
ED). Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing. When a small win is won, a "small win game" is executed to open a large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) according to an opening pattern corresponding to the type of big winning that triggered a small winning rush to be described later. be.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly classified into two types, namely, "V-passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot".
The "V passage scheduled jackpot (probable variable jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V passage scheduled opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot that activates 71. In addition, "V passing schedule jackpot (
Variable probability jackpot)”, after the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot game is started, the game state is in a high-probability base state, and during that period, the second start port 21 is frequently won and a small hit is made. It will be a small hit rush period that occurs. Here, the special figure stop design data is 11H ~ 1
The 4H, 20H, and 21H jackpots correspond to the "V passage scheduled jackpot (probable variable jackpot)". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG.
(Open pattern 22: Open pattern 33) or (Open pattern 23: Open pattern 3
At the time of 2), the game ball can pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game.
The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a big win that activates the V opening/closing member 71 . In addition, the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" will be in a low-probability base state after the jackpot game ends, and during that period it will be difficult to win a prize to the second start port 21. A small win rush period does not occur after the end of the big win game. Here, the special figure stop design data is 15H,
The 22H jackpot corresponds to the “V non-passing scheduled jackpot”. When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. Passage of the game ball to 39 becomes impossible.
As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves both as the V-passing planned opening pattern and the V-non-passing planned opening pattern.

"V passage scheduled jackpot" is divided into "16RV scheduled passage jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R
) V Pass Scheduled Jackpot” and “16R (actually 15R) V Pass Scheduled Jackpot”. The "16RV scheduled jackpot" has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the 2nd big prize-winning mouth 35 for maximum 29.5 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R is the first big prize mouth 3
0 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened by 1
It opens only 0.1 seconds per R, and also opens the second big winning opening 35 only 0.1 seconds per 1R in 14R and 16R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, and the rounds are such that no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 33 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantial 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize-winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and the second big prize-winning hole 35 is opened in 16R.
is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R the second big prize opening 35 is opened for 1R
It opens only 0.1 seconds per time (Fig. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, this "16R (
Substantially 15R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short and no prize balls can be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71
is long open ( FIG. 14 : open pattern 32 ), and it is possible to easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 .

The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the substantial total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13
: open pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, making it a round in which prize balls cannot be expected. In other words, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is substantially 13R
It is a big hit. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is short opening (Fig. 14: opening pattern 34).
, it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special pattern 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V passing schedule jackpot (jackpot with small hit rush),
The V non-passing scheduled jackpot is 60/128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special pattern (special drawing 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot (jackpot with a small hit rush), and V non-passing schedule 4 jackpots
5/128 (about 35.2%). In this way, in the gaming machine 1, the second starting port 21 rather than the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) performed by winning the game ball in the first starting port 20
A jackpot lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) performed when a game ball wins a prize is set so as to be more advantageous to the player.

5. Explanation of Game State The game state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 is a special symbol display device 4
"Probability fluctuation control" and "variation time shortening control" can be executed for the special symbols displayed on 1 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display device 42, respectively. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the probability variation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display device 41 is called "high probability state (high probability state, probability variation state, probability variation state)", and the probability variation A non-controlled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbols. A high probability state is realized by performing a big hit determination. Therefore, in the high-probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal-probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the special symbol display device 41 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern becomes a jackpot pattern increases.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs variable time shortening control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the variable time shortening control is not performed is simply a "non-time saving state". It says. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 is
Judgment of the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) that is determined so that the variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state when in the time saving state Do. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, the special symbols are variable compared to the case where the variation time shortening control is not performed. A short variation time is likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81
Probability variation control and variation time shortening control may be performed simultaneously with respect to the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or only one of them may be performed. However, in this example, as will be described later, an embodiment is shown in which the probability variation control and the variation time shortening control are executed simultaneously.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 . That is, the game control microcomputer 81 normally executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the symbol in the case of the time saving state, and does not execute it in the case of the non-time saving state.
The game control microcomputer 81, as the probability variation control of normal symbols, normal symbol hit determination table T3 ( Using FIG. 8 (C)), hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the probability of winning is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control on the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the normal symbol display device 42 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern becomes a winning pattern increases. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than the non-working time saving state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than the non-time saving state (Fig. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing opening time extension control for the electric chew 22 . In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the control for increasing the number of times of opening the electric chew 22 . Game control microcomputer 8
1, the probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22 Under the circumstances, these controls are performed. The electric tube 22 is opened more frequently than when it is not executed, and the second
The game balls are frequently awarded to the starting port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called the "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called the "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning to the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric sapo control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, the probability fluctuation control for the normal design of the normal design display device 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal design of the normal design display device 42, the electric chew 22
By executing one or more of the opening time extension control for the electric tube 22 and the opening number increasing control for the electric tube 22, the electric tube 2 is more open than when the control is not executed
2 should be easily opened. Further, the high base state (electrical support control state) may be independently controlled without accompanying the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V passage scheduled jackpot is a high-probability state, a short-time state and a high-base state if the passage to the V area 39 is made during the jackpot game. . This game state is particularly referred to as a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability short working time state". The high-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed 10,000 times. In other words, the high-probability base state is actually the next jackpot (next jackpot)
is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is normal probability state (non-high probability State (low probability state) and non-time saving state and low base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability base state is "normal game state",
Alternatively, it may also be referred to as a “low-probability short-time state (also simply referred to as a non-short-time state)”. When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is the low-probability-low base state. In addition, although not implemented in this example, there is also a game state of a normal probability state (non-high probability state, ie, low probability state), a short time state and a high base state (electrical support control state), and this game state is particularly referred to as "low Probability high base state”, “low probability time saving state” (the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and high base state is referred to as “specific game state”). In addition, the state during execution of the special game (jackpot game) may be referred to as "special game state (jackpot game state)".

In high-base states such as high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting to the right. Due to the electric sapo control, it is easier to open the electric tube 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second start opening 21 than the first start opening 20. be. From this, in the high base state, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is struck to the right to win the game ball to the second start port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning prizes to the second starting port 21) than when hitting left, and to generate small hits frequently. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, left playing area 3A by hitting left
The game can be progressed advantageously by entering the game ball into (FIG. 1). This is because in the low base state, the electric support control is not executed, so compared to the high base state,
2 is difficult to open, and it is difficult to win the second starting hole 21. In other words, winning the first starting hole 20 is more difficult than winning the second starting hole 21. This is because it has become easier. For this reason, in the low base state, left-handed hitting is performed in order to make the game ball enter the first start hole 20. - 特許庁As a result, a large number of starting prizes (first starting port 20
) can be obtained.

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 Game control microcomputer 8 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) based on FIGS. 15 to 34
1 will be described. A counter that appears in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81,
Flags, statuses, buffers, etc. are provided in the main RAM 84 . The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the success/failure determination means (FIG. 23) and the success/failure preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83 . In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial setting is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs normal design/special design main random number update process (step S003).
In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81
Various random number counter values shown in (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number,
Fluctuation pattern random number, normal pattern random number, small hit random number) is updated by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (step S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4
msec cycle). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing is finished, until the next main side timer interrupt processing is started, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 while interrupts are disabled, the main-side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after interrupts are enabled.

[Main-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81
Update the various random number counter values shown in (A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing,
It is performed both during the other period (the period from the end of main-side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing).

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S10
2). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole to the main RAM 84. set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (Fig. 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the starting opening sensor detection process (step S103
), normal operation processing (step S104), special operation processing (step S105), V area sensor detection processing (step S106), and pending ball count processing (step S107) are executed in this order. Details of these processes will be described later. After processing the number of pending balls, game control microcomputer 81
performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81
outputs to the sub-control board 90 the commands set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the processes described above. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processes, for example, special figure 2 to be described later
Based on the number of reserved balls, the second special figure reservation display 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number, and the special figure 1
Based on the number of reserved balls, the first special figure reservation display 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal pattern reserved balls is the number of normal pattern reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the normal design reserved ball number is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. The number of normal design holding balls is "
3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal design holding balls (
Step S203), normal design random number acquisition processing is done (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 is the normal symbol random number counter value (FIG. 7: Label-TRND-H
), and stores the acquired random value in the storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls out of the first to fourth storage areas of the normal pattern reserved storage area 86 of the main RAM 84.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4 (
upper limit)” (step S206). What is the number of reserved balls in special figure 2?
It is the number of second special figure reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the number of special figures 2 pending balls is "4" (step S
206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-AS value), the reach random number counter value (Figure 7: label -
TRND-RC value), fluctuation pattern random number counter value (Figure 7: Label-TRND-T1
value), and the value of the small hit random number counter (Figure 7: Label-TRND-K value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in the first to fourth of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b.
Among the storage areas, it is stored in the storage area according to the current special figure 2 pending ball number. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18) described later. memorized (retained)
Let After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). The details of the special figure 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won the first start hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. When the game ball wins the first start port 20 (
Step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S211). The number of special 1 pending balls is the first
It is the number of special figure reservations, more specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of first special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4" (step S21
1: YES), this processing ends. If the number of special figure 1 pending balls is "3" or less (step S21
1: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 pending balls (step S212), special figure 1 relation random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are obtained according to the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208) described above. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in the storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 is
For the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described later, the acquired random number group is temporarily stored (held) in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a .
After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). The details of the special figure 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 pre-determination process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (
step S301). If the variable probability flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, the prior determination is not performed. on the other hand,
When the probability variation flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 has a big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8
), the high-probability state table is referred to and the jackpot prior determination is performed (step S3
02). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (Fig. 1
7: Acquire a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer in step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs prior determination of whether or not a big hit is made by using a big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and a big hit random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability variation flag is ON), game control microcomputer 81
is a table for high-probability states (where the jackpot determination value is "0
” to “649”) to determine in advance whether or not it is a jackpot. That is, when the jackpot random value is "0" to "649", it is pre-determined as "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is "losing".
determine in advance. In addition, in this embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later. Pre-determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "losing" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, a jackpot type random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the buffer for pre-determination by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) to get Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9).
), the jackpot type is determined in advance. Here, the jackpot type random value is "
Any of 0" to "127" is pre-determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later, but as another embodiment, different from the jackpot type determination table T5 Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs fluctuation pattern prior determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81, first, variation pattern random number as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And get the reach random value. Next, here, since the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state (FIG. 11), the jackpot prior determination result of step S304, Reach presence or absence pre-determined results obtained from the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern is specified from the fluctuation pattern random number. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may differ depending on the number of held balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that can be selected depending on the difference in the number of held balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence/absence pre-determination result, the presence of reach is pre-determined, and when the variation pattern random number value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "
Two of the variation pattern “P64” which is selected when the number of balls on hold is “1 to 2” and the variation pattern “P68” which is selected when the number of held balls is “3 to 4” are selected. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25), which will be described later, is used for preliminary determination, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T
Pre-determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from 6.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result (a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of a jackpot) and a variation pattern pre-determination result. Game control microcomputer 8
1 sets the created pre-determined command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 pre-determination process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (
step S401). Contrary to the special figure 2 pre-determination process described above, if the probability variation flag is ON (
Step S401: YES), this processing ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: N
O), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) and performs the big hit prior determination (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S
213) acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer. Next, here, since it is a normal probability state (variable probability flag is OFF),
The game control microcomputer 81 pre-determines whether or not it is a big hit based on the normal probability state table (big hit determination value is "0" to "164") out of the big hit determination table T1.
That is, when the big hit random number is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". Incidentally, for the jackpot preliminary determination, a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. After that, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the above-mentioned special figure 2 pre-determination processing (FIG. 18) step S30
4 to S308, the description is omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of normal operation processing (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO)
, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbols are fluctuating (step S5
02). When the normal pattern is changing (step S502: YES), the process is step S50
Skip to 8. When the normal pattern is not fluctuating (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in the normal pattern is "0" (step S
503). If the number of pending balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process is terminated.
When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is once set to "1" in step S203 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17). ”, and then, in this step S504, the reservation is digested and immediately the number of reserved balls of the normal design becomes “0”. This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, step S207 of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 17)
And in step S212, once the number of reserved special symbols becomes "1", then step S1404 and step S1410 in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later.
At , the reservation is digested and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8C) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, the normal pattern random number value ( random number). Then, the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not the time saving state), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not the game is successful.
For example, in a non-time-saving state, if the normal symbol random number is "0" to "2", "hit"
If the normal symbol random number value is other than that, it is determined as "losing" (Fig. 8 (C
)reference).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8 (D
)) to select a variation pattern (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol variation. Select the fluctuation time of the normal design as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined as "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined as "1 second" (see FIG. 8(D)). . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern, thereby starting the variable display of the normal symbol (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and ended. The variable time in the normal design is the variable time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). If the variable time has not ended (step S50
8: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the variable time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variable display (step S509), (Step S510: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES
S), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric tube 22 is determined by the electric tube opening pattern determination table T7 (
Selection is made with reference to FIG. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22. to select. Here, when the non-time-saving state, "open pattern 11" is selected, when the time-saving state, "open pattern 12"
is selected. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chewing operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and finishes this process.

In the above-described step S501, if the electric tube 22 is in operation (step S501:
YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes to the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum winning number (for example, 6 pieces), or the time to close the electric chew 22 after the operating time of the electric chew 22 has passed Either one of the things that has been reached is fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520
: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process finish.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of special operation processing (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage corresponds to the "special operation status"
1", "2", "3", and "4". When the "special action status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, big hit determination, small hit determination, variation pattern selection and the like are executed. When the "special action status" is "2" (step S130
1: NO, step S1303: YES), perform processing during special symbol fluctuation (step S
1304). In the special symbol fluctuation process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special action status" is "3" (steps S1301, S130
3: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1
306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of the big hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303,
S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessary product process, a big hit game or a small hit game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special action status is "1" by default.

In the special action process, the process related to the first special symbol display device 41a and the process related to the second special symbol display device 41b are made independent, and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed in parallel. may be configured to allow simultaneous variation of the In this case, the first special symbol display 4
1a and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) are divided into four stages, and each stage is "1", "2", " 3
”, and “4”. In addition, the processing related to the second special symbol display 41b and the big winning device is 4
Divided into two stages, each stage is "1", "2", "3" of "Special Figure 2 Operation Status"
, called “4”. The initial setting of "special figure 1 operation status" and "special figure 2 operation status" is "1". The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not one of the "special figure 1 operation status" and the "special figure 2 operation status" is "4". When either "special figure 1 operation status" and "special figure 2 operation status" is "4", special electric accessary product processing is performed. In the special electric accessary product process, a big hit game or a small hit game is executed. Specifically, when the special figure 1 operation status is "4", the jackpot game by the special figure 1 jackpot is executed. When the special figure 2 operation status is "4", a big hit game or a small hit game by the special figure 2 big hit is executed. When neither the "special figure 1 operation status" nor the "special figure 2 operation status" is "4", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1", "2", or "3". ” is determined. "Special figure 1 operation status" is "
1", the special figure 1 standby process is performed. In the special figure 1 standby process, hit determination of special figure 1, variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2", perform the special figure 1 changing process. In special figure 1 fluctuating process, the output of fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has elapsed. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "3", the special figure 1 determination process is performed. In the special figure 1 determination process, the output of the opening command etc. is executed at the time of the big hit or the small hit in the special figure 1 lottery. "Special figure 1 operation status" is "1", "2" or "3"
After performing the determination, the game control microcomputer 81, the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1
”, “2”, or “3”. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1", the special figure 2 standby process is performed. In the special figure 2 standby process, the hit determination of the special figure 2, variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2", perform the special figure 2 changing process. In special figure 2 fluctuating process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the special figure 2 fluctuation time elapses. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "3", the special figure 2 determination process is performed. special figure 2
In the confirmation process, the output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of the big hit or the small hit in the special figure 2 lottery. As described above, according to the special operation process of the present embodiment, the standby process of the special figure 1, the process during fluctuation, the confirmation process and the standby process of the special figure 2, the fluctuation process, the confirmation process are executed in parallel be. On the other hand, the jackpot game and the small hit game are executed preferentially over the special figure 1 and special figure 2 standby processing, variation processing, and determination processing.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1400). If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1400: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 21 If not, the process proceeds to step S
1407. If the number of special figures 2 pending balls is "1" or more (step S1400: N
O), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a small hit determination process (step S1401). In the small hit determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the small hit determination with reference to the small hit determination table T10 (FIG. 8). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first stores a small hit random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. It is determined whether or not it is a small hit by reading out and using the read out small hit random value and the small hit determination table T10. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 turns ON the small winning flag when the result of the small winning judgment is "small winning", and sets the special figure stop design data corresponding to the small winning design in the buffer of the main RAM 84. , the process ends. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes big hit determination processing (step S1402) and variation pattern selection processing (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later.

After the variation pattern selection process, decrement the number of special figure 2 pending balls by one (step S1
404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81, the first to fourth of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b
The storage location of the reservation information (various random values) stored in the storage area is shifted by one from the current position to the side to be read, and stored in the farthest place from the side to be read in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. Clear the pending information (step S1405). For example, when pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. if you have
Clear the pending information stored in the fourth storage area. By the above steps, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved image 9B (four reserved images 9B
Among them, the leftmost reserved image 9B) is shifted to the reserved digested image display area side and displayed as a reserved digested image 9C. Also, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (of the four reserved images 9B, the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reserved images 9B from the left)
are shifted left by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2". note that,
To the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process,
Small hit determination processing (step S1401) and information about the special figure stop design data set in, big hit determination processing (step S1402) and information about the special figure stop design data set in the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) It contains information about the set fluctuation pattern (including information about fluctuation time).

In step S1401, if the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "0" (step S1401:
YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "0" (step S1407). When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S140
7: YES), that is, when the random number group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20 is not stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, the process proceeds to step S1413.
When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410).
Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. Along with clearing the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the first special figure pending storage area 85a (step S1411). By the above steps, the first
It will be digested in the order that the special figure hold was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved image 9A (of the four reserved images 9A, the rightmost reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (out of the four reserved images 9A, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9 from the left
A) are each shifted one to the right (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 is a special figure 1
Fluctuation start processing is performed (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. A variable time timer has
A variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop design data set in the big hit determination process (step S1408) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern (including information on variation time) set in step S1409).

In step S1407, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407:
YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is the standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81, for example, turns on/off a demonstration screen display flag for customer waiting.
You may judge by FF. If the standby screen is displayed (step S1413: YES), the process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for the lapse of the predetermined standby time, and sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414)
, terminate this process. As described above, according to the special symbol waiting process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed with priority over digestion of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure reservation is a jackpot (V passage scheduled jackpot) that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure reservation. It has become easier to be elected to

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the big hit determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Special figure 2 jackpot determination processing (step S1402) and special figure 1 jackpot determination processing (step S1408) are the same in process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). If the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501
: YES), the high-probability state table in the big-hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) is referred to and the big-hit determination is performed (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 8
1, first, read out the jackpot random number value as a judgment value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 and the big hit random number value to refer to. here,
Since it is in a high probability state (probability variable flag is ON), it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the table for high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") out of the big hit determination table T1.

In step S1501, if the probability variation flag is OFF (step S1501: NO
), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the big win determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to make a big win determination (step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), it is a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") among the big hit determination tables T1 determine whether or not

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES
), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S15
06), the jackpot type is determined (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as the determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After judging the jackpot type,
The special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the identified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the big hit determination is "losing" (the result of the small hitting determination is also "losing"), the special figure stop design data (01H) corresponding to the losing design is provided in the main RAM84. It is set in the jackpot type buffer (step S1520), and the process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 show variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 22: steps S1403, S14
09). Variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403)
And the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of special figure 1 has the same process flow, so it will be described collectively. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Determination of whether or not it is in the time saving state is made depending on whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When it is a time saving state (step S1600: YES), a process transfers to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 has the jackpot flag set to O
It is determined whether or not it is N (step S1602). When the big hit flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1610). If the small hit flag is OFF (step S1
610: NO), the process moves to step S1607. If the small hit flag is ON (
Step S1610: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the table for the non-time-saving state small hit in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) (step S1611). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first changes the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as the table for the non-time-saving state small hit, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. (Address is set). "P34" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), game control microcomputer 8
1 determines whether the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604
), the determination of the jackpot type is performed based on the special figure stop symbol data set in the main RAM84.

If the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S160
5). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1, the first special figure reservation storage area 85
Read out the fluctuation pattern random value stored in the first storage area of a (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ” to “P3
” part, in the special figure 2, the address where the variation pattern is “P21”, “P22” part) is set). From the read variation pattern random number, either "P1" ~ "P3" as the variation pattern in the special figure 1, "P21" or "P22" in the special figure 2 is selected.

If the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). to select a variation pattern (step S16
06). Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. "P4" ~ "P6" part, the part where the variation pattern is "P23" in the special figure 2) is set). From the read fluctuation pattern random number, either "P4" to "P6" as the fluctuation pattern in Special Figure 1, or "
P23” is selected.

In step S1610, if the small hit flag is OFF (step S1610:
NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ready-to-win random number is the ready-to-win random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the second
The reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random number. Here, because it is a non-time saving state,
Of the reach determination table T2, the presence or absence of reach is determined based on the table for the non-time-saving state (the portion where the reach presence determination value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13").

When the reach random number is the reach establishment random number (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of reach with loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for loss with non-time-saving state reach, out of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P14", the part of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) is referred to. special figure 1
Then, the read variation pattern random value, from the current special figure 1 reserved ball number (1 to 4), one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the variation pattern. In the special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value read and the current number of special figure 2 pending balls (1 to 4) are used as the variation pattern "P2
4” to “P31” is selected. Since the selected variation pattern changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works. That is, in both special figures 1 and 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Short fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. As a result, when the number of retained balls is large, the digestion speed of special figure retention can be increased.

When the reach random number is not the reach establishment random number (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the reach-less loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state reach-less loss, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. "P16"
part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is "P32" ~ "P33" part) is referred to. In the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value read out and the number of the current special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4) are selected as the variation pattern, either "P15" or "P16". In special figure 2, from the read fluctuation pattern random number and the current number of special figure 2 pending balls (1 to 4), as a fluctuation pattern "
Either "P32" or "P33" is selected. Also here, since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). After that, the processing of steps S1614 to S1621 is the same as the processing of steps S1604 to S1611 described above except for the following points, so the description thereof is omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1614 to S1621 and the processing of steps S1604 to S1611 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621, the part of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is the steps S1605 and S16 described above.
06, S1608, S1609 and S1611. Specifically, S1605, S16
In 06, S1608, S1609, S1611, while the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state (FIG. 10) is referred to, steps S1615, S1616, S16
18, in S1619 and S1621, the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state (Fig. 1
1) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V passing scheduled jackpot (in the special figure 1, the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 is "P41" to "P43
” part, the part where the fluctuation pattern is “P61” or “P62” in the special figure 2) is referred to. From the read fluctuation pattern random number, "P41" to "P
43”, or “P61” or “P62” in Special Figure 2. Also, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot,
Of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. "P63") is referred to. From the read fluctuation pattern random value,
In special figure 1, the variation pattern is either "P44" to "P46", and in special figure 2, "P63
” is selected. Also, for example, in the case of step S1621, that is, in the case of a small hit,
Of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11, the part corresponding to the small hit ("P74" part) is referred to. "P74" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

Selection of variation pattern as described above (steps S1605, S1606, S1608, S
1609, S1611, S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, S1621
), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process ( FIG. 16 : step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is started.

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbols started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special action status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). for example,
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbols with a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801
). The contents of the game state management process will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). Jackpot flag is OFF
(step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1810). Small hit flag is OFF
If so (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "1" (step S1808), and terminates this process. As a result, the big winning game and the small winning game are not started, and the process shifts to the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) again, and the big winning determination, the small winning determination, etc. for the next hold are executed.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), game control microcomputer 8
1 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening/closing member according to the type of the winning jackpot (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop pattern data, and selects the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71.
The value of the round counter together with the set of the opening pattern of the large winning opening and the V opening and closing member,
Set the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot you won. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game.
Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs game state reset processing (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). after that,
The special action status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening according to the type of the big win with the small hit rush (step S1811). . Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop pattern data, and selects the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "20H", "opening pattern 25" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening. After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "4" (step S1807), and ends this process.

[Game State Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES
), the value of the variable probability counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the high probability state. here,
"10000" is set to the variable probability counter when transitioning to the high probability state. As a result of decrementing the variable probability counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). When the value of the variable probability counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the variable probability flag is switched to OFF (step S2004). In addition, when "10000" is set to the variable probability counter, the value of the variable probability counter does not actually become "0".

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES),
The value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). What is a time saving counter?
It counts the number of variations of special symbols executed during the time saving state. Here, "10000" is set to the time-saving counter at the time of transition to the time-saving state. Game control microcomputer 81
As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). When the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008). In addition, when "10000" is set to a time saving counter, the value of a real time saving counter will not become "0".

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information (probability variable state or not, probability variable counter value, time saving state or not, time saving counter value, etc.) on the current game state set just now.

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of game state reset processing (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. If the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: Y
ES), and switches the variable probability flag to OFF (step S2102). Step S2103
, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process is finished. Time saving flag is O
In the case of N (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In other words, during execution of the jackpot game, it becomes a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state.
In the gaming machine 1, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “jackpot end flag” is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the jackpot game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening/closing member operation processing for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30. In the V opening/closing member operation process, , the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when a predetermined game ball wins. The details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later.
After the V opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), game control microcomputer 8
1 determines whether or not the conditions for opening the big winning opening are established (step S2203). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a ball has entered the large winning opening opening start opening 17 as a condition for opening the large winning opening. If there is no entry into the special winning opening opening starting opening 17, it is determined that the conditions are not satisfied. Grand prize opening start opening 1
7, the game control microcomputer 81 further determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening. The time to open the big prize gate is, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot has passed and the time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big prize gate that was temporarily closed after opening is reopened. Interval time up to (
closing time) has passed and it is time to start opening again. If the above conditions are not satisfied (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When the above conditions are satisfied (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the kind of big win. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208).
. The round designation command includes information about the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84 . In addition, in this embodiment, the large winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the opening of the large winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round specification command,
Finish this process.

In the above-described step S2202, if the large winning opening is open (step S2202:
YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes won into the big prize gate in the round game has reached a prescribed maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or that the time has come to close the big prize gate. (that is, that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has passed since the opening of the big winning opening) is satisfied.
Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the conditions for closing the big winning opening are satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has passed since the big winning opening was closed. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), game control microcomputer 8
1 terminates this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", a jackpot ending command is set as jackpot end processing for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passage scheduled It has the same length as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", the player will receive "16R (substantially 13R)
) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" can make it possible to recognize that the game ball did not pass through the V area 39. - 特許庁It should be noted that the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" has the same length as these. After starting the ending of the jackpot, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229),
Finish this process.

In the above step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2
200: YES) Since the final round has ended, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed (step S2230). If the ending time has not passed (step S2230: NO), game control microcomputer 8
1 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (step S223
0: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special action status to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special action process. after that,
A game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

In addition, in the special electric accessary product processing, as described above, the big winning opening in the jackpot game (first
In addition to the opening processing of the big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35), the opening processing of the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) in the small winning game is also performed. Although not shown, specifically, when the small hit flag is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 opens a large winning opening ( After opening the second large prize winning port 35), it is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the large prize winning port (Fig. 13) are satisfied. Close the grand prize gate (
blockage) (end of the small winning game). After that, the small winning flag is turned OFF, and the special operation status is set to "1".

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation processing (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (current round) is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round
The round corresponds to the open round of the V opening/closing member 71 . The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the value of the round counter is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7" and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this processing ends. V opening and closing member 71 in the round
This is because there is no need to activate the

If it is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502
). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball has won the first big winning hole 30 in the round. When the first winning flag is ON (step S2502:
YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2502).
2503). If the winning of the first ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. In the round concerned, there is no winning in the first big prize opening 30, and the V opening/closing member 71
This is because there is no need to activate the

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), game control microcomputer 8
1 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 and performs V effective period setting processing (
step S2504). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), in either case of "short opening" or "long opening", the first ball wins. This is for the purpose of executing a short release (here, 0.1 seconds) at times. In addition, when the V opening and closing member 71 is short-circuited, the opening time of the V opening and closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that wins the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 V area 7
configured to pass through 0. In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is opened and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 second) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and the V opening/closing member 71 is being opened. and 1 second after closing is set as the V validity period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means that
This means that the V flag is turned ON based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (see V area sensor detection processing (FIG. 33) described later). Further, "determine that the game ball detection by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 is that there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. The period until the game ball entering the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a is considered. i.e.
Here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V area 39) is detected during the V effective period, and the V flag is not turned ON when the V passage is detected outside the V effective period (V invalid period). I'm doing it. In addition, when the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned ON, that is,
The game state after the jackpot game is set to the high probability state (the game state setting process described later (FIG. 32
)reference). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being set to a high probability state by turning on the V flag based on passing through the V due to a fraudulent act. After the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first big winning hole 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (
Step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), game control microcomputer 8
In 1, the V open/close member 71 is opened for a long time, and the V effective period setting process is performed (step S2523). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (Fig. 14(B)), in the case of "long opening", when the second ball wins, the long opening (here, maximum 31.5 seconds) ) is executed. In addition, here, since the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the big winning opening is 29.5 seconds + interval closing time is 2 seconds), generally, the winning of the second ball is Time from time to end of round is 31.5
shorter than a second. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 has a relatively long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71, at least a part of the game balls after the second ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 will move through the V area 39. configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81
The V valid period is set while the opening/closing member 71 is open, and the V invalid period is set when the V opening/closing member 71 is closed at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2
524) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening/closing member 71 is open. When the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, two seconds) has elapsed since the big winning opening was closed. make a judgment.

When the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2
551), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S255).
2). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 controls the V opening/closing member 7
1 is forcibly closed, and after several seconds (here, one second) have elapsed after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71,
The V invalid period is set, and this processing ends.

When the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is, for example, V
For example, a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after the opening/closing member 71 is opened. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and this processing ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), the process ends while the V opening/closing member 71 is kept open and the V effective period continues.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S
2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 advances the process to step S2309. On the other hand, in step S2301,
When the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "10000" (step S2305), and turns off the V flag. (Step S2306). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 turns ON the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets "10000" to the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes "high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, high probability and high base). This high-probability/high-base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of special symbols is performed 10,000 times, or the next jackpot is won.
In the high-probability state, the jackpot probability is about 1/101, and in reality, the jackpot is almost reached before the 10000 jackpot lottery is performed in the high-probability base state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the big hit in the special symbol 2 (via the second start port) in the time saving state and the big hit scheduled to pass through V (special figure stop symbol data 20H, 21H) is the big hit game If V passes in the middle, the game state after the big win will be in a high-probability high base state until the next big win, and it is almost guaranteed that it will be a small win rush.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information about the game state set just now.

[V area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball is not detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is during the V valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is determined by the V opening/closing member operation processing (see FIG. 3).
This is the period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of 1). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds. be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V valid period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this processing. .

[Processing of pending pitches]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701).
Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a pending ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, and includes information on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls. . After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of Production Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94 .

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. Production control microcomputer 91
reads a program for executing a sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93 when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "
1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupt processing (step S4015), and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) and updates it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Moreover, the random number may be added by 2 or more instead of adding 1 each time. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (
step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S40
35) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is performed by the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle.
It is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. After the sub-side timer interrupt processing ends, the random number update processing is repeatedly executed until the next sub-side timer interrupt processing is started.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs the process during the fluctuation production (step S4305).
. The process during fluctuation production is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the fluctuation production to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display production, the details of which will be described later. After the processing during the variation production, the production control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the received command analysis process and the like.
Various commands set in the effect command set area 94 b (output buffer) of 94 are transmitted to the image control board 100 , the sound control board 106 , the lamp control board 107 and the relay board 108 . The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the main display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the voice control board 1 that receives various commands
06 executes a sound effect of outputting sound from the speaker 67 according to the received command. Upon receiving various commands, the lamp control board 107 executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number update processing.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If received (step S44
15: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). "Prefetching effect determination processing" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect, and determining a prefetching effect pattern in the case of execution. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-described look-ahead effect determination processing is skipped.
The look-ahead effect is a effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 contains a big hit, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it has received a pending ball number command from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If received (step S444
5: YES), pending display processing is performed (step S4450). In the pending display process, based on the information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided. The values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the general figure reservation effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure pending effect counter, the second special figure pending effect counter, and the general figure pending effect counter, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If received (step S445
5: YES), a variable effect start process is performed (step S4460). "Variation production start processing" is a process of selecting a variation production pattern (contents) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, if not received (step S44
55: NO), skip the above-described variable effect start processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If received (step S446
5: YES), end processing of fluctuation production is done (step S4470). "Variation effect end processing" is a process for stopping the variation effect that is executed during the special symbol variation. In the fluctuation production end processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production. As a result, the decoration pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 during fluctuation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. In addition, when the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S4465: NO)
, Skip the above-mentioned fluctuation production end processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If received (step S4
475: YES), opening effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4480)
). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets the information on the special figure stop pattern data set at the time of judging the winning of the jackpot, which is included in the opening command, in the sub-RAM 94.例文帳に追加Then, select the production pattern of the opening production that is preset corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data,
The sub-RAM stores an opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect.
94 is set in the effect command set area 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the command transmission process (Fig. 36: step S43)
15) is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 of the image control board 100
reads a predetermined opening effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 . In addition, in step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If received (step S4
485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490).
"Round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special figure stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds contained in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is transmitted to the sub RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b.
When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, when the round designation|designated command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round production|presentation pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If received (step S4
495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500)
). "Ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM94.
When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 stores a predetermined ending effect image in the ROM 10.
3 and displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition, when the ending command is not received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545).
. In other processes, for example, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, information on the game state included in the game state designation command (whether it is a high probability state, whether it is a time saving state, counter, time-saving counter value, etc.) are held in the sub-RAM 94. Moreover, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control makes sub RAM94 hold|maintain the information which V passed, when V passage command is received. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.),
End this process.

[Look-ahead effect determination processing]
FIG. 38 is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a pre-determination information rewriting process (step S4
601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the prior determination command received from the main control board 80, the jackpot prior determination result (jackpot determination information), the jackpot type prior determination result (jackpot type information), and the variation The pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. In the advance determination information storage area 94c, in addition to the above-described jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information, prefetch effect pattern information is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect to be executed during the variable effect, and will be described later in step S4.
Selected at 604 . FIG. 39 (A) shows, as a preliminary determination result corresponding to each of the first to third special figures 2 pending, the jackpot determination information "losing" and the variation pattern information "P72
' and 'P73' are stored in the first to third storage areas, and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area. Figure 39 (B), there is a prize of special figure 2 from the state of FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the prior determination information, the jackpot determination information "jackpot" and the jackpot type information "2
1H” and variation pattern information “P61” are stored. In addition, in each of the 1st to 4th storage areas corresponding to the 1st to 4th special figures 2 reserved, and the area corresponding to the variation, "Pattern A ” is set. Fig. 39(C)
39B shows a state in which the change has ended and the advance determination information shift processing has been executed from the state of FIG. Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the relevant area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the 4, the pre-determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the fluctuation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602).
. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas. If prefetch effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES
), the process ends. That is, the area of the advance determination information storage area 94c, the first to
When pre-reading performance pattern information is stored in any of the 4 storage areas, pre-reading performance pattern information is newly selected and not stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot".
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "loss with reach" (step S4603). Whether or not it is a “big hit” or “losing with reach” can be determined by, for example, the result of prior determination of the variation pattern (variation pattern information). When the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "no reach", the effect control microcomputer 91 (step S4
603: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, if the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether to execute pre-reading effect, And, prefetch effect pattern selection is performed (step S4
604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the prefetch effect random number random number, and refers to the acquired random value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether to perform or not, and the look-ahead effect pattern in the case of performing the look-ahead effect are determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. Figure 40
So, if the pre-judgment result is "big hit" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0-55", the pre-reading effect is "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "56-67", the pre-reading effect is "
When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. Also, if the pre-judgment result is "losing with reach" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0 to 107", the pre-reading effect will be "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "108-114", as a pre-reading effect When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-read effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area A prefetch effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area concerned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39B, in addition to setting "Pattern A" in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, the first to third storage areas and Also set "Pattern A". This will
The look-ahead effect pattern A is also executed in the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (variable effects corresponding to this area and the first to third storage areas). Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing for executing the look-ahead performance has already passed, the look-ahead performance is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead performance, it is executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. In step S4604, if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is not executed (step S46
05: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flow chart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (step S5
000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information on the special figure stop design data included in the variation start command and the information on the variation pattern to the sub-RAM 94 . The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, pattern information indicating a pattern as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the pattern information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 .

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs basic production pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic production pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable production (for example, the display of the background image on the main display device 7 and its switching, the display of a predetermined character and its operation, the output of the melody and sound effect using the speaker 67). , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as a chance-up effect and a look-ahead effect on the basic effect. The production control microcomputer 91 has a sub ROM 9
3, the basic performance pattern is determined by referring to the basic performance pattern determination table T52.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, there are multiple types of basic production patterns for normal reach production, multiple types of basic production patterns for SP1 production, multiple types of basic production patterns for SP2 production, S
Multiple types of core performance patterns for P3 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP4 performance, and multiple types of core performance patterns for SP5 performance (dedicated reach performance pattern for performing a pseudo-jackpot suggestive performance, which will be described later). , A plurality of types of basic production patterns that perform a reachless loss production and a plurality of types of basic production patterns that carry out a small hit production are set. The type of basic effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. In addition, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", the basic effect pattern for performing the reach-less loss effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P74", a basic effect pattern for performing a small hit effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs chance-up effect pattern determination processing (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. A performance control microcomputer 91 acquires a counter value of a chance-up random number, refers to the acquired random number and a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in a sub ROM 93, and determines a chance-up performance pattern.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, of the chance-up production pattern determination table T53, only the portion for determining the variable production pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time-saving state is shown. That is, FIG.
It shows the chance-up effect pattern executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 has variation patterns of "P21" to "P34", "P41" to "P56".
It may or may not have a portion for determining the chance-up effect pattern to be executed in the cases of "P61" to "P74".

In FIG. 43, "2-NO", "2-SP1", and "2-S" are used as the chance-up effect patterns.
P2""2-SP3""3-NO""3-SP1""3-SP2""3-SP3""4-
NO","4-SP1","4-SP2","4-SP3", and "ANO" are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects, which will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and combinations of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed. may be determined. Based on these, it is determined what kind of effect is performed as the variable effect.

The effect control microcomputer 91 stores a variable effect start command in the sub-RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized.
is set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) (step S5020)
. When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the variable effect image. It is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect timer (step S503
0), the process ends. A variable time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, if the variation pattern is
P1", "40 seconds" is set to the variable effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation effect]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the processing during the fluctuation effect (FIG. 36: step S4305).
The production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variable production is in progress (step S4701).
. Whether or not the variable effect is being performed can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variable effect timer is zero. If the variable effect is not being executed (step SS4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command from the effect control microcomputer 91 to inform the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect. , the effect contents are switched, a specific image is displayed, etc., in accordance with the information included in the command before the end of variation.

If it is not the timing to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: NO
), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is time to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area of the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the pre-variation end command containing the prefetch effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-fluctuation end command that does not include look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is the look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the look-ahead effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead effect for displaying a look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 . On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the preview fade effect of fading the preview image.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 Image control microcomputer 101 provided on image control board 100 (FIG. 4) based on FIG.
operation will be described. A RAM 104 is provided with buffers and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 . FIG. 45 is a flowchart of display control processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it has received a variation effect start command from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variable effect display (
step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable effect start command, and converts the predetermined variable effect image instructed in the variable effect start command to R
It is read from the OM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG. On the other hand, if not received (step S5001: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-change end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If received (step 5
003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-variation end command, and if the pre-variation end command includes pre-reading effect pattern information, reads out a predetermined pre-reading effect image from the ROM 103, and displays it on the main display device. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a.
Also, even if the command before the end of the fluctuation does not contain the pre-reading effect pattern information,
If a preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a preview fade effect is performed to fade the preview image. On the other hand, if not received (step S5003
: NO), skip the above process.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it has received a command to end the variation effect from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If it has been received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the image in which the variable effect is stopped to R
It reads from the OM 103 and performs a variable effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 (step S5006). On the other hand, if not received (step S500
5: NO), skip the above process.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S5007).
). In other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads from the ROM 103 a predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command, and displays it on the display screen of the main display device 7. 7a. Further, when a round effect start command is received, a predetermined round effect image instructed in the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the ending effect start command is received, a predetermined ending effect image instructed in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and this processing ends.

9. Operation of Movable Board and Sub Display Device 10 Referring to FIGS. 46 to 59, the movable board (first movable accessory 14 and second movable accessory 15),
The operation of the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) will be described. The production control microcomputer 91 controls the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, the left sub-display device 10L, and the
Drive control for operating the right sub-display device 10R is performed. In addition, the production control microcomputer 91
performs a display effect for displaying a specific image on the main display device 7 or the sub-display device 10 during a game effect (display effect) or during an initial operation when the power is turned on.

The operation of the left sub-display device 10L will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48. FIG. Figure 46 shows
FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating upward movement of the left sub-display device 10L; FIG. 47 shows the left sub-display device 1
FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying right rotation of 0L; FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the left sub-display device 10L. The left sub-display device 10L has a rectangular display screen and is configured to be vertically movable and horizontally rotatable. The left sub-display device 10L is at the retracted position (
home position) (first mode). At this time, the left sub-display device 1
0L is positioned at the lower left corner of the display screen 7a, and the lower left part is difficult for the player to see. The left sub-display device 10L moves upward (advances) from the retracted position in FIG.
When it moves to the intermediate position shown in , it rotates clockwise from that position as shown in FIG.
It can move to the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 48 and stop there (second mode). In this second mode, the left sub-display device 10L stops in front of the main display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The left sub-display device 10L is configured such that the orientation of the display screen changes by 90 degrees between the retracted position in FIG. 1 and the advanced position in FIG. The left sub-display device 10L can be moved (retracted) from the advanced position shown in FIG. 48 through the states shown in FIGS. 47 and 46 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, where it stops. can be done.

The operation of the right sub-display device 10R will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. FIG. Figure 49 shows
FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating upward movement of the right sub-display device 10R; FIG. 50 shows the right sub-display device 1
FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating left rotation of 0R; FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the right sub-display device 10R. Like the left sub-display device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R has a rectangular display screen, and can be vertically moved and horizontally rotated so that its movement mode (movement trajectory) is symmetrical with the left sub-display device 10L. is configured to allow The right sub-display device 10R can rest at the retracted position (home position) shown in FIG. 1 (first mode). At this time, the right sub-display device 10R is positioned at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and the lower right portion is partially invisible to the player. The right sub-display device 10R moves upward (advances) from the retracted position in FIG. 1 to a relay position (relay position) shown in FIG.
0, it can move to the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 51 and stop there (second mode). In this second mode, the right sub-display device 10R
stops on the front surface of the main display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.
Here, the advanced position of the right sub-display device 10R and the advanced position of the left sub-display device 10L are the same position. However, these advancing positions may differ. For example, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R may be adjacent to each other near the center of the display screen 7a when they are in their advanced positions. The right sub-display device 10R is configured such that the orientation of the display screen changes by 90 degrees between the retracted position in FIG. 1 and the extended position in FIG. The right sub-display device 10R
By moving (retracting) from the advanced position shown in FIG. 51 through the states shown in FIGS. 50 and 49, it is possible to move to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 and stop there.

As shown in FIG. 52, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R can be moved upward (relay position) in parallel. Also, it can be stopped at this relay position.

The operation of the first movable accessory 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. FIG. 53 shows the first
FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement (advance movement) of the movable accessory 14 in the advance direction; FIG. 54 shows the first
FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the movable accessory 14; FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the rotation operation of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. As shown in FIG. 53, the first movable accessory 14 is the left movable accessory 1
4L and a right movable accessory 14R. Left movable accessory 14L and right movable accessory 14R
are configured to be movable in the left-right direction, respectively, and half of the decorative portion (the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion) on which a smiley face is drawn is attached to the tip side. The first movable accessory 14 is shown in FIG.
, the left movable accessory 14L can rest at the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable accessory 14R can rest at the retracted position (home position) at the right side of the display screen 7a (first mode). . At this time, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are partially visible. As for the first movable accessory 14, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move from the state shown in FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a (to approach each other) as shown in FIG. As a result, at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 54, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion are united to form one decorative member (rotating body) (second mode). In this second mode, the rotating body formed by uniting the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion is the main display device 7
, it stops so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the rotating body can rotate rightward and leftward (rightward rotation in the drawing) in front of the display screen 7a, and can stop at an arbitrary tilted angle. The first movable accessory 14 can be moved (retracted) from the advanced position shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 through the state shown in FIG. 53 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, where it stops. be able to.

The operation of the second movable accessory 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. FIG. 56 shows the second
FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the movable accessory 15; 57A and 57B are explanatory diagrams exemplifying the rotation operation of the second movable accessory 15. FIG. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion labeled "OARO", and is configured to be vertically movable and horizontally rotatable. The second movable accessory 15 is
As shown in FIG. 1, it can rest at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to be visually recognized. The second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the center of the display screen 7a from the state shown in FIG. 1, and can stand still at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 56 (second mode). . In this second mode, the decorative portion stops on the front surface of the main display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 57, this decorative portion
In front of the display screen 7a, it can be rotated to the right and to the left (rotated to the right in the drawing), and can be stopped at an arbitrary tilted angle. The second movable accessory 15 can move (retreat) upward from the advanced position shown in FIGS. 56 and 57 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can stand still there.

A combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the first combination performance by the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. FIG. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the second combination performance by the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. FIG. As shown in FIG. 58, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are both in the second mode, thereby executing the first combination effect. In other words, both the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 move to the advanced position, so that the second movable accessory 15 partially covers the upper portion of the first movable accessory 14 . In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can stand still in a state in which they are partially overlapped and combined.
59, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are separated from each other by the second movable accessory 15
covers the upper part of the first movable accessory 14, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15
can perform a second combination performance in which the two are tilted at the same angle. In this second combination effect, after the first combination effect, the two movable accessories are formed by rotating (tilting) together, and by moving to the advanced position and overlapping each other in a tilted state. In some cases, the second combination effect is performed directly without going through the first combination effect.

10. Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modified Examples, and Aspect Examples of the Present Embodiment Below, each effect example (display effect example, character object movable effect example) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described. The effect to be described from now on is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above, based on the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). Note that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG. In some cases, the pending display (holding icon) is omitted in the display effect examples, but it is actually displayed unless otherwise noted.

Sub-display-device-linked effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. FIG. This sub-display device interlocking effect can be executed during a variable effect of decorative symbols (for example, during a pseudo-continuous effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the sub-display device interlocking effect, RO
The corresponding image data is read out from M103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screens of the sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R). Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the sub-display device interlocking effect is included, the left sub-display device 10L or the right sub-display device 10R is displayed. ) position and tilt.

[Sub display device interlocking effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display-device-linked effect A. FIG. In the sub-display device interlocking effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 60A, the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). . A display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays a specific image TG1. The specific image TG1 represents the appearance of a specific target. Here, the specific image TG1 is a smile face image.
The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 60(B) to 60(C), the specific image TG1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 moves in the lower left direction and moves to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 60B, the specific image TG1 is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. Here, the sub-display device 10 covers a part of the main display device 7, and an image of the portion of the main display device 7 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the sub-display device 10. be. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(C), the entire specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(D), the specific image TG1 displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R disappears from the right sub-display device 10R, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed.
, a new specific image TG2 is displayed. The specific image TG2 is an image representing the appearance of a specific target, and is a smiley face image here, like the specific image TG1. The specific image TG2 is an image larger than the specific image TG1. Here, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in the area above the right sub-display device 10R. Note that the specific image TG2 may be the specific image TG1 that is enlarged and moved while maintaining its display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(E), the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) move from the retreat position (home position) to the upper relay position (relay position), It stops (stops) at the intermediate position. The specific image TG2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is the sub-display device 10 at the relay position (the right sub-display device 10R).
) is partially covered by In other words, the sub-display device 10 stands still (stops) at a position covering a portion of the main display device 7 where the specific image TG2 is displayed. At this time, a part of the specific image TG2 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R). In other words, the sub-display device 10 displays an image corresponding to the portion covered by the sub-display device 10 in the specific image TG2 displayed on the main display device 7 . In other words, while the specific image TG2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, the portion displayed on the sub-display device 10 gradually increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(F), a reduction effect is executed in which the specific image TG2 is reduced.
Here, the specific image TG2 is reduced and moved downward while maintaining the straddling display between the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, and as shown in FIG. 60(G), the specific image TG2
is displayed on the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(H), the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) move from the relay position (relay position) to the retracted position (home position) below, Stop (stop) at the retracted position. At this time, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 so that the relative position with respect to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, the specific image TG2 moves upward on the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R) when the sub-display device 10 moves downward. After that, the specific image TG2 is sequentially displayed on the main display device 7 in the portions protruding from the upper side of the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R). That is, the specific image TG2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, and the portion displayed on the main display device 7 gradually increases. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 60(G) to 60(I), the specific image TG2 is entirely displayed on the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device) without changing its relative position with respect to the main display device 7. 10R), the whole is displayed on the main display device 7
is switched to the state displayed in . After that, as shown in FIG. 60(J), with the specific image TG2 displayed on the main display device 7, the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 1) is newly displayed.
0R), the specific image TG3 is displayed. The specific image TG3 is an image representing the appearance of a specific target, and here, it is a smiley face image, similar to the specific image TG1.

[Sub display device interlocking effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display-device-linked effect B. FIG. 61(A) to 61(C) of sub-display device interlocking effect B are shown in FIGS. 60(A) to 60(C) of sub-display device interlocking effect A.
Same as C). That is, in the sub-display device interlocking effect B, first, as shown in FIG. ing. A display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays a specific image TG1. The specific image TG1 represents the appearance of a specific target. here,
The specific image TG1 is a smile face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 61(B) to 61(C), the specific image TG1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 moves in the lower left direction and moves to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 61B, the specific image TG1 is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. Here, the sub-display device 10 covers a part of the main display device 7, and an image of the portion of the main display device 7 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the sub-display device 10. be. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61(C), the entire specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61(D), the specific image TG1 displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R disappears from the right sub-display device 10R, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed.
, a new specific image TG2 is displayed. The specific image TG2 is an image representing the appearance of a specific target, and is a smiley face image here, like the specific image TG1. The specific image TG2 is an image larger than the specific image TG1. Here, the specific image TG2 is displayed in an area near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG. Note that the specific image TG
2, the specific image TG1 may be enlarged and moved while maintaining its display.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 61(E) to 61(F), the right sub-display device 10R is moved to the retracted position (
By moving upward from the home position) and turning left at the intermediate position (intermediate position), it moves to the advanced position (deployed position) and stops there. Part of the specific image TG2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is covered when the right sub-display device 10R is moved to the advanced position. In other words, the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R) stands still (stops) at a position covering a portion of the main display device 7 where the specific image TG2 is displayed. At this time, a portion of the specific image TG2 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R).
In other words, the sub-display device 10 displays the specific image TG displayed on the main display device 7.
2, the image corresponding to the portion covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed. That is, the specific image TG2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, and the portion displayed on the sub-display device 10 gradually increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(G), a reduction effect is executed in which the specific image TG2 is reduced.
Here, the specific image TG2 is scaled down while maintaining the display across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, and the entire specific image TG2 is displayed on the sub-display device 10 (the right sub-display device 10R).
to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(H), the right sub-display device 10R moves from the advanced position (unfolded position) to the retracted position (home position) by rotating clockwise and moving downward, and stands still (stops) at the retracted position. . At this time, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 so that the relative position with respect to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, the specific image TG2 moves leftward on the right sub-display device 10R when the right sub-display device 10R is rotated to the right. After that, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the right sub-display device 1.
The parts protruding from the left side of 0R are sequentially displayed on the main display device 7 . In other words, while the specific image TG2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, the specific image TG2 gradually
The portion displayed on the main display device 7 is increased. As a result, the specific image TG2 is shown in FIG.
As shown in 1(G) to FIG. 61(I), the entire image is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R without changing the relative position with respect to the main display device 7, and then the entire image is displayed on the main display device 7. is switched to the state displayed in . Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61(J), while the specific image TG2 is being displayed on the main display device 7, the specific image TG3 is newly displayed on the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R). The specific image TG3 is an image representing the appearance of a specific target, and here, it is a smiley face image, like the specific image TG1.

[Sub display device interlocking effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display-device-linked effect C. FIG. In the sub-display device interlocking effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 62A, the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). . On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are displayed. Here, the decorative patterns form a reach, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (here, "5" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative pattern 8C
is shown variably.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 62(B) to 62(C), the decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG. The decorative pattern 8Z1 is an image of a pattern (number) that becomes a big hit when stopped as a middle decorative pattern in the ready-to-win performance, and is the same pattern (number) as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. Here, it is "5". Since this decorative pattern 8Z1 also represents a number as a specific object, it corresponds to a specific image. The decorative pattern 8Z1 is
It moves in the lower left direction and moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 62(B), the decorative design 8Z1 is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.
Here, the sub display device 10 covers a part of the main display device 7, and the sub display device 1
In 0, an image of a portion of the main display device 7 covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(C), the entire decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62(D), the decorative pattern 8Z1 displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R disappears from the right sub-display device 10R, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed.
to be displayed. The decorative design 8Z1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is larger than when displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. Here, the decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed in an area near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG. Note that the decorative pattern 8Z1 may be moved while being enlarged while maintaining its display.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 62(E) to 62(F), the left sub-display device 10L is moved to the retracted position (
By moving upward from the home position) and rotating right at the intermediate position (intermediate position), it moves to the advanced position (deployed position) and stops there. The decorative pattern 8Z1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered when the left sub-display device 10L is moved to the advanced position. In other words, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L) stops (stops) at a position covering part of the main display device 7 where the decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed. At this time, a part of the decorative pattern 8Z1 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L).
In other words, the sub-display device 10 displays the decorative pattern 8Z displayed on the main display device 7.
1, the image corresponding to the portion covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed. That is, the decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the portion displayed on the sub display device 10 gradually increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(G), a reduction effect is executed in which the decorative pattern 8Z1 is reduced.
Here, the decorative pattern 8Z1 is scaled down while maintaining the display across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the entire decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed on the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L).
to be displayed. At this time, an effect image E, which is a luminescent image, is placed around the decorative pattern 8Z1.
F is displayed. The effect image EF is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 . This effect image EF suggests that "5" of the decorative design 8Z1 has been determined as the middle decorative design 8C. In other words, it suggests that the jackpot has been confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(H), the left sub-display device 10L moves from the advanced position (unfolded position) to the retracted position (home position) by left rotation and downward movement, and stops (stops) at the retracted position. . At this time, the decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 so that the relative position with respect to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, the decorative pattern 8Z1 moves rightward on the left sub-display device 10L when the left sub-display device 10L is rotated counterclockwise. After that, the decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed on the left sub-display device 1.
The parts protruding from the right side of 0L are sequentially displayed on the main display device 7 . That is, while the decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, gradually
The portion displayed on the main display device 7 is increased. As a result, the decorative pattern 8Z1 is shown in FIG.
As shown in 2(G) to FIG. 62(I), the entire image is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L without changing the relative position with respect to the main display device 7, and then the entire image is displayed on the main display device 7. is switched to the state displayed in . After that, as shown in FIG. 62(J), in a state where "5, 5, 5" as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed (stopped) on the main display device 7. , the left decorative design 8ZL, the middle decorative design 8ZC, and the right decorative design 8ZR are displayed (stopped display) on the sub-display device 10 (the right sub-display device 10R and the left sub-display device 10L). The decorative design 8ZL, the middle decorative design 8ZC, and the right decorative design 8ZR are images corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R displayed on the main display device 7, and are confirmed and displayed almost simultaneously. be.

[Sub display device interlocking effect D]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display-device-linked effect D. FIG. In the sub-display device interlocking effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 63A, the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). . On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are displayed. Here, the decorative patterns form a reach, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (here, "5" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative pattern 8C
is shown variably.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63B, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the sub display device 1 are displayed.
A plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 are displayed across both of the display screens of 0. The decorative pattern 8Z1 is
In the ready-to-win performance, it is an image of a pattern (number) that becomes a big hit when stopped as a middle decorative pattern, and is the same pattern (number) as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. here,
It is "5". Since this decorative pattern 8Z1 also represents a number as a specific object, it corresponds to a specific image. A plurality of decorative patterns 8Z1 are displayed in a ring, and each moves along a ring track. Here we are moving clockwise. A part of the plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 arranged in a circle is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10, and the other part is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG. The decorative pattern 8Z1 located at the lower right moves in the lower left direction and moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 63(B), the decorative design 8Z1 is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. here,
The sub-display device 10 covers part of the main display device 7 , and an image of the portion of the main display device 7 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the sub-display device 10 . Similarly, the lower decorative pattern 8Z1 moves to the left and moves from the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R to the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The decorative pattern 8Z1 positioned at the lower left moves to the upper left and moves from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG. After that, the display of the plurality of decorative patterns 8Z1 disappears, and the entire decorative pattern 8Z2 is newly displayed near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. 63(C).

After that, as shown in FIG. 63(D), the decorative pattern 8Z1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is enlarged while maintaining the display. The display of the decorative pattern 8Z2 may disappear once, and then the enlarged decorative pattern 8Z2 may be displayed again. In addition, decorative pattern 8
Z2 may be one of the plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 moved.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 63(E) to 63(F), the left sub-display device 10L is moved to the retracted position (
By moving upward from the home position) and rotating right at the intermediate position (intermediate position), it moves to the advanced position (deployed position) and stops there. The decorative pattern 8Z2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered when the left sub-display device 10L is moved to the advanced position. In other words, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L) stops (stops) at a position covering a portion of the main display device 7 where the decorative pattern 8Z2 is displayed. At this time, a part of the decorative pattern 8Z2 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L).
In other words, the sub-display device 10 displays the decorative pattern 8Z displayed on the main display device 7.
2, the image corresponding to the portion covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed. That is, the decorative pattern 8Z2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the portion displayed on the sub display device 10 gradually increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(G), a reduction effect is executed in which the decorative pattern 8Z2 is reduced.
Here, the decorative pattern 8Z2 is scaled down while maintaining the display across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the entire decorative pattern 8Z2 is displayed on the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L).
to be displayed. At this time, an effect image E, which is a luminescent image, is placed around the decorative pattern 8Z2.
F is displayed. The effect image EF is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 . This effect image EF suggests that "5" of the decorative design 8Z2 has been determined as the middle decorative design 8C. In other words, it suggests that the jackpot has been confirmed. Also, on the main display device 7, a plurality of decorative patterns 8Z1 are displayed in a ring. Each of the plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 is moving along an annular trajectory. Here we are moving clockwise. A part of the plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 arranged in a circle is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, and the other part is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG. A plurality of decorative designs 8Z1 are displayed so as to surround the decorative design 8Z2 displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(H), the left sub-display device 10L moves from the advanced position (unfolded position) to the retracted position (home position) by left rotation and downward movement, and stops (stops) at the retracted position. . At this time, the decorative pattern 8Z2 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 so that the relative position with respect to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, the decorative pattern 8Z2 moves rightward on the left sub-display device 10L when the left sub-display device 10L is rotated to the left. After that, the decorative pattern 8Z2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 1.
The parts protruding from the right side of 0L are sequentially displayed on the main display device 7 . That is, while the decorative pattern 8Z2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, gradually
The portion displayed on the main display device 7 is increased. As a result, the decorative pattern 8Z2 is shown in FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 3(G) to 63(I), the entire image is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L while the relative position with respect to the main display device 7 remains almost unchanged, and the entire image is displayed on the main display device 7. is switched to the state displayed in . After that, as shown in FIG. 63(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R of "5, 5, 5" are fixedly displayed (stopped) on the main display device 7. , the left decorative design 8ZL, the middle decorative design 8ZC, and the right decorative design 8ZR are fixedly displayed (stopped display) on the sub-display device 10 (the right sub-display device 10R and the left sub-display device 10L). The decorative design 8ZL, the middle decorative design 8ZC, and the right decorative design 8ZR are images corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R displayed on the main display device 7, and are confirmed and displayed almost simultaneously. be.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the sub-display device interlocking effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. After that, the sub-display device 10 moves from the first position and stands still (stops) at a second position covering a part of the main display device 7 where the specific image TG2 is displayed, Main display device 7
and a second effect of displaying, on the sub-display device 10, an image corresponding to the portion covered by the sub-display device 10 in the specific image TG2 displayed on the screen. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. 61(D) to 61(F), 62(D) to 62(F), 63(D) to 63
(F) is the same.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60(E) to 60(G), after the second effect, a specific A third effect in which the image TG2 is displayed in a reduced size, and a fourth effect in which the entire reduced specific image TG2 is displayed on the sub display device 10 after the third effect can be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 61(F) to 61(G), FIGS. 62(F) to 62(G), and FIGS. 63(F) to 63(G).
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60(G) to 60(I), after the fourth effect, the sub display device 10 moves from the second position to the first position. At the same time, a fifth effect in which the entire reduced specific image TG2 is displayed on the main display device 7 can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. FIGS. 61(G) to 61(I), FIGS. 62(G) to 62(I), and FIGS. 63(G) to
The same applies to FIG. 63(I).
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60(B) to 60(C), before the first effect, when the sub display device 10 is stopped at the first position, the sub A sixth effect in which the specific image TG1 is displayed on the display device 10 can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. Fig. 61(B) ~
The same applies to FIGS. 61(C), 62(B) to 62(C) and 63(B).
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61(D) to 61(F),
The orientation of the sub-display device 10 differs between when it is stopped at the first position and when it is stopped at the second position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 62(D) to 62(F) and FIGS. 63(D) to 63(F).
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the specific image is a decorative pattern, so that the player can be visually entertained and enjoyment can be enhanced.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the pending icon interlocking effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the sub-display-device-linked effect A of FIG.
It is assumed that both L and the right sub-display device 10R move upward. However, the configuration may be such that only the right sub-display device 10R moves upward and the left sub-display device 10L does not move upward.

[Modification 2]
In the sub-display-device-linked effect B of FIG. 61, the right sub-display device 10R is assumed to move.
However, the left sub-display device 10L may be moved. In the sub-display-device-linked effect C of FIG. 62 and the sub-display-device-linked effect D of FIG. 63, the left sub-display device 10L moves. However, the configuration may be such that the right sub-display device 10R moves.

[Modification 3]
The contents of the respective sub-display-device-linked effects A to D in FIGS. 60 to 63 may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the sub-display device interlocking effect A in FIG. 60, the specific images shown in FIGS.
3 decoration patterns may be adopted.

[Modification 5]
In the sub-display-device-linked effects shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, some of the effects described above may not be provided, and other effects may be added. For example, the sub-display-device interlocking effect shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 may be executed while the decorative symbols are fluctuating, and the variable display of the decorative symbols may be displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
a first display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
a second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
The first display means is configured to be movable,
a first effect in which a specific image representing a specific target is displayed on the second display means;
After the first effect, the first display means moves from the first position, and the second display means covers a portion of the second display means where the specific image is displayed. and displaying, on the first display means, an image corresponding to a portion of the specific image displayed on the second display means that is covered by the first display means. 2 performances and
executable,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
a third effect in which, after the second effect, the specific image displayed across the first display means and the second display means is reduced and displayed;
a fourth effect in which the entire reduced specific image is displayed on the first display means after the third effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2,
After the fourth effect, the first display means moves from the second position to the first position, and the entire reduced specific image is displayed on the second display means. the fifth
Able to perform the production of
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
Before the first effect, when the first display means is stopped at the first position, a sixth effect can be executed in which the specific image is displayed on the first display means. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-4,
The orientation of the first display means differs between when the first display means is stopped at the first position and when it is stopped at the second position,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-5,
The specific image is a decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative symbol variation stop effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. FIG. This decorative symbol variation stop effect can be executed during the decorative symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the decorative pattern variation stop effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is an effect of displaying images on the screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R, the illumination panel 18, and the like. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the near side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10 .

[Decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect A]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation stop effect A. FIG. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9
A and 9C are white pending icons with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this reach performance,
The decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (7 patterns in the drawing), and the ready-to-win display is performed in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. This reach display is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 1.
It is displayed across 0L and the right sub-display device 10R. The reach display represents a so-called reach state. In this ready-to-win effect, a predetermined character performs various effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(C), a loss display effect 1 is performed. In this losing display performance 1, the decorative symbols 8C are stopped at 6 symbols in the ready-to-win display, and the losing symbols are displayed. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped with a double roll, it becomes a big win pattern, and when it is stopped and displayed with a roll other than a double roll, it becomes a losing pattern. This lost pattern is displayed across the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(D), a loss display effect 2 is performed. In this loss display effect 2, the loss pattern is moved to the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a and displayed. At this time, the lost symbol ZA1 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. This missing design Z
A1 is "7 6 7" like the missing symbols indicated by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect B]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation stop effect B. FIG. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 65(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9
A and 9C are white pending icons with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(B), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this reach performance,
The decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (7 patterns in the drawing), and the ready-to-win display is performed in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. This reach display is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 1.
It is displayed across 0L and the right sub-display device 10R. The reach display represents a so-called reach state. In this ready-to-win effect, a predetermined character performs various effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), a left sub-display device movement effect is performed. In this left sub-display device movement effect, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the home position to the expanded position and moves to the approximate center of the display screen 7a. This is an effect displayed on the display device 10L. At this time, the pending icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L has moved to the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), a loss display effect 1 is performed. In this losing display performance 1, the decorative symbols 8C are stopped at 6 symbols in the ready-to-win display, and the losing symbols are displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped with a double roll, it becomes a big win pattern, and when it is stopped and displayed with a roll other than a double roll, it becomes a losing pattern. This missing pattern is
It is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(E), a loss display effect 2 is performed. In this loss display effect 2, the left sub-display device 10L returns from the developed position to the home position, and the decorative pattern 8C displayed on the decorative pattern 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, all the lost symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the lost symbol ZA1 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. This lost pattern ZA1 is a decorative pattern 8L, 8C
, 8R, it is "7 6 7".

[Decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect C]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation stop effect C. FIG. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 66(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9
A and 9C are white pending icons with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this reach performance,
The decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (7 patterns in the figure), and the ready-to-win display is performed in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. This reach display is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 1.
It is displayed across 0L and the right sub-display device 10R. The reach display represents a so-called reach state. In this ready-to-win effect, a predetermined character performs various effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), a left sub-display device movement effect is performed. In this left sub-display device movement effect, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the home position to the unfolded position and moves to approximately the center of the display screen 7a. This is an effect displayed on the display device 10L. At this time, the pending icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L has moved to the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), a big win display effect 1 is performed. In this big win display performance 1, the decorative symbols 8C are stopped at 7 symbols in the ready-to-win display, and the big winning symbols are displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped with a double roll, it becomes a big win pattern, and when it is stopped and displayed with a roll other than a double roll, it becomes a losing pattern. This jackpot symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(E), a big win display effect 2 is performed. In this big win display effect 2, the left sub-display device 10L returns from the expanded position to the home position, and the decorative pattern 8C displayed on the decorative pattern 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a. i.e.
All the jackpot symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left sub-display device 1
At 0L, a jackpot symbol ZA2 is displayed. This jackpot pattern ZA2 is "7 7 7" like the jackpot patterns shown by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect D]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation stop effect D. FIG. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 67(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9
A and 9C are white pending icons with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this reach performance,
The decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed with the same pattern (7 patterns in the figure), and a plurality of other decorative patterns are also displayed with the same pattern (7 patterns in the figure), and the decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a high-speed fluctuation display. be In this case, the decorative symbols representing the 7 symbols are arranged in a circle and move counterclockwise. As shown in the figure, a plurality of reach lines LN are formed by a plurality of decorative patterns showing 7 patterns.
A reach indication is formed at . Also, this reach display is displayed across the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R. In this ready-to-win effect, a predetermined character performs various effects. The ready-to-win line LN is a line for displaying the ready-to-win state by temporarily stopping decorative symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), a left sub-display device movement effect is performed. In this left sub-display device moving effect, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the home position to the expanded position, moves to the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and displays the fast-changing decoration pattern displayed on the display screen 7a. 8C is an effect displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. At this time,
A plurality of decorative patterns representing seven patterns including the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are moved counterclockwise.
Also, the pending icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L is changed to the right sub-display device 10R.
are moving to

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(D), a big win display effect 1 is performed. In this jackpot display effect 1, seven decorative patterns 8C are stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win display, and the jackpot patterns are displayed on a plurality of ready-to-win lines LN. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed on the left sub-display device 1.
Stopped display at 0L. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped with a double roll, it becomes a big win pattern, and when it is stopped and displayed with a roll other than a double roll, it becomes a losing pattern. This jackpot symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(E), a big win display effect 2 is performed. In this big win display effect 2, the left sub-display device 10L returns from the expanded position to the home position, and the decorative pattern 8C displayed on the decorative pattern 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a. i.e.
All the jackpot symbols formed on the plurality of reach lines LN are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the jackpot symbol ZA2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. This jackpot pattern ZA2 is "7 7 7" like the jackpot patterns shown by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R.
Incidentally, the decorative symbol variation stop effect is performed in the same variation. However, it is not limited to this, and may be performed in a plurality of variations.

[Modification]
In the decorative symbol variation stop effect, after the losing symbol or the big winning symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, the losing symbol ZA1 or the big winning symbol ZA2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. In this case, after the losing symbol or the jackpot symbol is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L or the right sub-display device 10R, the losing symbol ZA1 or the symbol ZA2 may be displayed on the display screen 7a.
In the decorative symbol variation stop effect, after the left sub-display device 10L moves to the front of the display screen 7a, the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L display the losing symbol ZA1 or the jackpot symbol. In this case, the display screen 7a moves and the left sub-display device 10L
, and a losing symbol ZA1 or a big winning symbol may be displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L. Alternatively, both the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L may be moved to display the losing symbol ZA1 or the jackpot symbol on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L.
In the decorative symbol variation stop effects C and D, a button image representing the effect button 63 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L (for example, on the decorative symbol 8C) during the left sub-display device movement effect, and the player is informed. It is also possible to urge the player to press the effect button 63 and display the big winning pattern when the effect button 63 is pressed. Also, the effect button is displayed on the big win symbol, and by pressing the effect button 63, a predetermined effect (for example, a re-lottery effect of changing the big win symbol) may be performed.
In the decorative symbol variation stop performances A to C, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R may be moved when displaying a losing symbol or a jackpot symbol during a ready-to-win performance. For example, the moving decorative design may rotate around the decorative design 8C. in this case,
When the moving decorative design overlaps the losing design ZA1 or the big winning design ZA2, it may pass behind the losing design ZA1 or the big winning design ZA2.
Further, in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effect D, the decorative symbols on a plurality of reach lines LN may be moved when displaying a losing symbol or a big hit symbol during the ready-to-win effect. For example, the moving decorative design may rotate around the decorative design 8C. In this case, when the moving decorative pattern overlaps the jackpot pattern ZA2, it may pass behind the jackpot pattern ZA2.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative symbol fluctuation stop production will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the above-mentioned decorative design fluctuation stop production, after the decorative design is displayed on the display screen 7a, the display screen 7
A and the left sub-display device 10L (right sub-display device 10R) display a losing pattern or a jackpot pattern (predetermined stop mode of decorative patterns). According to this configuration, two display devices can be used to enhance the interest of the display performance of the decorative symbols, and as a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Effect 2]
The decorative symbol variation stop effect is performed in the same variation. According to this configuration,
An effect in which decorative patterns are displayed on the display screen 7a, and a losing pattern or a jackpot pattern on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L (right sub-display device 10R) (predetermined mode of stopping decorative patterns).
Since the effect of displaying is experienced as a series of effects, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effects C and D, after the big winning symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a,
The jackpot symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L (right sub-display device 10R). According to this configuration, by using two display devices, it is possible to improve the interest of the display performance of the big winning symbols, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop effects B to D, when the big winning symbol is formed, the display screen 7a
and at least a part of the symbols forming the jackpot symbols displayed on the left sub-display device 10L are moved and displayed. According to this configuration, by using two display devices, it is possible to improve the interest of the display performance of the big win symbols, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the above-mentioned decorative design fluctuation stop effect, the same decorative patterns (7 patterns) displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L are displayed before the jackpot patterns and the losing patterns are stopped and displayed (for example, during the ready-to-win effect). displayed moving. According to this configuration, by using two display devices, it is possible to improve the interest of the display performance of the big win symbols, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZA-1]
A gaming machine comprising first display means and second display means different from the first display means,
The first display means and the second display means are each capable of executing a plurality of types of display effect,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a decorative pattern on the first display means,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying the decorative pattern in a predetermined stop mode on the first display means and the second display means,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZA-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZA-1,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect in the same variation,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZA-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZA-1 or aspect ZA-2,
The predetermined stop mode of the decorative pattern in the second display effect is a mode representing a jackpot pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZA-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZA-3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect in which the same pattern as the pattern forming the big win pattern in the second display effect is displayed by moving on the first display means and the second display means,
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and the third display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZA-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZA-1 to ZA-4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect in which the same decorative pattern is displayed by moving between the first display means and the second display means,
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, and the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed, the first display effect is performed after the fourth display effect, and the second display effect is performed after the first display effect. to be
A gaming machine characterized by:

Note that the above aspect may be modified as follows.
o When the first jackpot pattern is displayed on the first display means and the second display means, the second jackpot pattern is displayed on either the first display means or the second display means. be.
○ After either the first display means or the second display means has moved (in front of the other display means), the first display means and the second display means display the jackpot symbols.
Also, when the moved display means returns to the home position, it displays the second jackpot pattern.
A plurality of jackpot lines are formed by the first display means or the second display means, and jackpot patterns are displayed on each line.
○ After the button image is displayed on either the first display means or the second display means, the jackpot pattern is displayed on the first display means and the second display means by pushing the button.
○ A plurality of decorative patterns are moved between the first display means and the second display means. At this time, the plurality of decorative symbols move behind the second jackpot symbol.
○ A button image representing the production button 63 is displayed on the decorative pattern 8C.

The special variation effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71. FIG. This special variation production can be executed during the variation production of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101
analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a special variable performance, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen of the display device 10 . Also, in the special variation effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 drives the sub-display device 10 via the lamp control board 107 .

[Special change effect A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the special variation effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 68(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at the retracted positions (home positions). A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Reservation image 9A is a reservation image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a,
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 68(C), a zone entry effect is executed. In the zone entry effect, a message image “Popular zone entry” is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 . The hot zone is an effect that is performed during a predetermined period of time during the fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is
The effect is that the left sub-display device 10L moves linearly from the retracted position to the intermediate position, as indicated by the arrow YG1. At this time, of the image displayed on the display screen 7a, the image of the portion covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68(E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotation movement effect is
The effect is that the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position toward the advanced position as indicated by the arrow YG2. At this time, of the image displayed on the display screen 7a, the image of the portion covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(F), a movement completion effect is executed. This movement completion effect is
The effect is that the left sub-display device 10L finishes moving and stops at the advanced position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68(G), a middle symbol variation effect is executed. This middle pattern variation effect is a effect of variably displaying the middle effect pattern 8C, which is one row of the effect patterns 8L, 8C and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is shown as the medium effect symbol 8C "3" moving downward as indicated by the arrow YG3.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68(H), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. This middle symbol stop effect is an effect of stopping and displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, it is shown that "5", which is the medium effect symbol 8C, is stopped on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

[Special change effect B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the special variation effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 69(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at the retracted positions (home positions). A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Reservation image 9A is a reservation image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a,
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 69(C), a zone entry effect is executed. In the effect of entering the zone, a message image “entering the hot zone” is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 . The hot zone is an effect that is performed during a predetermined period of time during the fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is
The effect is that the left sub-display device 10L moves linearly from the retracted position to the intermediate position, as indicated by the arrow YG1. At this time, of the image displayed on the display screen 7a, the image of the portion covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotation movement effect is
The effect is that the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the intermediate position toward the advanced position as indicated by the arrow YG2. At this time, of the image displayed on the display screen 7a, the image of the portion covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(F), a movement completion effect is executed. This movement completion effect is
The effect is that the left sub-display device 10L finishes moving and stops at the advanced position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68(G), a middle symbol variation effect is executed. This middle pattern variation effect is a performance that variably displays the middle effect pattern 8C, which is one row of the effect patterns 8L, 8C and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, in particular, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the middle effect pattern 8C is the effect pattern 8L of the display screen 7a.
, and 8R. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the middle production pattern 8C
"3" is fluctuating downward as indicated by the arrow YG3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(H), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. This middle symbol stop effect is an effect of stopping and displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, in particular, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the middle effect pattern 8C is the effect pattern 8L of the display screen 7a.
, and 8R. Here, it is shown that "5", which is the medium effect symbol 8C, is stopped on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

[Special variation effect C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the special variation effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 70(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at the retracted positions (home positions). A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Reservation image 9A is a reservation image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a,
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 70(C), a zone entry effect is executed. In the zone entry effect, a message image “Popular zone entry” is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 . The hot zone is an effect that is performed during a predetermined period of time during the fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70(D) to (H), medium symbol variation effects are executed. In this middle symbol variation effect, the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is variably displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L moved to the advance position. It is a performance to do.

First, as shown in FIG. 70(D), "3", which is the medium effect symbol 8C, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 while moving downward as indicated by the arrow YG1. Next, FIG.
As shown in (E), "3", which is the middle effect symbol 8C, moves downward as indicated by the arrow YG2, and appears on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. displayed across. Next, as shown in FIG. 70(F), "3", which is the medium effect symbol 8C, is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L while moving downward as indicated by the arrow YG3.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70(G), "3", which is the medium effect symbol 8C, moves downward as indicated by the arrow YG4, while the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L and the main display device 7 It is displayed straddling the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70(H), "3", which is the medium effect symbol 8C, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display screen 7 while moving downward as indicated by YG5.

[Special change effect D]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the special variation effect D. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 71(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at the retracted positions (home positions). A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Reservation image 9A is a reservation image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a,
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIGS. 71(C) and (D), the middle symbol variation effect is executed. This middle pattern variation production is a production that variably displays the middle production pattern 8C, which is one row of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG. Here, the display screen 7a shows that "3", which is the medium effect symbol 8C, moves downward as indicated by the arrow YG1. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71(D), "3", which is the medium effect symbol 8C, moves downward as indicated by an arrow YG2. At this time, the left sub-display device 10L is in the retracted position, and the middle effect symbol 8C is not displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, FIG. 71(E) fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. This confirmation stop effect (loss) is an effect for fixing and stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a.
Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both "5", and the middle production pattern 8
An example in which C is "4" is shown.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the special variation effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C among the variable displays of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R performed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed on the left sub-display device 1.
This can be done on the display screen of 0L (Fig. 68 (G), Fig. 69 (G), Fig. 70 (D
) to (H)). According to this configuration, the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C can be made to feel special, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the left sub-display device 10L moves so as to overlap with the medium effect symbol 8C that is variably displayed on the display screen 7a (FIGS. 68(D), (E), (F), FIG. ) (E)
(F)), the middle effect symbol 8C is variably displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L (Fig. 68(G), Fig. 69(G), Figs. 70(D) to (H)). According to this configuration, the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C can be made to feel special, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect symbol 8C in one of the three rows of effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is variably displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the variable display of a specific line of performance symbols, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the middle symbol variation effect, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and straddles the display screen 7a and the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Left sub-display device 1
After being displayed on the display screen of 0L, the middle effect pattern 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10.
It is displayed straddling the display screen of L and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 . According to this configuration, the variable display of the medium effect symbol 8C can be made to feel special, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, triggered by the execution of the zone entry effect (Fig. 68 (C), Fig. 69
(C), FIG. 70(C)), the variable display of the medium effect pattern 8C is performed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a range to the zone presentation, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the middle effect symbol 8C displayed on the left sub-display device 10L can be displayed larger than the effect symbols 8L and 8R of the display device 7a (FIG. 69(G)
(H)). According to this configuration, the variable display of the medium effect symbols 8C can be made to feel even more special, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the special variation effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the left sub-display device 10L was used for the effect, but in addition to or instead of the left sub-display device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R may be used to display the middle effect pattern 8C. .
[Modification 2]
In the above description, the middle effect pattern 8C, which is one line of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. It may be displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
[Modification 3]
In the above, when the zone entry effect is executed (Fig. 68 (C), Fig. 69 (C), Fig. 70 (C
)) Although the left sub-display device 10L is used to variably display the middle effect pattern 8C, when the zone entry effect is executed, the left sub-display device 10L is used to variably display the middle effect pattern 8C. and the case of not performing the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C using the left sub-display device 10L (FIG. 71).

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A3-1]
a first display device capable of performing a variable display of performance symbols;
A gaming machine comprising a second display device different from the first display device,
The display screen of the second display device is capable of performing the variable display of the performance symbols of a predetermined row among the variable display of the performance symbols performed on the display screen of the first display device. game machine.

[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
A gaming machine, wherein the second display device moves so as to overlap the performance symbols of the predetermined row of the first display device, and performs a variable display of the performance symbols of the predetermined example.

[Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined row of performance symbols is one row of performance symbols among a plurality of rows of performance symbols.

[Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
During the variation, the effect symbols of the predetermined row are displayed on one of the display screens of the first display device and the second display device, and then straddle the display screens of the first display device and the second display device. and is displayed on the other display screen.

[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, triggered by execution of a specific effect, the variable display of the effect symbols of the predetermined row is performed on the display screen of the second display device.

[Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-5,
A game machine, wherein the effect symbols displayed on the display screen of the second display device are larger than the effect symbols displayed on the display screen of the first display device.

[Aspect A3-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-5,
A gaming machine characterized in that, even when the specific effect is executed, the variable display of the effect symbols of the predetermined row may not be performed on the display screen of the second display device.

Character display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. FIG. This character display effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the character display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. , the left sub-display device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R, the illumination panel 18, and the like. Note that the illumination panel 18
is a transparent display panel, which is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10 .

[Character display effect A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect A. FIG.
In the character display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 72(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R.
These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), character display effect 1 is performed. In this character display effect 1, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), character display effect 2 is performed. In this character display effect 2, the character CRA is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L and then moved to the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), character display effect 3 is performed. In this character display effect 3, the character CRA is displayed again near the center of the display screen 7a.
After this, the reach performance is performed.

[Character display effect B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect B. FIG.
In the character display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 73(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R.
These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), character display effect 1 is performed. In this character display effect 1, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), character display effect 2 is performed. In this character display effect 2, the left sub-display device 10L moves to the expanded position near the center of the display screen 7a (where the character CRA was displayed in the character display effect 1).
This is an effect in which the character CRA displayed in a is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.
Note that the pending icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L is now displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.
are moving to

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), character display effect 3 is performed. In this character display effect 3, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the expanded position to the home position, and the character CRA is again displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.
After this, the reach performance is performed.

[Character display effect C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect C. FIG.
In the character display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 74(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R.
These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), character display effect 1 is performed. In this character display effect 1, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), character display effect 2 is performed. In this character display effect 2, the left sub-display device 10L moves to the expanded position near the center of the display screen 7a (where the character CRA was displayed in the character display effect 1).
The character CRA displayed on the screen a is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. In the character display effect 2, the illumination panel 18 displays the character focus image ZB1.
is displayed. This character focus image ZB1 is displayed in a portion other than the portion corresponding to the left sub-display device 10L, and is an image for emphasizing the character CRA. or an image representing a predetermined emblem or the like. Note that the character focus image ZB1 may be displayed in a portion of the illumination panel 18 excluding the character CRA of the left sub-display device 10L. Also, the pending icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L has moved to the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D), character display effect 3 is performed. In this character display effect 3, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the expanded position to the home position, the character CRA is again displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, the character focus image ZB1 on the illumination panel 18 is erased, and that portion is displayed. passes through. The pending icon 9A is returned to the left sub-display device 10L and displayed again.
After this, the reach performance is performed.

[Character display effect D]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect D. FIG.
In the character display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 75(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R.
These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), character display effect 1 is performed. In this character display effect 1, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75(C) and (D), character display effects 2 and 3 are performed. That is, in the character display effects 2 and 3, the left sub-display device 10L
is driven toward the expanded position (near the center of the display screen 7a where the character CRA is displayed), and when it reaches the position of the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a, it gradually hides the character CRA on the display screen 7a. An image corresponding to the hidden portion of the character CRA is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(E), character display effect 4 is performed. In this character display effect 4, the left sub-display device 10L moves to the expanded position near the center of the display screen 7a (where the character CRA was displayed in the character display effect 1).
The character CRA displayed on the screen a is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. In the character display effect 2, the illumination panel 18 displays the character focus image ZB1.
is displayed. This character focus image ZB1 is displayed in a portion other than the portion corresponding to the left sub-display device 10L, and is an image for emphasizing the character CRA. or an image representing a predetermined emblem or the like. Note that the character focus image ZB1 may be displayed in a portion of the illumination panel 18 excluding the character CRA of the left sub-display device 10L. Also, the pending icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L has moved to the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), character display effect 5 is performed. In this character display effect 5, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the expanded position to the home position, the character CRA is again displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, the character focus image ZB1 on the illumination panel 18 is erased, and that portion is displayed. passes through. The pending icon 9A is returned to the left sub-display device 10L and displayed again.
After this, the reach performance is performed.

[Modification]
In the character display effects C and D, when the left sub-display device 10L moves to the position of the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a, the character C is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.
The characters CRA are displayed in order from the area on the near side of RA. On the other hand, when the left sub-display device 10L hides all the characters CRA displayed on the display screen 7a,
The character CRA may be displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.

Note that the character display effects are performed with the same variation. However, it is not limited to this, and may be performed with different fluctuations.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the character display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the character display effect, after the character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, the character CRA is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L (right sub-display device 10R). According to this configuration, two display devices can be used to enhance the interest in the display performance of the character, and as a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

[Effect 2]
In the above-described character display effect, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, and in a state where the left sub-display device 10L is positioned near the center of the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a. A character CRA is displayed at a position corresponding to the displayed character CRA. According to this configuration, the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed as if it has moved to the left sub-display device 10L positioned in front of the display screen 7a, so that a display effect with a three-dimensional effect can be performed. is possible. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the character display effect, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the home position to the expanded position near the center of the display screen 7a. Character C displayed in 7a
A character CRA is displayed at a position corresponding to RA. According to this configuration, as the left sub-display device 10L moves, the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed as if it had moved to the left sub-display device 10L located in front of the display screen 7a. , it is possible to perform a display effect with a sense of dynamism and a three-dimensional effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the above character display effect, when the left sub-display device 10L moves to the unfolded position, the left sub-display device 10L rotates (rotates to the right) about a predetermined axis (see FIG. 47). According to this configuration, it is possible to perform a display performance with a more dynamic feeling and a three-dimensional effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the character display effects C and D, the character CRA is moved from the display screen 7a to the left sub-display device 10L and displayed. Character CRA displayed in 10L
), a character focus image ZB1, which is an image different from the character CRA, is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the presence of the character CRA, and to perform display effects with a more dynamic and three-dimensional effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZB-1]
A gaming machine comprising first display means and second display means different from the first display means,
The first display means and the second display means are each capable of executing a plurality of types of display effect,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined image on the first display means,
the second display effect is a effect of displaying the predetermined image on the second display means;
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZB-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZB-1,
In the combination effect, the predetermined image is displayed at the first position of the first display means in the first display effect, and the second display means is displayed in the second display effect in the second display effect. In a state where one display means is at a second position which is a position before the first position, a third display means is displayed on the second display means corresponding to the first position of the first display means. displaying the predetermined image at a location;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZB-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZB-2,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the second display means moves from the fourth position to the second position, and the second display means moves to the second position. displaying the predetermined image at the third position on the second display means in a certain state;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZB-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZB-3,
In the combination effect, when the second display means moves to the second position in the second display effect, the second display means rotates about a predetermined axis.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZB-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZB-3 or aspect ZB-4,
A third display means different from the first display means and the second display means,
The third display means is arranged in front of the first display means and the second display means,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
In the third display effect, when the predetermined image is displayed at the third position of the second display means in the second display effect, the second display effect is displayed on the third display means. displaying an image different from the predetermined image in a portion different from the portion corresponding to the predetermined image displayed on the display means of
A gaming machine characterized by:

Note that the above aspect may be modified as follows.
o When the second display means moves to the position of the predetermined image on the first display means, the predetermined images are sequentially displayed from the area in front of the predetermined image.
o The second display means sequentially displays the predetermined images, and finally, all the predetermined images are displayed.

The selection effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79. FIG. This selection effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the selection effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device 7 and the display screens of the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R). In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the selection effect is included, the position of the left sub-display device 10L or the right sub-display device 10R) is detected. or tilt.

[Selection effect A]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the selection effect A. FIG. In the selection effect A, first, FIG.
), the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are displayed. Here, the decorative patterns form a reach, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (here, "5" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed. Here, a selection effect is executed to select one symbol from candidates for a plurality of symbols (numbers) finally selected as the middle decorative symbol 8C. That is, the selection effect is a effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images with different contents.
An effect in which one pattern is selected from three types of patterns '3', '4', and '5' is illustrated. The selection effect includes a selection start suggesting effect suggesting the start of the selection effect and a selection decision effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images. Figure 76 of this embodiment (
A) to FIG. 76(F) suggest that a selection effect in which one pattern is selected from three types of patterns '3', '4', and '5' is started, and the selection effect start effect is indicated. correspond to and,
FIG. 76(H) notifies that the pattern "4" has been selected from among the three types of patterns "3", "4", and "5", and corresponds to the selection decision effect. Figures 76(I) to 76(J) indicate that the pattern "5" has been selected from among the three types of patterns "3", "4" and "5", and this is also used in the selection decision effect. Applicable.

In FIG. 76(A), the first middle decorative symbol 8C1 representing "3" is temporarily stopped and displayed at the position where the middle decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In FIG. Next, as shown in FIGS. 76(B) to 76(C), the second middle decorative pattern 8C2 representing "4" moves downward on the display screen 7a, and the first middle decorative pattern 8C1 moves downward. Temporary stop is displayed. The second middle decorative pattern 8C2 displayed here is larger than the first middle decorative pattern 8C1, and the second middle decorative pattern 8C
2 overlaps in front of the first middle decorative pattern 8C1, the first middle decorative pattern 8C1 becomes difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 76(D) to 76(E), the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 representing "5" moves downward on the display screen 7a, and the second middle decorative pattern 8C2 moves downward. overlaps with The third middle decorative pattern 8C1 displayed here is larger than the first middle decorative pattern 8C1.
becomes difficult to see. After that, the first
The middle decorative pattern 8C1 moves downward from above the display screen 7a, and the third middle decorative pattern 8C
cover 3. Next, a second middle decorative pattern 8C2 larger than the first middle decorative pattern 8C1 is displayed on the display screen 7.
It moves downward from above a and covers the first middle decorative pattern 8C1. In this way, the effect of covering the currently temporarily stopped middle decorative pattern with successively larger middle decorative patterns is repeated, and the speed of the effect increases, and as shown in FIG. A difficult high-speed production display is performed. 76(A) to 76(F), three patterns "3", "4" and "5" are displayed one by one in order, and one of these patterns is selected. It is possible to inform the player that the production is started. That is, these effects correspond to the selection effect start effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(G), left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8
The display of R disappears, and the button image BTN, timer bar TBI, and operation prompting image RND are displayed on the display screen 7a. The button image BTN is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63 . A timer bar TBI represents an operation effective period of the effect button 63 . The operation urging image RND is an image containing the word “push” and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image for recommending the player to operate the effect button 63 . When the player operates the performance button 63, a selection determination performance is executed in which one pattern is selected and determined from among three types of symbols '3', '4', and '5'. Here, when the selected symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped) at the display position of the middle decorative symbol, the selected symbol is notified to the player.

In FIG. 76(H), the second middle decorative symbol 8C2 representing "4" is stopped, and three kinds of symbols "3" are displayed.
It is notified that the pattern "4" has been selected from among "4" and "5". In FIG. 76(J), the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 representing "5" is stopped to notify that the pattern "5" has been selected from among the three types of patterns "3", "4" and "5". ing. As shown in FIG. 76(H), the second middle decorative design 8C2 representing "4" is displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 on which the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed. (stop display). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76(J), the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 representing "5" is displayed (stopped display) on the right sub-display device 10R at the advanced position (deployed position) covering the predetermined position of the display screen 7a. ) is done. Specifically, when the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 representing "5" is stopped, the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 as shown in FIG. 76(I). At the same time, the right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates counterclockwise at the intermediate position (intermediate position), thereby moving to the advanced position (unfolded position), where it stops (stops). The advanced position (deployed position) is a position that covers the predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 . The third middle decorative symbol 8C3 stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered when the right sub-display device 10R moves to the advanced position.
In other words, the right sub-display device 10R displays the third middle decorative pattern 8C of the main display device 7.
It stops (stops) at a position covering part of the part where 3 is displayed. At this time, part of the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. In other words, the right sub-display device 10R displays an image corresponding to the portion of the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 displayed on the main display device 7 that is covered by the right sub-display device 10R. That is, the portion of the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 displayed on the sub-display device 10 gradually increases while being displayed across the main display device 7 and the right sub-display device 10R. The second middle decorative pattern 8C2 and the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 are displayed on the main display device 7.
displayed at approximately the same position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(J), the right sub-display device 1 at the advanced position (unfolded position)
The entirety of the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 is displayed in 0R. In addition, in FIG. 76(I), the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and is displayed on the right sub-display device 10.
The right sub-display device 10R may display for the first time when R is positioned at the advanced position (deployed position). In this way, the image (
By changing the display device according to the type (number) of the pattern), it is possible to produce a special feeling when a specific image is selected, and to improve interest. here,
The right sub-display device 1 when the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 representing "5" which is a big hit is selected
Since it is displayed in 0R, it is possible to give the player a special feeling.

[Selection effect B]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the selection effect B. FIG. In the selection effect B, first, FIG.
), the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). This selection performance B is executed during the variable performance. Here, a selection effect of selecting one image from among a plurality of images indicating the jackpot lottery results for the variation is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. That is, the selection effect is a effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images with different contents,
In this embodiment, an effect is exemplified in which one image is selected from three types of images, ie, "loss", "big hit", and "ready to win". Here, after the selection effect, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped or stopped so that the result corresponding to the selected image is displayed. In other words, "losing" in the selection effect
is selected, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a failing mode (for example, "456"). When the image of "big win" is selected in the selection effect, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in the mode of big win (for example, "777"). When the image of "reach" is selected in the selection effect, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stop-displayed in the form of reach (for example, "5↓5"). In other words, after the selection effect, an effect (big win display, losing display, ready-to-win display) corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect is executed.

The selection effect includes a selection start suggesting effect suggesting the start of the selection effect and a selection decision effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images. FIG. 7 of this embodiment
7(A) to FIG. 77(F) suggest that a selection effect is started in which one image is selected from among the three types of images "loss", "big hit", and "ready to reach". It corresponds to the start performance. FIG. 77(H) indicates that "Loss" has been selected from among the three types of images "Loss", "Big Hit" and "Reach", and corresponds to the selection decision effect. Figure 77
From (I) to FIG. 77(J), three types of images, "Loss", "Big Hit", and "Reach", are "
It is notified that "big hit" has been selected, and this also corresponds to the selection decision effect.

In FIG. 77A, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays the first image SG representing "FAILURE".
1 is displayed. Next, as shown in FIGS. 77(B) to 77(C), the second image SG2 representing the "jackpot" moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and stops overlapping the first image SG1. Is displayed. The second image SG2 displayed here has the same size and shape as the first image SG1. become a state.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 77(D) to 77(E), the third image SG3 representing "reach" moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and overlaps the second image SG2. The third image SG3 displayed here has the same size and shape as the second image SG2.
3 overlaps in front of the second image SG2, the second image SG2 becomes difficult to see. After that, the first image SG1 having the same size and shape as the third image SG3 moves downward from above the display screen 7a to cover the third image SG3. Next, the second image SG2 is displayed on the display screen 7
It moves downward from above a and covers the first image SG1. In this way, the effect of covering the images currently temporarily stopped and displayed with the first to third images is repeated, and the speed of the effect increases. As shown in FIG. A display SG is made. In the production shown in FIGS. 77(A) to 77(F), three types of images "losing" and "jackpot" are displayed.
It is possible to inform the player that the "reach" is displayed in order one by one and a selection effect is started in which one image is selected from among them. That is, these effects correspond to the selection effect start effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77(G), the high-speed effect display SG disappears, and the button image BTN, timer bar TBI, and operation promotion image RND are displayed on the display screen 7a. Button image B
TN is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63 . A timer bar TBI represents an operation effective period of the effect button 63 . The operation urging image RND is an image containing the word “push” and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image for recommending the player to operate the effect button 63 . When the player operates the performance button 63, a selection determination performance is executed in which one image is selected and determined from among three types of images "loss", "big hit" and "ready to win". Here, the determination of selection notifies the player of the image selected and determined by stopping and displaying only the selected image at the display position.

In FIG. 77(H), the first image SG1 representing "Loss" is stopped to notify that "Loss" has been selected from among the three types of images "Loss", "Big Win" and "Reach". Figure 7
In 7 (J), the second image SG2 representing "big win" is stopped, and three types of images "losing" and "
It is notified that the "jackpot" has been selected from the "jackpot" and "reach". Figure 77
As shown in (H), the first image SG<b>1 representing “missing” is displayed (stopped display) at a predetermined position on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 . On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77(J), the second image SG2 representing "big win" is displayed (stopped display) on the right sub-display device 10R at the relay position (relay position) covering the predetermined position of the display screen 7a. be. Specifically, when the second image SG2 representing the "jackpot" stops, the second image SG2 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the sub-display Device 10 (left sub-display device 10
L and the right sub-display device 10R) move from the retracted position (home position) to the upper intermediate position (intermediate position) and stop (stop) at the intermediate position. The relay position (relay position) is a position that covers the predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 . The second image SG2 still displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered by the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R) at the relay position. In other words, the sub display device 1
0 stops (stops) at a position covering a portion of the main display device 7 where the second image SG2 is displayed. At this time, a portion of the second image SG2 covered by the sub-display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device 10R). In other words, the sub-display device 10 displays an image corresponding to the portion covered by the sub-display device 10 in the second image SG2 displayed on the main display device 7 . That is, the second image SG2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, and the portion displayed on the sub-display device 10 gradually increases. First image SG1 and second image SG2
are displayed at substantially the same positions on the main display device 7 .

After that, as shown in FIG. 77(J), the right sub-display device 1 at the relay position (relay position) is displayed.
The entire second image SG2 is displayed in 0R. Note that in FIG. 77(I), the second image SG
2 may not be displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and may be displayed on the right sub-display device 10R only when the right sub-display device 10R is positioned at the relay position (relay position). In this way, by changing the display device according to the type of image finally selected as the result of the jackpot lottery, it is possible to produce a special feeling when a specific image is selected, thereby improving interest. be able to. Here, when the second image SG2 representing "big win" is selected, it is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, so that it is possible to give the player a special feeling.

[Selection effect C]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the selection effect C. FIG. In the selection effect C, first, FIG.
), the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). This selection performance C is executed during the jackpot game. Here, during the jackpot game, a selection effect of selecting one image from among a plurality of images showing the game state after the jackpot game is executed. In other words, the selection effect is
This is an effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images with different contents, and in this embodiment, an example of an effect in which one image is selected from two types of images, ``variable probability'' and ``time saving''. . Here, when the jackpot game ends after the selection effect, the game state corresponding to the selected image is entered. That is, when the image of "variable probability" is selected in the selection effect, it becomes a variable probability state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game. When the image of "time saving" is selected in the selection effect, it becomes a time saving state (low probability high base state) after the jackpot game. In other words, after the selection effect, when the jackpot game ends, the effect corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect (variable effect,
time-saving production) is executed.

The selection effect includes a selection start suggesting effect suggesting the start of the selection effect and a selection decision effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images. FIG. 7 of this embodiment
8 (A) to FIG. 78 (F) suggest that a selection effect in which one image is selected from two types of images “probability variation” and “short time” is started, and in the selection effect start effect Applicable. And FIG. 78(H) informs that "short working hours" has been selected from two types of images "probability variable" and "short working hours", and corresponds to the selection decision effect. FIGS. 78(I) to 78(J) inform that “variable probability” has been selected from two types of images “variable probability” and “time saving”, and this also corresponds to the selection decision effect.

In FIG. 78(A), a first image SG1 representing "probability variation" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
is displayed. Next, as shown in FIGS. 78(B) to 78(C), the second image SG2 representing "shorter working hours" moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and stops overlapping the first image SG1. Is displayed. The second image SG2 displayed here is larger than the first image SG1 and
Since the image SG2 overlaps in front of the first image SG1, the first image SG1 becomes difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 78(D) to 78(E), the first image SG1 representing "probability change" moves downward from the top of the display screen 7a and overlaps the second image SG2. The first image SG1 displayed here is larger than the second image SG2, and the first image SG1 overlaps in front of the second image SG2, making the second image SG2 difficult to see. After that, a second image SG2 larger than the first image SG1 moves downward from above the display screen 7a to cover the first image SG1. Next, the first image SG1 moves downward from above the display screen 7a and covers the second image SG2. In this way, the effect of covering the image currently temporarily stopped and displayed with the first and second images is repeated, and the speed of the effect increases, and as shown in FIG. 78(F),
A high-speed effect display SG is performed in which the replacement of images is difficult to visually recognize. 78(A) to 78
In the effect of (F), two types of images ``Variable Probability'' and ``Short Time'' are displayed one by one, and the player is informed that a selection effect in which one image is selected from these images is started. be able to. That is, these effects correspond to the selection effect start effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(G), the high-speed effect display SG disappears, and the button image BTN, timer bar TBI, and operation promotion image RND are displayed on the display screen 7a. Button image B
TN is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63 . A timer bar TBI represents an operation effective period of the effect button 63 . The operation urging image RND is an image containing the word “push” and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image for recommending the player to operate the effect button 63 . When the player operates the performance button 63, a selection determination performance is executed in which one image is selected and determined from two types of images "probability variation" and "time reduction". Here, the determination of selection notifies the player of the image selected and determined by stopping and displaying only the selected image at the display position.

In FIG. 78 (H), the second image SG2 representing "time saving" is stopped, and two types of images "probable variation""
It is notified that "shorter working hours" has been selected from "shorter working hours". In FIG. 78(J), the first image SG1 representing "probability variation" is stopped to inform that "probability variation" has been selected from two types of images "probability variation" and "time saving". As shown in FIG. 78(H), the second image S representing "time saving"
G2 is displayed (stopped display) at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG. on the other hand,
As shown in FIG. 78(J), the first image SG1 representing "variable probability" is displayed (stopped display) on the right sub-display device 10R at the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, when the first image SG1 representing "probability variation" stops, as shown in FIG. The right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates counterclockwise at the intermediate position (intermediate position), thereby moving to the advanced position (unfolded position), where it stands still (stops). The advanced position (deployed position) is a position that covers the predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 .

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(J), the right sub-display device 1 at the advanced position (unfolded position)
The first image SG1 is displayed in 0R. An effect image EF, which is a luminescent image, is displayed around the first image SG1. The effect image EF is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 1.
It is displayed straddling 0. This effect image EF informs that the "probability variation" of the first image SG1 has been determined. In addition, in FIG. 78(I), the display screen 7 of the main display device 7
The first image SG1 may be displayed in a. In this way, by changing the display device according to the type of image that is finally selected as the game state after the big win game, it is possible to produce a special feeling when a specific image is selected, which is interesting. can be improved. Here, when the first image SG1 representing "probability variation" is selected, it is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, so that it is possible to give the player a special feeling. Second image SG2 and first image SG
1 are displayed at substantially the same position on the main display device 7 .

[Selection effect D]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the selection effect D. FIG. In the selection effect D, first, FIG.
), the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). This selection effect D is executed during the variable effect of the probability variable state (high probability high base state). Here, a selection effect of selecting one image from among a plurality of images indicating the lottery results for the variation is executed during the variable effect of the variable probability state. That is, the selection effect is a effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images with different contents. An example of an effect in which one image is selected is illustrated. Here, after the selection effect, the game state corresponding to the selected image is entered. That is, when the image of "Falling" is selected in the selection effect, it then becomes the normal state (low-probability-low base state). When the image of "Continue" is selected in the selection effect, the probability variable state (high probability high base state) continues as it is. "Big hit" in the selection production
image is selected, a jackpot game is executed. In other words, after the selection effect, the effect (normal state effect, time saving state effect, jackpot game effect) corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect is executed.

The selection effect includes a selection start suggesting effect suggesting the start of the selection effect and a selection decision effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images. FIG. 7 of this embodiment
9(A) to FIG. 79(F) suggest that a selection effect is started in which one image is selected from among three types of images "Fall", "Continue", and "Big Win". It corresponds to the production start production. FIG. 79(H) shows "Fall" out of the three types of images "Fall", "Continue", and "Big win".
has been selected, and corresponds to the selection decision effect. 79(I) to 79(J)
) informs that "big win" has been selected from among the three types of images "fall", "continuation" and "big win", which also corresponds to the selection decision effect.

In FIG. 79A, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays the left symbol LS, the right symbol RS, and the first middle symbol CS1. The left symbol LS and the right symbol RS are images representing "Fall" and are temporarily stopped and displayed. The first middle symbol CS1 is an image representing "Fall", and is temporarily stopped and displayed between the left symbol LS and the right symbol RS. Next, FIG. 79(B) to FIG.
As shown in 9(C), the second medium symbol CS2 representing "continue" moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and is stopped and displayed overlapping the first medium symbol CS1. The second displayed here
The middle symbol CS2 is larger than the first middle symbol CS1, and the second middle symbol CS2 is the first middle symbol CS1.
, the first middle symbol CS1 becomes difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 79(D) to 79(E), the third medium symbol CS3 representing "big win" moves downward from the top of the display screen 7a, and moves to the second medium symbol CS2. Overlap. The third middle pattern CS3 displayed here is larger than the second middle pattern CS2, and the third middle pattern CS3 overlaps in front of the second middle pattern CS2, thereby making the second middle pattern CS2 difficult to see. Become. After that, a first middle pattern CS1 larger than the third middle pattern CS3 moves downward from above the display screen 7a to cover the third middle pattern CS3. Next, the second middle pattern CS2 moves downward from the top of the display screen 7a and covers the first middle pattern CS1. In this way, the effect of covering the middle symbol that is currently temporarily stopped and displayed with the first to third middle symbols is repeated, and the speed of the effect increases, and as shown in FIG. A high-speed effect display CS is performed. In the production shown in FIGS. 79A to 79F, three types of images, ``fall'', ``continuation'', and ``jackpot'' are displayed one by one in order, and one of these images is selected. It is possible to inform the player that the selection effect is started. That is, these effects correspond to the selection effect start effect.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79(G), the high-speed effect display CS disappears, and the button image BTN, timer bar TBI, and operation promotion image RND are displayed on the display screen 7a. Button image B
TN is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63 . A timer bar TBI represents an operation effective period of the effect button 63 . The operation urging image RND is an image containing the word “push” and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image for recommending the player to operate the effect button 63 . When the player operates the production button 63, three types of images "Fall", "Continue", "
A selection determination effect is executed in which one image is selected and determined from among "big win". Here, the determination of selection notifies the player of the image selected and determined by stopping and displaying only the selected image at the display position.

In FIG. 79(H), the first medium symbol CS1 representing "fall" is stopped, and three kinds of images "fall"
It is informed that "fall" is selected from "continuation" and "big win". In FIG. 79(J), the third medium symbol CS3 representing "big win" is stopped, and three kinds of images "fall", "continuation", and "big win" are displayed.
It is notified that the "big win" has been selected from among them. As shown in FIG. 79(H), the first middle symbol CS1 representing "fall" is displayed (stopped display) at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. As shown in FIG. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 79(J), the third medium symbol CS3 representing "big win" is displayed (stopped display) on the right sub-display device 10R at the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, when the third medium symbol CS3 representing "big win" stops, as shown in FIG. 79(I),
While the third middle pattern CS3 is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retreat position (home position) and rotates left at the relay position (relay position). By doing so, it moves to an advanced position (deployed position) and stops there. The advanced position (deployed position) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
is a position that covers the above-mentioned predetermined position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79(J), the right sub-display device 1 at the advanced position (unfolded position)
A third medium symbol CS3 is displayed in 0R. An effect image EF, which is a luminescent image, is displayed around the third middle symbol CS3. The effect image EF is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 . This effect image EF is the "big hit" of the third middle pattern CS3.
has been confirmed. In addition, in FIG. 79(I), the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display the third middle symbol CS3. In this way, by changing the display device according to the type of image that is finally selected during the variable production of the variable probability state (high-probability-high base state), a special feeling is produced when a specific image is selected. It is possible to improve interest. Here, when the third middle symbol CS3 representing "big win" is selected, it is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, so that the player can feel special. The first middle pattern CS1 and the third middle pattern CS3 are displayed at substantially the same position on the main display device 7. - 特許庁

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the selection effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 79, the sub display device 1
0 and the main display device 7, it is possible to execute a selection effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images with different contents. In the selection effect of FIG. 76, when the third middle decorative pattern 8C3, which is one of a plurality of types of images, is selected, the third
A middle decorative pattern 8C3 is displayed, and a second middle decorative pattern 8C2, which is one of a plurality of types of images, is displayed.
is selected, the second middle decorative pattern 8C2 selected on the main display device 7 is displayed.
According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 77(H) to (J), FIGS. 78(H) to (J), and FIGS. 79(H) to (J).
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 79, the sub-display device 10 is configured to be movable, and in the selection effect of FIG. 76, the third middle decorative symbol 8C3 is selected. In this case, the sub-display device 10 moves from the first position to the second position, and the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 is displayed at the second position (FIG. 76(J)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. Figure 77 (J), Figure 78 (J)
, and FIG. 79(J).
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, in the selection effect, when the second middle decoration symbol 8C2 is selected, the second middle decoration is displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. When the pattern 8C2 is displayed and the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 is selected, the sub display device 10
stops at an advanced position covering a predetermined position of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the third
A middle decorative pattern 8C3 is displayed (FIG. 76(J)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. FIG. 77(J), FIG. 78(J),
The same applies to FIG. 79(J).
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIGS. 76(A) to 76(F), FIGS.
F), FIGS. 78(A) to 78(F), and FIGS. 79(A) to 79(F), the selection effect is a selection start suggesting effect suggesting the start of the selection effect. , after the selection start suggesting effect, a selection decision effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images, and in the selection start suggesting effect, the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 displays a plurality of types are displayed one by one in turn. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIGS. 76(A) to 76(F), FIGS.
F), FIGS. 78(A) to 78(F), and FIGS. 79(A) to 79(F), in the selection start suggestion effect, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a plurality of types of When the images are displayed one by one in sequence, after the first image is displayed, a second image, which is larger than the first image, is displayed in a position covering the first image. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is provided with the effect button 63 that can be operated by the player.
6 (G) ~ Figure 76 (J), Figure 77 (G) ~ Figure 77 (J), Figure 78 (G) ~ Figure 78 (J),
As shown in FIGS. 79(G) to 79(J), after the selection start effect, when the effect button 63 is operated, the selection determination effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the plurality of types of images are associated with one of the plurality of types of effects executed after the selection effect. After that, an effect corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the selection effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the selection effect A of FIG. 76, the selection effect C of FIG. 78, and the selection effect D of FIG. 79, the right sub-display device 10R moves. However, the left sub-display device 10L may be moved.

[Modification 2]
In the selection effect B of FIG. 77, both the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R of the sub-display devices 10 move upward. However, the configuration may be such that only the right sub-display device 10R moves upward and the left sub-display device 10L does not move upward.

[Modification 3]
The contents of the selection effects A to D shown in FIGS. 76 to 79 may be appropriately combined. For example, in the selection effect C of FIG. 78, like the selection effect D of FIG. 79, the left symbol LS and the right symbol RS may be displayed on both sides of the first image SG1 and the second image SG2.

[Modification 5]
Selection effects A to D shown in FIGS. 76 to 79 may not include some of the effects described above, or may include other effects. For example, in the selection effect D of FIG.
When the second middle pattern CS2 is selected, the right sub-display device 10 where the second middle pattern CS2 is in the advance position
It may be displayed on R, or may be displayed on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 . again,
A case where the second middle symbol CS2 is randomly displayed on the right sub-display device 10R at the advance position;
It may be displayed on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 .

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A5-1]
a first display means capable of displaying an image;
A gaming machine comprising second display means capable of displaying an image,
using the first display means and the second display means, it is possible to execute a selection effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images with different contents,
In the selection production,
when a first image that is one of the plurality of types of images is selected, the selected first image is displayed on the first display means;
when a second image that is one of the plurality of types of images is selected, the selected second image is displayed on the second display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
The first display means is configured to be movable,
In the selection production,
when the first image is selected, the first display means moves from a first position to a second position, wherein the first image is displayed at the second position;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-2,
In the selection production,
when the second image is selected, the second image is displayed at a predetermined position of the second display means;
when the first image is selected, the first image is displayed while the first display means stops at a second position covering the predetermined position of the second display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
The selection effect is
a selection start suggestion effect suggesting that the selection effect is to be started;
a selection decision effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images after the selection start suggestion effect,
In the selection start suggestion effect, the plurality of types of images are sequentially displayed one by one on the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4,
In the selection start suggestion production,
In the second display means, when the plurality of types of images are displayed one by one in order, after the first image is displayed, the second image larger than the first image is displayed. displayed in a position that covers the first image,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4 or aspect A5-5 further comprises
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
After the selection start effect, the selection decision effect is executed when the operation means is operated.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-6,
The plurality of types of images are associated with one of a plurality of types of effects to be executed after the selection effect, and
After the selection effect, an effect corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Plural image pseudo continuous effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83. FIG. This plural-image pseudo-continuous effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the character display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. , the left sub-display device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R, the illumination panel 18, and the like. Note that the illumination panel 18
is a transparent display panel, which is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10 .

[Multi-image pseudo continuous effect A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the multiple-image pseudo-continuous effect A. FIG. In the plural image pseudo-continuous effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 80(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a.
Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9A,
9C is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo continuous effect. In this case, the decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "7 patterns", the decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at "8 patterns", and the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(C), a pseudo continuous effect is performed. In this pseudo-continuous performance,
A pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is displayed across the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R. This pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is an image that indicates a character "NEXT" and suggests a pseudo-continuous effect. Also, in the pseudo continuous effect, the character CRA is displayed on the right sub-display device 1.
It is displayed over 0R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(D), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this reach performance,
The decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped in the same pattern (7 patterns), and the ready-to-win display is performed to represent the ready-to-win state in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates. Also, in the ready-to-win effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRA.

[Multi-image Pseudo Continuous Effect B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining a multiple-image pseudo-continuous effect B. FIG. In the plural image pseudo-continuous effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.
Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9A,
9C is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo continuous effect. In this case, the decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "7 patterns", the decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at "8 patterns", and the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), a pseudo continuous effect is performed. In this pseudo-continuous performance,
A pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a pseudo-continuous image ZC2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.
, and the pseudo-continuous image ZC3 is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. This pseudo continuous image Z
C1 is an image showing the characters "NEXT" and suggesting a pseudo continuous effect. Pseudo-continuous images ZC2 and ZC3 are also images showing the characters "NEXT" and suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect. Also, in the pseudo continuous effect, the character CRA is displayed across the right sub-display device 10R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this reach performance,
The decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped in the same pattern (7 patterns), and the ready-to-win display is performed to represent the ready-to-win state in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates. Also, in the ready-to-win effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRA.

[Multi-image Pseudo Continuous Effect C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the multiple-image pseudo-continuous effect C. FIG. In the plural image pseudo-continuous effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 82(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a.
Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9A,
9C is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo continuous effect. In this case, the decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "7 patterns", the decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at "8 patterns", and the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), a pseudo continuous effect is performed. In this pseudo-continuous performance,
A pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a pseudo-continuous image ZC2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.
, the pseudo-continuous image ZC3 is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, and the pseudo-continuous image ZC4 is displayed on the illumination panel 18. FIG. This pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is an image that indicates a character "NEXT" and suggests a pseudo-continuous effect. Pseudo-continuous images ZC2 and ZC3 are also images showing the characters "NEXT" and suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect. Furthermore, the pseudo-continuous image ZC4 is an image of a star pattern, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the illumination panel 18.
pseudo-continuous image ZC1 displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, pseudo-continuous image ZC2 displayed on the left sub-display device 10L,
It is displayed in an area other than the area (portion) corresponding to the pseudo-continuous image ZC3 displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. In this case, on the illumination panel 18, pseudo continuous images ZC1, Z
Regions corresponding to C2 and ZC3 are transparent regions that transmit light. Also, in the pseudo continuous effect, the character CRA is displayed across the right sub-display device 10R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this reach performance,
The decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped in the same pattern (7 patterns), and the ready-to-win display is performed to represent the ready-to-win state in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates. Also, in the ready-to-win effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRA.

[Multi-image Pseudo Continuous Effect D]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the multiple-image pseudo-continuous effect D. FIG. In the plural image pseudo-continuous effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 83(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a.
Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9A,
9C is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo continuous effect. In this case, the decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "7 patterns", the decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at "8 patterns", and the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), a pseudo continuous effect is performed. In this pseudo-continuous performance,
A pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a (near the expanded position of the left sub-display device 10L), a pseudo-continuous image ZC2 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, and a pseudo-continuous image ZC is displayed.
3 is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R, and the pseudo-continuous image ZC4 is displayed on the illumination panel 18
to be displayed. This pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is an image that indicates a character "NEXT" and suggests a pseudo-continuous effect. Pseudo-continuous images ZC2 and ZC3 are also images showing the characters "NEXT" and suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect. Furthermore, the pseudo-continuous image ZC4 is an image of a star pattern, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the illumination panel 18.
1. Displayed in an area other than the area (portion) corresponding to the pseudo-continuous image ZC2 displayed on the left sub-display device 10L and the pseudo-continuous image ZC3 displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. In this case, on the illumination panel 18, areas corresponding to the pseudo continuous images ZC1, ZC2, and ZC3 are transmissive areas. Also, in the pseudo continuous effect, the character CRA is displayed across the right sub-display device 10R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), a button display effect is performed. In this button display effect, the button image ZC5 is displayed so as to overlap the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 on the display screen 7a. This button image ZC5 is an image representing the effect button 63, and is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. FIG. Further, in this button display effect, in the illumination panel 18, the area corresponding to the button image ZC5 on the display screen 7a is a transparent area. In other words, on the illumination panel 18, the pseudo continuous image ZC4 is
They are displayed in areas other than the areas corresponding to the pseudo continuous images ZC1, ZC2, ZC3 and ZC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(E), a sub-display device moving effect is performed. In this sub-display device movement effect, when the player who sees the button image ZC5 presses the effect button 63 (button push), the left sub-display device 10L rotates from the home position and moves to the expanded position. A portion of the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. That is, the pseudo continuous image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L. In this case, the pseudo-continuous image ZC2 displayed on the left sub-display device 10L has been erased. Also, in the illumination panel 18, the area corresponding to the left sub-display device 10L is a transmissive area. In other words, in the illumination panel 18,
Pseudo-continuous image ZC4 is displayed in an area other than areas corresponding to pseudo-continuous images ZC1, ZC2, ZC3, and left sub-display device 10L. That is, in this sub-display device movement effect, the button image ZC5 is displayed on the pseudo-continuous image ZC2, and when the effect button 63 is pressed, the left sub-display device 10L moves and the pseudo-continuous image is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. By displaying ZC1, a pseudo-continuous effect or an effect suggesting continuation of the pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(F), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this reach performance,
The decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (7 patterns), and the ready-to-win display representing the ready-to-win state in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates is performed. Also, in the ready-to-win effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRA.

The multiple image pseudo-continuous effect is performed with the same variation. However, it may be done with a different variation.

[Modification]
In the multiple-image pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous images ZC1, ZC2, ZC3, and ZC4 are images constituting the pseudo-continuous effect. May contain suggestions.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the multiple-image pseudo-continuous effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the multiple-image pseudo-continuous effect, the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10 are used to perform the pseudo-continuous effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to perform a dynamic pseudo-continuous effect using two display devices, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the multiple image pseudo continuous effect D, the left sub-display device 10 is displayed in the sub-display device moving effect.
When L moves to the unfolded position, pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is displayed, but pseudo-continuous image ZC
Pseudo-continuous images other than 1 (for example, pseudo-continuous image ZC2 or a new pseudo-continuous image) may be displayed.
In the multiple-image pseudo-continuous effect D, the button image ZC5 is displayed on the display screen 7a in the button display effect, but it is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, on the pseudo-continuous image) of the sub-display device 10 or the illumination panel 18. may

[Effect 2]
In the multiple image pseudo-continuous effect, a pseudo-continuous image ZC capable of constructing a pseudo-continuous effect is displayed on the display screen 7a.
1 is displayed, and pseudo-continuous images ZC2, ZC3, and ZC4 that can constitute a pseudo-continuous effect are displayed on the sub-display device 10 or the illumination panel 18. FIG. According to this configuration, pseudo-continuous images can be displayed on each of two or more display devices to perform a dynamic pseudo-continuous effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the pseudo-continuous effect of the subject image, the pseudo-continuous images ZC2, ZC3, and Z that can constitute the pseudo-continuous effect
The sub-display device 10 or the illumination panel 18 displaying C4 is arranged on the front side of the display screen 7a displaying the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 that can constitute the pseudo-continuous effect. According to this configuration, two pseudo-continuous images can be three-dimensionally represented, and a three-dimensional and dynamic pseudo-continuous effect can be performed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
The multiple image pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the same variation. According to this configuration, the effect of displaying two pseudo-continuous images can be a series of display effects, so that a three-dimensional and dynamic pseudo-continuous effect can be created, and the interest in the game can be improved. can.

[Effect 5]
In the multiple-image pseudo-continuous effect, when the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, the illumination panel 18 provides a transparent area in an area different from the area in which the pseudo-continuous image ZC4 is displayed. The continuous image ZC1 is configured to be visible through the transmissive area of the illumination panel 18 . According to this configuration, the pseudo-continuous image ZC1 can be seen through the transmission area of the illumination panel 18, so that the excitement of the pseudo-continuous effect can be created. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZC-1]
A gaming machine comprising first display means and second display means different from the first display means,
The first display means and the second display means are each capable of executing a plurality of types of display effect,
A predetermined effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As the predetermined effect, a pseudo continuous effect using the first display means and the second display means is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZC-2]
The gaming machine according to ZC-1,
In the predetermined display effect, a first pseudo-continuous image capable of constituting the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed on the first display means, and a second pseudo-continuous image capable of constituting the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed on the second display means. A pseudo-continuous image is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZC-3]
The gaming machine according to ZC-2,
The second display means is arranged on the front side of the first display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZC-4]
The gaming machine according to ZC-3,
The predetermined display effect is performed in the same variation,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZC-5]
The gaming machine according to ZC-4,
In the predetermined display effect, when the first pseudo-continuous image is displayed on the first display means, the second display means displays a region in which the second pseudo-continuous image is displayed. is provided with a transmissive area that transmits to different areas, and the first pseudo-continuous image is visible through the transmissive area of the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Note that the above aspect may be modified as follows.
○ An operation unit image (button image) is displayed on the first pseudo-continuous image, and an effect suggesting pseudo-continuous continuation or a pseudo-continuous effect is performed by pressing the button.
When the ◯ button is pushed, the third display means moves to the front of the first pseudo-continuous image on the first display means, and the first pseudo-continuous image is displayed on the third display means.
o If the third display means moves, the second pseudo-run image disappears.

The image display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. FIG. This image display effect can be executed, for example, during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101
analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute an image display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen of the display device 10 . In the image display effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 drives the sub-display device 10 via the lamp control board 107 .

[Image display effect A]
84 is a diagram for explaining the image display effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 84(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at the retracted positions (home positions). A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Reservation image 9A is a reservation image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a,
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 84(C), the continuous announcement effect is executed. In the continuous announcement performance,
On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the effect preview image PNG1 "Continue" is displayed. In the effect preview image PNG1, the characters "continue" are arranged in the horizontal direction. The effect suggested by "continuation" is a pseudo-continuous effect. "NEXT" may be used instead of "continue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is
The effect is that the left sub-display device 10L moves linearly from the retracted position to the intermediate position, as indicated by the arrow YG1. At this time, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotation movement effect is
The effect is that the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the intermediate position toward the advanced position as indicated by the arrow YG2. Here too, the pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7 of the main display device 7.
a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(F), an image display effect is executed. This image display effect is
This is an effect in which an effect preview image PNG2, which is similar to the effect preview image PNG1 in the continuous preview effect, is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that has moved to the advanced position. Production notice image PNG
2, the characters "Continue" are arranged in the vertical direction. The pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(G), a re-variation effect is executed. This re-variation effect is a effect of re-varying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R for the pseudo-run. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L returns to the retracted position (home position). Left sub-display device 10L
, a pending image 9A is displayed. On the other hand, the pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

[Image display effect B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the image display effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 85(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at the retracted positions (home positions). A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Reservation image 9A is a reservation image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a,
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), the continuous announcement effect is executed. In the continuous announcement performance,
On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the effect preview image PNG1 "Continue" is displayed. In the effect preview image PNG1, the characters "continue" are arranged in the horizontal direction. The effect suggested by "continuation" is a pseudo-continuous effect. "NEXT" may be used instead of "continue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is
The effect is that the left sub-display device 10L moves linearly from the retracted position to the intermediate position, as indicated by the arrow YG1. At this time, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG. Moreover, the display device 7a
of the image is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotation movement effect is
The effect is that the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position toward the advanced position as indicated by the arrow YG2. Here too, the pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7 of the main display device 7.
a. The image of the portion of the image on the display device 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(F), an image display effect is executed. This image display effect is
This is an effect in which an effect preview image PNG2, which is similar to the effect preview image PNG1 in the continuous preview effect, is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that has moved to the advanced position. Production notice image PNG
2, the characters "Continue" are arranged in the vertical direction. The pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(G), a re-variation effect is executed. This re-variation effect is a effect of re-varying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R for the pseudo-run. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L returns to the retracted position (home position). Left sub-display device 10L
, a pending image 9A is displayed. On the other hand, the pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

[Image display effect C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the image display effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 86(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at the retracted positions (home positions). A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Reservation image 9A is a reservation image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a,
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 86(C), a chance effect is executed. In the chance effect, the message image MG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG. Here, the message image MG1 is "hot", and the characters "hot" are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is
The effect is that the left sub-display device 10L moves linearly from the retracted position to the intermediate position, as indicated by the arrow YG1. At this time, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG. Moreover, the display device 7a
of the image is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotation movement effect is
The effect is that the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the intermediate position toward the advanced position as indicated by the arrow YG2. Here too, the pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7 of the main display device 7.
a. The image of the portion of the image on the display device 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(F), an image display effect is executed. This image display effect is
This is an effect in which a message image MG2 similar to the message image MG1 in the chance effect is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that has moved to the advanced position. Message image MG
In 2, the characters "Super hot" are arranged in the vertical direction. The pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(G), a battle effect is executed. This battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. And ally character CR
If A wins, it becomes a big hit. The pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is a effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a. Here, an example is shown in which all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "5". Note that the display of the pending image 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R disappears when the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

[Image display effect D]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the image display effect D. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 87(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at the retracted positions (home positions). A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Reservation image 9A is a reservation image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a,
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), a chance effect is executed. In the chance effect, the message image MG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG. In this case, the message image MG is "hot", and the characters "hot" are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(D), a battle effect is executed. This battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. And ally character CR
If A wins, it becomes a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(E), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. This confirmation stop effect (loss) is an effect for fixing and stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a. Here, an example is shown in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both "5" and the middle effect symbol 8C is "4". Note that the right sub-display device 10
The display of the pending image 9C on the R display screen disappears when the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

In FIG. 86, a message image MG2 similar to the message image MG1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. On the other hand, Figure 8
7, the message image MG is displayed only on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and is not displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, in the image display effect C shown in FIG. 86, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher than in the image display effect D shown in FIG.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the image display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect preview image PNG1 is displayed on the display screen 7 of the main display device 7.
84(C)(F), FIGS. 85(C)(F)). Also, after the message image MG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left sub-display device 1
A message image MG2 similar to the message image MG1 is displayed on the display screen of 0L (FIGS. 86(C) and 86(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the effect preview image and the message image stand out, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left sub-display device 10L is moved (Fig. 84 (D) (E
), FIGS. 85(D)(E), FIGS. 86(D)(E)), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L,
A performance preview image PNG2 and a message image MG2 are displayed. According to this configuration, since the left sub-display device 10L is moved, it is possible to make the effect preview image and the message image stand out, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the retracted position to the display screen 7a.
moves to the advance position so as to cover the effect preview image PNG1 and the message image MG1 displayed in . According to this configuration, it is possible to make the effect preview image and the message image stand out, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect preview image PNG is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
2. After displaying the message image MG2, the left sub-display device 10L is returned to the retracted position. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the effect preview image and the message image stand out, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, while the left sub-display device 10L is moving, the image of the portion of the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. It can be displayed on the display screen (FIGS. 85(D) and (E), FIGS. 86(D) and (E)). According to this configuration, the movement of the left sub-display device 10L does not interfere with the display of the display screen 7a, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a message image MG2 similar to the message image MG1 displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L (FIG. 86).
, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than in the case where the message image MG is displayed only on the display screen 7a (FIG. 87). With this configuration, expectations for the display on the left sub-display device 10L are heightened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an effect preview image PNG1 for notifying the effect to be executed later,
Display PNG2. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the effect to be executed later,
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
A modification of the image display rendering will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
Although the left sub-display device 10L is used in the above description, the right sub-display device 10R may be used in addition to or instead of the left sub-display device 10L to display the effect preview image and the message image.

[Modification 2]
In the above description, the message image "Extremely Hot" was taken as an example, but the message image is not limited to this. For example, various images are targeted, such as the number of game balls obtained, an instruction during a game such as "Right shot", "Congratulations" when a big win is made, and a title display indicating the type of the big win.

[Modification 3]
In the above description, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 when the left sub-display device 10L is moved. On the other hand, when the left sub-display device 10L is moved, the reserved image 9A may be displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A7-1]
a first display device capable of displaying an image and producing an effect;
A gaming machine comprising a second display device different from the first display device,
The apparatus further comprises effect control means capable of displaying an image similar to the predetermined image on the display screen of the second display device after displaying the predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device. game machine.

[Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1,
After displaying the predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device, the effect control means moves the second display device to display an image similar to the predetermined image on the display screen of the second display device. A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-2,
The game machine, wherein the effect control means moves the second display device from the origin position so as to cover the predetermined image.

[Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-3,
The gaming machine, wherein the effect control means returns the second display device to the origin position after displaying an image similar to the predetermined image on the display screen of the second display device.

[Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-2 to A7-4,
The effect control means displays an image of a portion of the display screen of the first display device covered by the second display device on the display screen of the second display device while the second display device is moving. A gaming machine characterized in that

[Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-5,
After displaying a predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device, the effect control means displays the second
When an image similar to the predetermined image is displayed on the display screen of the display device, expectations for a big win are higher than when the predetermined image is displayed only on the display screen of the first display device. Amusement machine.

[Aspect A7-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-6,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined image is a preview image for previewing an effect to be executed later.

[Aspect A7-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-7,
The effect control means can display a pending image corresponding to pending storage on the display screen of the second display device, and when the pending image is not displayed on the second display device, the A game machine characterized by displaying information related to a reserved image.

The sub-display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. This sub-display effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101
analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the sub-display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub- This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen of the display device 10 . Also, in the sub-display effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 drives the sub-display device 10 via the lamp control board 107 .

[Sub display effect A]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the sub display effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 88(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at the retracted positions (home positions). A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Reservation image 9A is a reservation image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a,
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), a reach development effect is executed. In the reach development effect, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is
The effect is that the left sub-display device 10L moves linearly from the retracted position toward the intermediate position, as indicated by the arrow YG1. At this time, the left sub-display device 10L of the image on the display device 7a is
The image of the portion covered with is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotation movement effect is
The effect is that the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position toward the advanced position, as indicated by the arrow YG2. Here too, the left sub-display device 10L of the image on the display device 7a
The image of the portion covered with is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(F), a message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is a effect of displaying a message image on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that has moved to the advanced position. Here, the message image "It's hot" is displayed.
In addition, the message image of "It's hot" is superimposed on the battle image.
In addition, in FIGS. 88(D), (E) and (F), a battle effect is executed in parallel with the effect described above. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. When the ally character CRA wins in the battle presentation, the degree of expectation for a big win increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(G), a middle symbol variation effect is executed. This middle pattern variation effect is a effect of variably displaying the middle effect pattern 8C, which is one row of the effect patterns 8L, 8C and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is shown to show the middle effect symbol 8C "3" moving downward as indicated by the arrow YG3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(H), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect of stopping and displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L shows that "5", which is the medium effect symbol 8C, is stopped.

[Sub display effect B]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 89(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at the retracted positions (home positions). A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Reservation image 9A is a reservation image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a,
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), a reach development effect is executed. In the reach development effect, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(D), a battle effect is executed. This battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Ally character CR here
If A wins, the expectation of a big win increases. Note that, in this battle effect, the image of the portion covered by the sub-display device 10 among the images displayed on the display screen 7 a is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 . Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character C
A leg portion of RB is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(E), a message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is a effect of displaying a message image on the display screen of the sub display device 10 . Here, a message image of "strong" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L,
A message image of "hot" is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(F), a middle symbol variation effect is executed. This intermediate symbol variation effect is an effect in which the intermediate effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is variably displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the left part of the middle effect symbol 8C "3" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the right side of the middle effect symbol 8C "3" is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. A portion is displayed, moving downwards as indicated by arrow YG1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(G), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big win) is a effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the arrangement of the big win on the display device 7a. Here, all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped at "5". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the finalization and stoppage of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Sub display effect C]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 90(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at the retracted positions (home positions). A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Reservation image 9A is a reservation image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a,
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is
The effect is that the left sub-display device 10L moves linearly from the retracted position to the intermediate position, as indicated by the arrow YG1. At this time, the left sub-display device 10L of the image on the display device 7a is
The image of the portion covered with is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(D), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotation movement effect is
The effect is that the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position toward the advanced position as indicated by the arrow YG2. The image of the portion of the image on the display device 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(E), a special symbol stop effect is executed. This special pattern stop performance is a performance of stopping and displaying the middle performance pattern 8C on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L moved to the advancing position, and the middle performance pattern 8C is a special pattern. Here, the medium effect symbol 8C of "development" is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(F), a battle effect is executed. This battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Ally character CR here
If A wins, the expectation of a big win increases. Note that, in this battle effect, the image of the portion covered by the sub-display device 10 among the images displayed on the display screen 7 a is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 . Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character C
A leg portion of RB is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(G), a message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is a effect of displaying a message image on the display screen of the sub display device 10 . Here, a message image of "strong" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L,
A message image of "hot" is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. note that,
The message image is displayed superimposed on the battle production image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is a effect of fixing and stopping the effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the arrangement of the big win on the display device 7a. Here, all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped at "5". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the finalization and stoppage of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Sub display effect D]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the sub display effect D. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 91(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8
L, the medium effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at the retracted positions (home positions). A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Reservation image 9A is a reservation image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a,
Here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. On the other hand, the pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), a reach development effect is executed. In the reach development effect, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is
The effect is that the left sub-display device 10L moves linearly from the retracted position to the intermediate position, as indicated by the arrow YG1. At this time, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG. Moreover, the display device 7a
of the image is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotation movement effect is
The effect is that the left sub-display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position toward the advanced position as indicated by the arrow YG2. Here too, the pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7 of the main display device 7.
a. The image of the portion of the image on the display device 7a that is covered by the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(F), a message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is a effect of displaying a message image on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that has moved to the advanced position. Here, the message image "It's hot" is displayed.
In addition, the message image of "It's hot" is superimposed on the battle image.
In addition, in FIGS. 91(D), (E) and (F), a battle effect is executed in parallel with the effect described above. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. When the ally character CRA wins in the battle presentation, the degree of expectation for a big win increases.
During the battle effect, the pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(G), a middle symbol variation effect is executed. This middle pattern variation effect is a effect of variably displaying the middle effect pattern 8C, which is one row of the effect patterns 8L, 8C and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is shown to show the middle effect symbol 8C "3" moving downward as indicated by the arrow YG3. The pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(H), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. This middle symbol stop effect is an effect of stopping and displaying the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L shows that "5", which is the medium effect symbol 8C, is stopped. The pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the sub-display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display screen of the sub display device 10 is used to display a part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 (FIGS. 88 (D) (E) ( F), FIGS. 89(D)(E), FIGS. 90(C)(D)(F)(G), FIGS. 91(D)(E)(F)). Also, the display screen of the sub-display device 10 is used to display the pending image 9A (FIG. 88(A) (
B) (C), FIGS. 89 (A) (B) (C) (G), FIGS. 90 (A) (B) (H), FIG. 91 (A
) (B) (C)). Furthermore, by using the display screen of the sub display device 10, the middle production pattern 8
Display C (FIGS. 88(G)(H), FIG. 89(F), FIG. 90(E), FIG. 91(G)(H)
). According to this configuration, various effects on the sub-display device 10 can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, of the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the image of the portion covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 (see FIG. 88 ( F), FIGS. 89(D)(E), FIGS. 90(F)(G), and FIG. 91(F)). According to this configuration, the presentation on the display screen 7a can be further enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, while the left sub-display device 10L is moved, the image of the portion covered by the left sub-display device 10L among the images displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. (Fig. 88 (D) (E), Fig. 90 (C) (D), Fig. 91 (
D) (E)). According to this configuration, the production on the display screen 7a can be further enhanced,
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a message image can be displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 together with a part of the image of the display screen 7a (FIGS. 88(F), 89(E),
Figure 90 (G), Figure 91 (F)). According to this configuration, the presentation on the display screen 7a can be further enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the middle effect pattern 8 is displayed using the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
88(H), FIG. 90(E), and FIG. 91(H). According to this configuration, it is possible to make players look forward to the stop effect of the medium effect symbol 8C, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display screen of the sub-display device 10 is used to variably display the intermediate effect symbol 8C (FIGS. 88(G), 89(F), and 91(G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the players look forward to the subsequent stop effect of the middle effect symbol 8C, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Modifications of the sub-display effects are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, in one variation, the display screen of the sub-display device 10 is used to display a part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the pending image 9A is displayed, and the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed. On the other hand, it is not necessary to do everything in one variation.
[Modification 2]
In the above, in the message addition effect, the message image of "It's hot" and "Extremely hot" is displayed superimposed on the battle image. Alternatively, instead of the battle image, only the message image may be displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A8-1]
a first display device capable of displaying an image and producing an effect;
A gaming machine comprising a second display device different from the first display device,
A display screen of the second display device is used to display a part of an image displayed on the display screen of the first display device, and a first effect, which configures the image together with the first display device, is stored in a reserved memory. A second effect of displaying a corresponding pending image and a third effect of displaying a predetermined row of effect symbols on the display screen of the first display device are provided. game machine.

[Aspect A8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-1,
The effect control means displays, in the first effect, an image of a part of the image displayed on the display screen of the first display device that is covered by the second display device on the display screen of the second display device. A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-2,
The effect control means is capable of moving the second display device in the first effect, and during the movement of the second display device, the part covered by the second display device is displayed as the second display device. A game machine capable of displaying on a display screen of the device.

[Aspect A8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-3,
The effect control means is capable of displaying another image on the second display device in the first effect, superimposed on or replacing the image of the portion covered by the second display device. game machine.

[Aspect A8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-4,
The game machine, wherein the effect control means stops and displays a predetermined row of effect symbols on the first display device in the third effect.

[Aspect A8-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-5,
The game machine, wherein the effect control means variably displays a predetermined row of effect symbols on the first display device in the third effect.

[Aspect A8-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-6,
The effect control means displays the pending image corresponding to the pending memory on a display screen of a display device different from the second display device in at least one of the first effect and the third effect. Characteristic game machine.

92 to 95, the reserved arrangement direction change effects A to D will be described below. This reserved arrangement direction change effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a pending arrangement direction change effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, The display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 and the sub display device 1
0 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R). Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the pending arrangement direction change effect is included, the left sub display device 1
0L and right sub-display device 10R) are changed.

[Retained arrangement direction change effect A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the suspended arrangement direction change effect A. FIG. In the suspended arrangement direction change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 92(A), the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). . On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. On the left sub-display device 10L, pending icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, a suspension arrangement direction change effect is executed in which the direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of suspension icons 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L is changed. In this embodiment, when the left sub-display device 10L remains stationary without changing its position or posture, the display positions of the plurality of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L change. , exemplifies a mode in which the direction in which a plurality of pending icons 9A are arranged (arrangement direction) changes.

As shown in FIG. 92(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four pending icons 9A are horizontally arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal sides of the display screen. there is As shown in FIG. 92(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8
L and the right decorative pattern 8R are "2" to form a reach indicating a temporary stop. At this time, the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) move upward from the retracted position toward the relay position (relay position) and stop at the relay position. During this upward movement of the sub-display device 10, the four pending icons 9A remain displayed. That is, by moving the sub-display device 10 upward, the four pending icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal (intersecting) with the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the pending icons 9A while maintaining their display. .

As shown in FIG. 92(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a pseudo-repeat suggestion image indicated by "repeat" indicating the start of the pseudo-repeat is displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C. .
At this time, the sub-display device 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R)
It stands still at the relay position, and on the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L), the arrangement direction of the four pending icons 9A switches from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction. This switching may be achieved by disappearing the display of the four horizontally arranged pending icons 9A and newly displaying the four vertically arranged pending icons 9A, or by maintaining the display of the four pending icons 9A. and,
The arrangement direction may gradually switch from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction. Here, each of the pending icons 9A is also oriented horizontally. That is, each of the pending icons 9A is displayed tilted by 90 degrees.

As shown in FIG. 92(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, an image showing "2nd time!!!" is displayed, suggesting that the second pseudo-run will start. After that, Figure 9
A third reach is formed, as shown at 2(E). After that, as shown in FIG. 93(F), a battle effect is executed. At this time, the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are stationary at the relay position, and the arrangement direction of the four pending icons 9A on the sub-display device 10 (the left sub-display device 10L) is A continuously changing production is performed. In other words, an effect is produced in which the angle of the direction in which the four pending icons 9A are arranged (arrangement direction) changes continuously. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92(C), among the four hold icons 9A arranged in the vertical direction, the uppermost fourth hold icon is used as the rotation axis, and the first to third hold icons are displayed while maintaining the display. 3 Hold rotates to the left. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 92(D) to 92(E), the horizontal side of the left sub-display device 10L is approached, and finally, as shown in FIG. 92(F), the left sub-display device It becomes a state along the horizontal side of 10L. Each of the pending icons 9A also changes its inclination according to the change in the arrangement direction. That is, the orientation of each reserved icon 9A changes so that the orientation of the icon matches the arrangement direction.

As shown in FIG. 92(G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the battle effect, the player is defeated and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. At this time, the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) move downward from the relay position toward the retracted position (home position) and stop at the retracted position. During this downward movement of the sub-display device 10, the four pending icons 9A remain displayed. That is, by moving the sub-display device 10 downward, the four pending icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) perpendicular to (intersecting) the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the pending icons 9A while maintaining their display. .

As shown in FIG. 92(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the following variable display is performed. At this time, the sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) stand still at the retracted position, and the number of pending sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L) becomes 3 due to the completion of pending. Three pending icons 9A are displayed. Here, an effect is performed in which the arrangement direction of the three pending icons 9A changes continuously.
During this effect, as shown in FIG. 92(I), when the variable display is completed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the decorative symbols are stopped, the sub-display device 10 (the left sub-display device 10L ), the number of holds becomes 2 due to the completion of the hold. At this time, the pending icon 9A continues to perform an effect in which the arrangement direction is continuously changed. Figure 92 (
J), when the number of pending icons 9A (number of pending) on the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L) is 1, one pending icon 9A is arranged in an arrangement in which there are two or more pending. The display position changes as the direction changes. In addition, the inclination of the pending icon 9A also changes.

[Retained arrangement direction change effect B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the suspended arrangement direction change effect B. FIG. In the suspended arrangement direction change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 93(A), the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). . On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, pending icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, a suspension arrangement direction change effect is executed in which the direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of suspension icons 9A displayed on the main display device 7 or the left sub-display device 10L is changed. In this embodiment, by changing the display position of the plurality of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the direction in which the plurality of pending icons 9A are arranged (arrangement direction) changes. A change in the display position of the plurality of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that is being held changes the direction in which the plurality of pending icons 9A are arranged (arrangement direction), and the left sub-display A mode in which the direction in which a plurality of pending icons 9A are arranged (arrangement direction) displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L changes as the posture of the device 10L changes is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 93A, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, four pending icons 9A are horizontally arranged (displayed) in a straight line. As shown in FIG. 93(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, an effect is produced in which the arrangement direction of the four pending icons 9A is continuously changed. In other words, an effect is produced in which the angle of the direction in which the four pending icons 9A are arranged (arrangement direction) changes continuously. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93(A), among the four horizontally aligned hold icons 9A, the rightmost hold icon 9A is used as the axis of rotation, and the display is maintained while the second to second hold icons are displayed. 4 Hold rotates to the right. As a result, FIG. 93(B)
~ as shown in FIG. 93(C), the arrangement direction of the four pending icons 9A approaches the vertical,
As shown in 3(C), the arrangement direction of the four pending icons 9A is finally vertical. Each of the pending icons 9A also changes its inclination according to the change in the arrangement direction. That is, the orientation of each reserved icon 9A changes so that the orientation of the icon matches the arrangement direction.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 93(C) and 93(D), an effect of moving the four vertically arranged pending icons 9A is executed. Specifically, the four holding icons 9A arranged vertically are
Move horizontally (to the right) while maintaining the display. In other words, the four pending icons 9A move in a direction (horizontal direction) perpendicular to (intersecting) the arrangement direction (vertical direction). Then, it stops at a predetermined position on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 . Next, as shown in FIG. 93(E), the four hold icons 9A arranged in the vertical direction tilt leftward while maintaining the display, and stop in that state. After that, as shown in FIG. 93(F), four pending icons 9
A moves upwards in an inclined state. In this case as well, the diagonally aligned four pending icons 9A move vertically (upward) while maintaining their display. In other words, the four pending icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) intersecting the arrangement direction (oblique). Then, it stops at a predetermined position on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 . Note that the four pending icons 9
A may be framed out of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 without stopping at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(G), the four pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and then appear on the left sub-display device 10L. The pending icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the left sub-display device 10L. Next, Figure 9
As shown in 3(H), the left sub-display device 10L moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates right at the intermediate position (intermediate position), thereby moving to the advanced position (unfolded position), Stop there. At this time, since the four pending icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four pending icons 9A changes as the left sub-display device 10L rotates to the right. The inclination of each hold icon 9A changes as the sub display device 10L rotates to the right. That is, the hold icon 9A
changes its orientation so that the orientation of the icon matches the arrangement direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(I), in a state where the left sub-display device 10L is stationary (stopped) at the advanced position (deployed position), the arrangement direction of the four pending icons 9A changes continuously. A performance is held. In other words, an effect is produced in which the angle of the direction in which the four pending icons 9A are arranged (arrangement direction) changes continuously. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 93(I) and 93(J), the four pending icons 9A can be arranged in a right-slanted state and left-slanted state. It moves from above to below the left sub-display device 10L while rocking alternately.

[Retained array direction change effect C]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the suspended arrangement direction change effect C. FIG. In the suspended arrangement direction change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 94(A), the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). . On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. On the left sub-display device 10L, pending icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, a suspension arrangement direction change effect is executed in which the direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of suspension icons 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L is changed. In this embodiment, by changing the attitude of the left sub-display device 10L, the left sub-display device 10
FIG. 10 illustrates a mode in which the direction in which a plurality of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of L are arranged (arrangement direction) changes.

As shown in FIG. 94(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four pending icons 9A are horizontally arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal sides of the display screen. there is As shown in FIG. 94(B), the left sub-display device 10L moves upward from the retracted position toward the relay position (relay position). During this upward movement of the left sub-display device 10L, the display of the four pending icons 9A is maintained. That is, by moving the left sub-display device 10L upward, the four pending icons 9A remain displayed and the pending icons 9
It moves in a direction (vertical direction) perpendicular to (horizontal direction) the arrangement direction of A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 94(C) to 94(D), the left sub-display device 10L is moved to the relay position (
By rotating to the right in the relay position), it moves to the advanced position (deployed position) and stops (stops) there. At this time, since the four pending icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four pending icons 9A changes as the left sub-display device 10L rotates to the right. Each of the pending icons 9A is displayed on the sub display device 10
The tilt changes as L rotates to the right. That is, each of the reserved icons 9A changes its orientation so that the orientation of the icon matches the arrangement direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(E),
The four pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that is still (stopped) at the advanced position (deployed position). At this time, another image may be displayed instead of the pending icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 94(F) to 94(H), the left sub-display device 10L moves from the advanced position (unfolded position) to the retracted position (home position) by left rotation and downward movement. Stand still (stop). At this time, since the four pending icons 9A are continuously displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four pending icons 9A changes as the left sub-display device 10L rotates to the left. . In addition, due to the downward movement of the left sub-display device 10L, the four pending icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) perpendicular to (intersecting) the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the pending icons 9A while maintaining their display.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 94(I) to 94(J), the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9B are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the left sub-display device 10L. In this state, the left sub-display device 10L rotates to the right at the intermediate position (intermediate position) to move to the advanced position (unfolded position) and stop (stop) there. At this time,
Four pending icons 9A and four pending icons 9 are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
B is displayed, the direction of arrangement of the pending icons 9A and 9B is changed by rotating the left sub-display device 10L to the right. Each of the pending icons 9A and 9B is the sub display device 1
The tilt also changes with the clockwise rotation of 0L. That is, each of the reserved icons 9A and 9B changes its orientation so that the orientation of the icon matches the arrangement direction.

[Retained arrangement direction change effect D]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the suspended arrangement direction change effect D. FIG. In the suspended arrangement direction change effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 95(A), the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). . On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach is formed in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are "2" and temporarily stop-displayed. On the left sub-display device 10L, pending icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, a suspension arrangement direction change effect is executed in which the direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of suspension icons 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L is changed. In this embodiment, a change in the orientation of the left sub-display device 10L causes a change in the direction in which the plurality of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are arranged (arrangement direction). A specific image TG is also displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. A specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific object. here,
The specific image TG is a smile face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

As shown in FIG. 95(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a pseudo-repeat suggestion image indicated by "repeat" indicating the start of the pseudo-repeat is displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C. .
At this time, the left sub-display device 10L moves upward from the retracted position toward the relay position (relay position). During this upward movement of the left sub-display device 10L, the four holding icons 9
A remains visible. That is, by moving the left sub-display device 10L upward, 4
The two pending icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) perpendicular to (intersecting) the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the pending icons 9A while maintaining their display.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 95(C) to 95(D), the left sub-display device 10L is moved to the relay position (
By rotating to the right in the relay position), it moves to the advanced position (deployed position) and stops (stops) there. At this time, since the four pending icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four pending icons 9A changes as the left sub-display device 10L rotates to the right. Each of the pending icons 9A is displayed on the sub display device 10
The tilt changes as L rotates to the right. That is, each of the pending icons 9A changes its orientation so that the orientation of the icon matches the arrangement direction. Since the specific image TG is also displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the inclination of the specific image TG changes as the left sub-display device 10L rotates to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(E), the four pending icons 9A and the specific image TG disappear from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that is still (stopped) at the advanced position (deployed position). After that, an image labeled "second time" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, suggesting that the second pseudo-reunion will start.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 95(F) to 95(H), the left sub-display device 10L moves from the advanced position (unfolded position) to the retracted position (home position) by left rotation and downward movement. Stand still (stop). At this time, since the four pending icons 9A are continuously displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four pending icons 9A changes as the left sub-display device 10L rotates to the left. . In addition, due to the downward movement of the left sub-display device 10L, the four pending icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) perpendicular to (intersecting) the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the pending icons 9A while maintaining their display. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the second variable display is displayed as shown in FIG. 95(G). After that, as shown in FIG. 95(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are "6".
, a ready-to-win that is temporarily stopped is formed, and a pseudo-repeat suggesting image indicated by "repeat" indicating the start of a pseudo-repeat is displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 95(I) to 95(J), the left sub-display device 10L moves to the relay position (
By rotating to the right in the relay position), it moves to the advanced position (deployed position) and stops (stops) there. At this time, since the four pending icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four pending icons 9A changes as the left sub-display device 10L rotates to the right. Each of the pending icons 9A is displayed on the sub display device 10
The tilt changes as L rotates to the right. That is, each of the reserved icons 9A changes its orientation so that the orientation of the icon matches the arrangement direction. Since the specific image TG is also displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the inclination of the specific image TG changes as the left sub-display device 10L rotates to the right. As shown in FIG. 95(J), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L that is stationary (stopped) at the advanced position (deployed position), four holding icons 9 are displayed.
A and the specific image TG disappear, and an image indicated as "third time" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, suggesting that the third pseudo-run will start.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the reserved arrangement direction change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 92, by changing the display positions of the plurality of pending icons displayed on the sub-display device 10, the direction in which the plurality of pending icons are arranged changes. A change production can be executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 93, by changing the display positions of the plurality of pending icons displayed on the main display device 7, it is possible to perform an arrangement direction change effect in which the direction in which the plurality of pending icons are arranged is changed. Figure 94, Figure 9
5, by changing the posture of the sub-display device 10, the sub-display device 10
It is possible to execute an arrangement direction change effect in which the direction in which the plurality of reserved icons displayed on the . According to these configurations, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIGS. 92 (D) (E), FIGS. 93 (A) (B), FIG.
) (D), as shown in FIGS. 95 (C) and (D), in the arrangement direction change effect, the angle of the direction in which the plurality of pending icons are arranged changes while the display is maintained. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
92(G), 93(E), 93(F), 94(G), and 94(H)
), and as shown in FIGS. 95(G) and (H), in the arrangement direction change effect, the plurality of pending icons are
After the line-up angle changes, it moves in a direction that intersects the line-up direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
92(B)(G), 93(C)(D)(G), and FIG.
As shown in 4(B)(G) and FIGS. 95(B)(G), in the arrangement direction change effect, a plurality of pending icons move in a direction intersecting the direction in which they are arranged while maintaining their display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92(D) and 93(B), in the arrangement direction change effect, one of the plurality of pending icons is displayed on the main display device 7 or the sub display device 10. By changing the display position of the above pending icon, the direction in which the plurality of pending icons displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 are arranged changes. According to this configuration,
The player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be enhanced.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIGS. 93(H), 94(C)(F), 95(C)(F)
), the sub-display device 10 is configured to be rotatable, and in the arrangement direction change effect, by rotating the sub-display device 10, a plurality of pending icons displayed on the sub-display device 10 are arranged. change direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the reserved arrangement direction change effect are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In suspension arrangement direction change effects A to D, a plurality of suspension icons 9A are arranged in a straight line. However, a plurality of pending icons 9A may be displayed side by side in a curved line.
In this case, the approximation straight line of the multiple pending icons 9A can be regarded as the arrangement direction of the multiple pending icons 9A. Further, even when a plurality of pending icons 9A are displayed irregularly such as in a zigzag pattern, the approximate straight line can be regarded as the arrangement direction.

[Modification 2]
In the pending arrangement direction change effects A to D, the pending icon 9A corresponding to the special figure 1 was exemplified, but the pending arrangement direction change effect may be the pending icon 9B corresponding to the special figure 2 or the pending icon 9C. . Moreover, in a state in which both the suspended icon 9A and the suspended icon 9B are displayed, the angle of the arrangement direction of one or both of these may be changed.

[Modification 3]
In the suspension arrangement direction change effects A to D, each of the suspension icons 9A is changed in orientation according to the change in the arrangement direction. However, in the pending arrangement direction change effect, the pending icon 9
Only the arrangement direction may be changed without changing the orientation of each of A's.

[Modification 4]
When the arrangement direction of the pending icon 9A changes in the pending arrangement direction change effects A to D,
The part that maintains the display may not maintain the display, and the part that does not maintain the display may maintain the display.

[Modification 5]
In the suspension arrangement direction change effects A to D, the suspension icon 9A may be displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. FIG. Further, the pending icon 9A may change its arrangement direction while straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 .

[Modification 6]
The contents of the reserved arrangement direction change effects A to D may be combined as appropriate. In addition, the pending array direction change effects A to D may not include some of the effects described above, and other effects may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a pending icon;
capable of executing an arrangement direction change effect in which the direction in which the plurality of reserved icons displayed on the display means are arranged changes;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
In the arrangement direction change effect, the plurality of reserved icons change the angle of the direction in which they are arranged while maintaining their display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2,
In the arrangement direction change effect, the plurality of reserved icons move in a direction intersecting the direction in which they are arranged after the angle in which they are arranged is changed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-3,
In the arrangement direction change effect, the plurality of pending icons move in a direction intersecting the direction in which they are arranged while maintaining their display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
In the arrangement direction change effect, the direction in which the plurality of reserved icons displayed on the display means are arranged is changed by changing the display position of one or more reserved icons among the plurality of reserved icons on the display means. Change,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
The display means is configured to be rotatable,
In the arrangement direction change effect, the direction in which the plurality of pending icons displayed on the display means are arranged is changed by rotating the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 96 to 99. FIG. This pending display effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101
analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the pending display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 or the sub This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen of the display device 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R).

[Holding display effect A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the suspension display effect A. FIG. In the pending display effect A, first, as shown in FIG.
0R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, three pending icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have shapes that imitate the appearance of the right sub-display device 10R. Specifically, like the right sub-display device 10R,
It has a shape that combines an inner rectangle and an outer rectangle surrounding the rectangle. The inner rectangular portion is a portion imitating the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, and the portion between the inner rectangle and the outer rectangle is a portion imitating the outer frame of the right sub-display device 10R. . The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 3 is exemplified.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are confirmed and stopped in a manner of losing. Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), the display of the pending icon 9C disappears. Next, FIG. 96(D) to
As shown in FIG. 96(J), the rightmost pending icon 9A among the three pending icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. A first display position DP1 for displaying the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen
, to the second display position DP2 where the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96(D), the pending icon 9A is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.
from the first display position DP1 toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally upward to the right). At this time, the direction in which the plurality of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are arranged (horizontal direction) and the direction in which the pending icons 9A begin to move from the first display position DP1 (diagonally upward to the right). are in different directions. next,
As shown in FIG. 96(E), the pending icon 9A begins to move from the first display position DP1, and the display on the left sub-display device 10L is changed so that the pending icon 9A jumps out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. A part of the hold icon 9A on the screen (the hold icon 9 with a part missing)
A) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 96(F), the pending icon 9A is displayed on the main display device 7 as if the pending icon 9A jumped out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L onto the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. displayed on the screen 7a. Note that while the pending icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7,
A pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L and on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
and may be displayed across.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(G), the pending icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub-display device 10R in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right). ) begins to move in a curve. Next, as shown in FIG. 96(H), the hold icon 9
Part of the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 so that A begins to move from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the pending icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. A pending icon 9A) is displayed without the . Next, FIG. 96(I)
As shown in , the entire pending icon 9A jumps from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.
is displayed in the upper left position of the display screen. Along with this, the two pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. In addition, the hold icon 9
While A is moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the pending icon 9A straddles the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(J), the pending icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally appears on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. to the second display position DP2, and is displayed as the pending icon 9C. In addition, the two suspended icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right, and the right suspended icon 9A of the two suspended icons 9A moves to the left sub-display device 10.
It is displayed at the first display position DP1 of the L display screen. In this way, pending digestion occurs. With this pending digestion, the number of special figures 1 pending is reduced by one and becomes 2. That is, it matches the number (two) of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L after the pending is completed.

[Holding display effect B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the suspension display effect B. FIG. In the pending display effect B, first, as shown in FIG.
0R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.
It has a shape that imitates the appearance of Specifically, it has a rectangular outer shape similar to that of the right sub-display device 10R. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 3 is exemplified.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are confirmed and stopped in the mode of losing. Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), the display of the pending icon 9C disappears. Next, FIG. 97(D) to
As shown in FIG. 97(J), the rightmost pending icon 9A among the three pending icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. A first display position DP1 for displaying the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen
, to the second display position DP2 where the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97(D), the pending icon 9A is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.
from the first display position DP1 toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally upward to the right). At this time, the direction in which the plurality of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are arranged (horizontal direction) and the direction in which the pending icons 9A begin to move from the first display position DP1 (upper right direction). are in different directions. next,
As shown in FIG. 97(E), the pending icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1, and the display on the left sub-display device 10L is changed so that the pending icon 9A jumps out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. A part of the hold icon 9A on the screen (the hold icon 9 with a part missing)
A) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 97(F), the pending icon 9A is displayed on the main display device 7 as if the pending icon 9A jumped out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. displayed on the screen 7a. Note that while the pending icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7,
A pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L and on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
and may be displayed across.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(G), the pending icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub-display device 10R in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right). ) begins to move in a curve. Next, as shown in FIG. 97(H), the hold icon 9
Part of the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 so that A begins to move from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the pending icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. A pending icon 9A) is displayed without the . Next, FIG. 97(I)
As shown in , the entire pending icon 9A jumps from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.
is displayed in the upper left position of the display screen. Along with this, the two pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. In addition, the hold icon 9
While A is moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the pending icon 9A straddles the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(J), the pending icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally appears on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. to the second display position DP2, and is displayed as the pending icon 9C. In addition, the two suspended icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right, and the right suspended icon 9A of the two suspended icons 9A moves to the left sub-display device 10.
It is displayed at the first display position DP1 of the L display screen. Thus, pending digestion occurs. Along with this pending digestion, the number of special figures 1 pending is reduced by one to 2. That is, it matches the number (two) of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L after the pending is completed.

[Holding display effect C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the suspension display effect C. FIG. In the pending display effect C, first, as shown in FIG.
0R) is located at the retracted position (home position). The right sub-display device 10R has a circular shape. The right sub-display device 10R has an annular portion R1 forming the outer peripheral portion of the right sub-display device 10R. The right sub-display device 10R has a circular display screen inside the annular portion R1. The right sub-display device 10R is configured to be vertically movable between a retracted position (home position) and an advanced position located above the retracted position. Annular part R
1 is configured to be rotatable in the circumferential direction. That is, the annular portion R1 is configured to be rotatable clockwise (clockwise) and counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

Then, as shown in FIG. 98(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R provide a decorative design variation effect (variation display).
is executed. At this time, the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. A pending icon 9A representing the first special figure pending is displayed in the upper area of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and a pending icon 9B (not shown) representing the second special figure pending is displayed in the lower area. Also, part of the pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The right sub-display device 10R represents the pending icon 9C as a whole of the right sub-display device 10R. An image representing the color, pattern, etc. of the pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have shapes that imitate the appearance of the right sub-display device 10R. Specifically, the right sub-display device 10
It has a shape such as R, which is a combination of an inner circle and an outer circle surrounding the circle. The inner circular portion is a portion that imitates the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, and the portion between the inner and outer circles is an annular portion R1 that is the outer frame of the right sub-display device 10R. It is a part that imitates The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 3 is exemplified.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are determined and stopped in the manner of losing. Next, as shown in FIG. 98(C), the display of the pending icon 9C disappears. Next, FIG. 98(D) to
As shown in FIG. 98(I), of the three pending icons 9A displayed side by side in the horizontal direction on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the rightmost pending icon 9A is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. A first display position DP1 for displaying the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen
, to the second display position DP2 where the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The right sub-display device 10R represents the pending icon 9C as a whole right sub-display device 10R. Therefore, the position of the entire right sub-display device 10R is the second
The display position is DP2. Also, the pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.
part of is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98(D), the pending icon 9A is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.
from the first display position DP1 toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally upward to the right). At this time, the direction in which the plurality of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are arranged (horizontal direction) and the direction in which the pending icons 9A begin to move from the first display position DP1 (upper right direction). are in different directions. next,
As shown in FIG. 98(E), the pending icon 9A begins to move from the first display position DP1, and the left sub-display device 10L is displayed so that the pending icon 9A jumps out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. A part of the hold icon 9A on the screen (the hold icon 9 with a part missing)
A) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 98(F), the pending icon 9A is displayed on the main display device 7 as if the pending icon 9A jumped out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L onto the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. displayed on the screen 7a. Note that while the pending icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7,
A pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L and on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
and may be displayed across.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(G), the pending icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub-display device 10R in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right). ) begins to move in a curve. Next, as shown in FIG. 98(H), the hold icon 9
Part of the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 so that A starts to move from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the pending icon 9A jumps into the right sub-display device 10R. A status pending icon 9A) is displayed. Along with this, the two pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(I), the pending icon 9A moves to the second display position DP2 of the right sub-display device 10R and is displayed as the pending icon 9C. In addition, the two pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right, and the right pending icon 9A of the two pending icons 9A moves to the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. It is displayed at the first display position DP1. Thus, pending digestion occurs. Along with this pending digestion, the number of special figures 1 pending is reduced by one to 2. That is, it matches the number (two) of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L after the pending is completed.

[Holding display effect D]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the suspension display effect D. FIG. In the pending display effect D, first, as shown in FIG.
0R) is located at the retracted position (home position). The right sub-display device 10R has a circular shape. The right sub-display device 10R has an annular portion R1 forming the outer peripheral portion of the right sub-display device 10R. The right sub-display device 10R has a circular display screen inside the annular portion R1. The right sub-display device 10R is configured to be vertically movable between a retracted position (home position) and an advanced position located above the retracted position. Annular part R
1 is configured to be rotatable in the circumferential direction. That is, the annular portion R1 is configured to be rotatable clockwise (clockwise) and counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

Then, as shown in FIG. 99(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R provide a decorative design variation effect (variation display).
is executed. At this time, the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. A pending icon 9A representing the first special figure pending is displayed in the upper area of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and a pending icon 9B (not shown) representing the second special figure pending is displayed in the lower area. Also, part of the pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The right sub-display device 10R represents the pending icon 9C as a whole of the right sub-display device 10R. An image representing the color, pattern, etc. of the pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have shapes that imitate the appearance of the right sub-display device 10R. Specifically, the right sub-display device 10
It has a shape such as R, which is a combination of an inner circle and an outer circle surrounding the circle. The inner circular portion is a portion imitating the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, and the portion between the inner and outer circles is an annular portion that is the outer frame of the right sub-display device 10R. This is the modeled part. In addition, the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but characters, figures,
It also includes abstract items such as symbols and conceptual items whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 3 is exemplified.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are determined and stopped in the form of failure. Next, as shown in FIG. 99(C), the display of the pending icon 9C disappears. The rightmost pending icon 9A among the three pending icons 9A displayed side by side in the horizontal direction on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is the rightmost pending icon on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. 9A is moved from the first display position DP1 where the hold icon 9A is displayed to the second display position DP2 where the hold icon 9C is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R. Note that the right sub-display device 1
0R represents the pending icon 9C as a whole on the right sub-display device 10R. Therefore, the position of the entire right sub-display device 10R is the second display position DP2. Also, the right sub-display device 10R
A part of the pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of . Next, as shown in FIG. 99(D), the entire right sub-display device 10R is displayed as the pending icon 9C. Then, the following variable display is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(E), the right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position (unfolded position). Next, as shown in FIG. 99(F), the right sub-display device 10R moves downward from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position). Next, as shown in FIG. 99(G), the annular portion R1 of the right sub-display device 10R rotates rightward (clockwise) along the circumferential direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 99(H), after stopping the rotation of the annular portion R1 of the right sub-display device 10R, the right sub-display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position. Moving. Next, as shown in FIG. 99(I), the right sub-display device 10R moves downward from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position). Next, as shown in FIG. 99(J), the annular portion R1 of the right sub-display device 10R rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) along the circumferential direction.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, the left sub-display device 10L displaying the pending icon 9A and the holding (the pending icon 9C) are configured to be movable.
and a right sub-display device 10R representing . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, the right sub-display device 10R indicates the state of the suspension (the suspension icon 9C) including the presence or absence of the suspension (the suspension icon 9C). . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, the right sub-display device 10R has a shape corresponding to the shape of the hold (the hold icon 9C). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, the hold icon 9A has a shape corresponding to the shape of the right sub-display device 10R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, the right sub-display device 10R has a circular shape. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, the right sub-display device 10R has an annular portion R1 that constitutes the outer peripheral portion of the right sub-display device 10R and is rotatable in the circumferential direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the pending display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the suspension display effects of FIGS. 96 to 98, the right sub-display device 10R representing the suspension (the suspension icon 9C) has a display screen. That is, the right sub-display device 1
0R represented the hold (the hold icon 9C) using the display screen. However, the right sub-display device 10R may have no display screen (use no display screen). For example, instead of the display screen, a light-emitting device or the like that emits light to represent the pending color may be used.
[Modification 2]
In the suspension display effects of FIGS. 96 to 98, the right sub-display device 10R representing the suspension (the suspension icon 9C) has a shape corresponding to the shape of the suspension (the suspension icon 9C). However, the right sub-display device 10R may not have a shape corresponding to the shape of the suspension (the suspension icon 9C). For example, the shape of the right sub-display device 10R and the shape of the suspension (the suspension icon 9C) may be completely different shapes.
[Modification 3]
96 to 98, it is assumed that the pending icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L has a shape corresponding to the shape of the right sub-display device 10R representing the pending (the pending icon 9C). explained. However, the suspension icon 9A may not have a shape corresponding to the shape of the right sub-display device 10R representing the suspension (the suspension icon 9C). For example, the shape of the pending icon 9A and the shape of the right sub-display device 10R may be completely different shapes.
[Modification 4]
In the suspension display effects of FIGS. 96 to 98, the right sub-display device 10R representing the suspension (the suspension icon 9C) has a rectangular or circular shape. However, the right sub-display device 10R is not limited to such a shape. The right sub-display device 10R may have, for example, an elliptical shape, a triangular shape, a square shape, or other polygonal shapes.
[Modification 5]
96 to 98, the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the reserved icon 9A is displayed on the left sub-display device. 10L is displayed. For example, decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C,
The right decorative pattern 8R) and the pending icon 9A may be displayed on the same display device (display means).

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B2-1]
a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a movable accessory configured to be movable and representing the hold,
one of the plurality of types of images is a pending icon;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The movable accessory represents the state of the suspension including the presence or absence of the suspension,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2,
The movable accessory has a shape corresponding to the shape of the reserve,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-3,
The holding icon has a shape corresponding to the shape of the movable accessory,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-3 or aspect B2-4,
The movable accessory has a circular shape,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5,
The movable accessory comprises an outer peripheral portion of the movable accessory and has an annular portion rotatable in the circumferential direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

100 to 103 will be used to explain the pending movement effects A to D. FIG. This pending movement effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 1
01 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a hold movement effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R).

[Holding movement effect A]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the pending movement effect A. FIG. In the holding movement effect A, first,
As shown in FIG. 100(A), the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.
C is displayed. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 3 is exemplified.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are determined and stopped in a manner of losing. next,
As shown in FIG. 100(C), the display of the pending icon 9C disappears. Next, FIG. 100 (
D)-As shown in FIG. 100(J), of the three pending icons 9A displayed side by side in the horizontal direction on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the rightmost pending icon 9A is displayed on the left sub-display. Move from the first display position DP1 where the rightmost pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the device 10L to the second display position DP2 where the pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100(D), the pending icon 9A is displayed on the left sub display device
From the first display position DP1 of L, it begins to move toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in a curved line in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally upward to the right). At this time, the direction in which the plurality of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are arranged (horizontal direction) and the direction in which the pending icons 9A begin to move from the first display position DP1 (upper right direction). are in different directions. Next, as shown in FIG. 100(E), the pending icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1, and the left sub-display device 10L is moved so that the pending icon 9A jumps out of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. A part of the pending icon 9A (partially missing pending icon 9A) is displayed on the display screen of 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 100(F), the pending icon 9A is displayed on the main display device 7 as if the pending icon 9A jumped out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L onto the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. displayed on the screen 7a. In addition, the hold icon 9
While A is moving from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the pending icon 9A straddles the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(G), the pending icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub-display device 10R in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right). ) begins to move in a curve. Next, as shown in FIG. 100(H), the pending icon 9A begins to move from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the main display device 9A is displayed so that the pending icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. A part of the pending icon 9A (partially lacking pending icon 9A) is displayed on the display screen 7a of FIG. Next, Figure 100
As shown in (I), the entire pending icon 9A jumps from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. displayed in the upper left position. Along with this, the two pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. It should be noted that while the pending icon 9A is moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the pending icon 9A is displayed between the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the right sub-display device 10.
It may be displayed straddling the display screen of R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(J), the pending icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally appears on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. to the second display position DP2, and is displayed as the pending icon 9C. In addition, the two suspended icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right side, and the right suspended icon 9A of the two suspended icons 9A moves to the left sub-display device 1
It is displayed at the first display position DP1 on the display screen of 0L. In this way, pending digestion occurs. With this pending digestion, the number of special figures 1 pending is reduced by one and becomes 2. That is, it matches the number (two) of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L after the pending is completed.

[Holding movement effect B]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the pending movement effect B. FIG. In the pending movement effect B, first,
As shown in FIG. 101(A), the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.
C is displayed. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 3 is exemplified.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are confirmed and stopped in a failing manner. next,
As shown in FIG. 101(C), the display of the pending icon 9C disappears. Next, FIG. 101 (
D)-As shown in FIG. 101(J), of the three pending icons 9A displayed side by side in the horizontal direction on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the rightmost pending icon 9A is displayed on the left sub-display. Move from the first display position DP1 where the rightmost pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the device 10L to the second display position DP2 where the pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101(D), the pending icon 9A is displayed on the left sub-display device
From the first display position DP1 of L, it begins to move linearly toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally upward to the right). At this time, the direction in which the plurality of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are arranged (horizontal direction) and the direction in which the pending icons 9A begin to move from the first display position DP1 (upper right direction). are in different directions. Next, as shown in FIG. 101(E), the pending icon 9A begins to move from the first display position DP1, and the left sub-display device 10L is moved so that the pending icon 9A jumps out of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. A part of the pending icon 9A (partially missing pending icon 9A) is displayed on the display screen of 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 101(F), the pending icon 9A is displayed on the main display device 7 as if the pending icon 9A jumped out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L onto the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. displayed on the screen 7a. In addition, the hold icon 9
While A is moving from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the pending icon 9A straddles the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(G), the pending icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub-display device 10R in the direction of the arrow AD2 (diagonally downward to the right). ) in a straight line. Next, as shown in FIG. 101(H), the pending icon 9A begins to move from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the main display device 9A is displayed so that the pending icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. A part of the pending icon 9A (partially missing pending icon 9A) is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. FIG. Next, Fig. 101
As shown in (I), the entire pending icon 9A jumps from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. displayed in the upper left position. Along with this, the two pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. It should be noted that while the pending icon 9A is moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the pending icon 9A is displayed between the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the right sub-display device 10.
It may be displayed straddling the display screen of R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(J), the pending icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally appears on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. to the second display position DP2, and is displayed as the pending icon 9C. In addition, the two pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right, and the right-side pending icon 9A of the two pending icons 9A moves to the left sub-display device 1.
It is displayed at the first display position DP1 on the display screen of 0L. In this way, pending digestion occurs. With this pending digestion, the number of special figures 1 pending is reduced by one and becomes 2. That is, it matches the number (two) of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L after the pending is completed.

[Holding movement effect C]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the pending movement effect C. FIG. In the pending movement effect C, first,
As shown in FIG. 102(A), the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.
C is displayed. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 3 is exemplified.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are confirmed and stopped in a failing manner. next,
As shown in FIG. 102(C), the display of the pending icon 9C disappears. Next, in FIG. 102 (
D)-As shown in FIG. 102(I), the rightmost pending icon 9A among the three pending icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed in the left sub-display. Move from the first display position DP1 where the rightmost pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the device 10L to the second display position DP2 where the pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 102(D), the pending icon 9A is displayed on the left sub display device 10
From the first display position DP1 of L, it begins to move toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in a curved line in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally upward to the right). At this time, the direction in which the plurality of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are arranged (horizontal direction) and the direction in which the pending icons 9A begin to move from the first display position DP1 (upper right direction). are in different directions. Next, as shown in FIG. 102(E), the pending icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1, and the left sub-display device 10L is moved so that the pending icon 9A jumps out of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. A part of the pending icon 9A (partially missing pending icon 9A) is displayed on the display screen of 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 102(F), the left sub-display device 10 appears as if the pending icon 9A jumps out of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L and disappears.
The display of the pending icon 9A is erased from the display screen of L. Further, the pending icon 9A is not displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, or the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(G), the suspended icon 9A that has once disappeared appears on the right sub-display device 1.
The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 appears as if it jumped into the display screen of 0R from above.
, a part of the pending icon 9A (partially missing pending icon 9A) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 102(H), as if the suspended icon 9A jumped into the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the suspended icon 9A as a whole moves to the upper left position of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. Is displayed. Along with this, 2 displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L
The two holding icons 9A also move to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(I), the pending icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally appears on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. to the second display position DP2, and is displayed as the pending icon 9C. In addition, the two suspended icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right side, and the right suspended icon 9A of the two suspended icons 9A moves to the left sub-display device 1
It is displayed at the first display position DP1 on the display screen of 0L. Thus, pending digestion occurs. Along with this pending digestion, the number of special figures 1 pending is reduced by one to 2. That is, it matches the number (two) of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L after the pending is completed.

[Holding movement effect D]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the pending movement effect D. FIG. In the holding movement effect D, first,
As shown in FIG. 103(A), the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.
C is displayed. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 3 is exemplified.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are confirmed and stopped in a manner of losing. next,
As shown in FIG. 103(C), the display of the pending icon 9C disappears. Next, FIG. 103 (
D) to FIG. 103(H), of the three pending icons 9A displayed side by side in the horizontal direction on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the rightmost pending icon 9A is displayed on the left sub-display. Move from the first display position DP1 where the rightmost pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the device 10L to the second display position DP2 where the pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103(D), the pending icon 9A is displayed on the left sub-display device 10.
L begins to move linearly in the direction of the arrow AD1 (diagonally downward to the right) from the first display position DP1 of L toward the first display position DP2 of the right sub-display device 10R. At this time, the left sub-display device 10
The direction in which the plurality of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of L are arranged (horizontal direction) is different from the direction in which the pending icons 9A begin to move from the first display position DP1 (diagonally downward to the right). Next, as shown in FIG. 103(E), the pending icon 9A begins to move from the first display position DP1, and the left sub-display device 10L is moved so that the pending icon 9A jumps out of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. A part of the pending icon 9A (partially missing pending icon 9A) is displayed on the display screen of 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(F), the pending icon 9A appears on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R as if it jumped from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. A part of the pending icon 9A (partially missing pending icon 9A) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 103(G), the pending icon 9A is displayed on the right sub display device 1.
The entire hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R as if jumping into the display screen of 0R. Along with this, the two pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right. While the pending icon 9A is moving from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. and may be displayed across.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(H), the pending icon 9A moves to the second display position DP2 on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R and is displayed as the pending icon 9C. again,
The two suspended icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L also move to the right, and the right suspended icon 9A out of the two suspended icons 9A moves to the left sub-display device 10L.
is displayed at the first display position DP1 of the display screen. Thus, pending digestion occurs.
Along with this pending digestion, the number of special figures 1 pending is reduced by one to 2. That is, it matches the number (two) of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L after the pending is completed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending movement effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 to 103, the left sub-display device 10
A first effect in which the pending icon 9A is displayed at the first display position DP1 on the display screen of L, and after the first effect, the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is used to display the pending icon 9A at the first position. A second effect displayed so as to move from the display position DP1 to a second display position DP2 where the pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, and after the second effect, the right sub-display device A third effect in which the pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of 10R can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, in the second effect, the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 are used to display the pending icon 9A. It is displayed so as to move from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2.
According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, in the second effect, the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L and then on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in that order. be. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, in the second effect, the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R and the main display device 7 are displayed.
using the display screen 7a, the hold icon 9A moves from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP
It is displayed to move up to 2. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, in the second effect, the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7,
They are displayed in order of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 to 103, the left sub-display device 10
The direction in which the plurality of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of L are arranged is different from the direction in which the pending icons 9A start moving from the first display position DP1 in the second effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, in the second effect, the hold icon 9A is displayed so as to move in a curved line from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2. be. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the pending movement effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
100, 101, and 103, the suspension movement effects A, B, and D are described as displaying the suspension icon 9A so as to move continuously from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2. However, the hold icon 9A is changed from the first display position DP1 to the second display position D
It is good also as the aspect which displays so that it may intermittently move to P2.
[Modification 2]
100, 101, and 103, the suspension movement effects A, B, and D are described as moving the suspension icon 9A from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2 linearly or curvedly. bottom. However, the manner of moving the pending icon 9A is not limited to these.
[Modification 3]
100 to 103, the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C
, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the pending icon 9A is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. For example, decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8
C, right decorative pattern 8R) and the pending icon 9A may be displayed on the same display device (display means).
[Modification 4]
100 to 103, in the direction in which a plurality of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L are arranged (horizontal direction), and the pending icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1. The direction (direction of arrow AD1) is a different direction. However, the direction (horizontal direction) in which the plurality of pending icons 9A are arranged and the direction in which the pending icons 9A are arranged are in the first display position DP1.
may be the same direction (eg, horizontal direction) as the direction in which the movement starts from .

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B3-1]
a first display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a second display means for indicating the suspension,
a first effect in which a pending icon is displayed at a first position on the first display means;
After the first effect, the first display means is used to display the suspension icon so as to move from the first position to a second position displaying the suspension on the second display means. A second production to be performed,
After the second effect, a third effect in which the suspension is displayed on the second display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
further comprising a third display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
In the second effect, the holding icon is displayed so as to move from the first position to the second position using the first display means and the third display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2,
In the second effect, the holding icon is displayed in the order of the first display means and the third display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
further comprising a third display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
In the second effect, the holding icon is moved from the first position to the second position by using the first display means, the second display means and the third display means. displayed in the
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4,
In the second effect, the holding icon is displayed on the first display means, the third display means,
displayed in the order of the second display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-5,
A direction in which the plurality of reserved icons displayed on the first display means are arranged is different from a direction in which the reserved icons start to move from the first position in the second effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-6,
In the second effect, the hold icon is displayed so as to move in a curved line from the first position to the second position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The information display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. FIG. This information display effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the information display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display is performed. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7 and the display screen of the sub-display device 10. FIG.

[Relevant information display effect A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the information display effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 104(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at retracted positions (home positions).
It is in. A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. there is It is assumed that the suspended image 9A corresponding to the first storage area has changed to red. On the other hand, the pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The reserved image 9C is
It corresponds to current fluctuations.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (losing), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are fixed and displayed. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are "5", and the middle production pattern 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(D), a pending shift effect is executed. The pending shift effect is an effect that is performed almost simultaneously with the next fluctuation start effect, and is an effect that shifts the pending image 9A. Specifically, as indicated by the arrow in the figure, the reserved image 9 corresponding to the first storage area
A (red) is the reserved image 9C, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area is the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third storage area is the second storage area. It becomes the corresponding reserved image 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(E), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Two pending images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. On the other hand, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R displays the pending image 9C changed to red. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(F), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(G), a battle effect is executed. This battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Ally character C here
When RA wins, the expectation of a big win is high. Note that, in this battle effect, the image of the portion covered by the sub-display device 10 among the images displayed on the display screen 7 a is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 . Here, the feet of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 . In addition, the pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is a effect of fixing and stopping the effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the arrangement of the big win on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "7"
is stopped at The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the finalization and stoppage of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Information display effect B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the information display effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 105(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at retracted positions (home positions).
It is in. A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. there is It is assumed that the suspended image 9A corresponding to the first storage area has changed to red. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the expectation level information for the big win corresponding to the variation is displayed. In this case, a message image MSG reading "fairly good" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 105(C), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (losing), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are fixed and displayed. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are "5", and the middle production pattern 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), a pending shift effect is executed. The pending shift effect is an effect that is performed almost simultaneously with the next fluctuation start effect, and is an effect that shifts the pending image 9A. Specifically, as indicated by the arrow in the figure, the reserved image 9 corresponding to the first storage area
A (red) moves to the right sub-display device 10R, and a message image MSG reading "Extremely Hot" is displayed. Further, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(E), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Two pending images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. On the other hand, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R displays "Super Hot".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(F), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 105(G), a battle effect is executed. This battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Ally character C here
When RA wins, the expectation of a big win is high. In this battle effect, the image of the portion covered by the sub-display device 10 among the images displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10. FIG. Here, the feet of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 . In addition, the pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is a effect of fixing and stopping the effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the arrangement of the big win on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "7"
is displayed to stop at . The pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. In addition, the display on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R disappears as the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

[Relevant information display effect C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the information display effect C. As shown in FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 106(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at retracted positions (home positions).
It is in. In particular, the right sub-display device 10R is a circular display device that imitates a reserved image.
As a result, the right sub-display device 10R indicates the hold as a whole. A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is
It is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, here three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. It is assumed that the suspended image 9A corresponding to the first storage area has changed to red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 106(C), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (losing), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are fixed and displayed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are "5", and the middle effect pattern 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), a pending shift effect is executed. The pending shift effect is an effect that is performed almost simultaneously with the next fluctuation start effect, and is an effect that shifts the pending image 9A. Specifically, as indicated by the arrow in the figure, the reserved image 9 corresponding to the first storage area
A (red) moves to the right sub-display device 10R, and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R turns red. At this time, an effect as if the suspended image 9A (red) on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L has moved to the right sub-display device 10R is displayed on the display screen 7 of the main display device 7 located on the back side.
a. Further, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(E), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Two pending images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. On the other hand, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R indicating the hold is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(F), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 106(G), a battle effect is executed. This battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Ally character C here
When RA wins, the expectation of a big win is high. In this battle effect, the image of the portion covered by the left sub-display device 10L of the image displayed on the display screen 7a is
It is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the foot portion of the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. At this time, the pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is a effect of fixing and stopping the effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the arrangement of the big win on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "7"
is displayed to stop at . The pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. In addition, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R is no longer red as the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

[Relevant information display effect D]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the information display effect D. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 107(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at retracted positions (home positions).
It is in. In particular, the right sub-display device 10R is a circular display device that imitates a reserved image.
As a result, the right sub-display device 10R indicates the hold as a whole. A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is
It is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, here three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. It is assumed that the suspended image 9A corresponding to the first storage area has changed to red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 107(C), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (losing), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are fixed and displayed. Here, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are "5", and the middle production pattern 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(D), a pending shift effect is executed. The pending shift effect is an effect that is performed almost simultaneously with the next fluctuation start effect, and is an effect that shifts the pending image 9A. Specifically, as indicated by the arrow in the figure, the reserved image 9 corresponding to the first storage area
A (red) moves to the right sub-display device 10R, and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R turns red. At this time, an effect as if the suspended image 9A (red) on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L has moved to the right sub-display device 10R is displayed on the display screen 7 of the main display device 7 located on the far side.
a. Further, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(E), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Two pending images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas are displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. On the other hand, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R indicating the hold is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(F), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 107(G), a battle/information addition effect is executed. This battle/information addition effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins here, the degree of expectation for a big win increases. Also, the battle/information addition effect is a effect of adding information on the variation. Here, a triangular symbol is added to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, suggesting that the color is hotter than red alone. Of the images displayed on the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 1
The image of the portion covered with 0L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the foot portion of the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. At this time, the pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big win) is a effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the arrangement of the big win on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "7"
is displayed to stop at . The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. In addition, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R is no longer red as the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the information display presentation will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right sub-display device 10R, which is separate from the main display device 7, is used to display information related to the variation (FIGS. 104 (A), (B), (D), (E), (F)). ), Fig. 105
(A) (B) (D) (E) (F), Figure 106 (A) (B) (D) (E) (F) (G), Figure 107 (A) (B) (D) (E) ) (F) (G)). According to this configuration, the information related to the variation becomes easy to understand, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the right sub-display device 10R has a shape imitating a pending image, indicating the pending (FIGS. 106 and 107). According to this configuration, the information related to the change becomes easy to understand, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R is used to display information indicating the degree of expectation for the big win (FIGS. 104 (A), (B), (D), (E), (F), Figure 105 (A
) (B) (D) (E) (F), Figure 106 (A) (B) (D) (E) (F) (G), Figure 10
7(A)(B)(D)(E)(F)(G)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the degree of expectation for the big win in the variation, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pending image 9 is displayed using the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
A is displayed. According to this configuration, the reservation information becomes easy to understand, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the hold shift effect is executed, and the first display of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed.
An effect as if the pending image corresponding to the storage area had moved to the right sub-display device 10R is performed (FIGS. 104(D), 105(D), 106(D), and 107(D). This configuration According to this, it becomes easy to understand that the information displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R corresponds to the change, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed as if the pending image corresponding to the first storage area of the left sub-display device 10L had moved to the right sub-display device 10R. (FIGS. 106(D) and 107(D)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand that the information displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R corresponds to the change, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Modified examples of the information display effects are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, the right sub-display device 10R suggests information about the change,
Information on the change may be suggested on the left sub-display device 10L.
[Modification 2]
Although the above explanation assumes that the pending image is red, the colors of the pending image are blue, green,
Various colors such as purple and gold are conceivable.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B4-1]
a first display device capable of displaying an image and producing an effect;
A gaming machine comprising a second display device different from the first display device,
A game machine, comprising: effect control means for displaying information relating to the current variation, using the second display device.

[Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
A gaming machine, wherein the second display device has a shape that imitates a reserved image.

[Aspect B4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B4-1 or aspect B4-2,
A gaming machine, wherein the information related to the fluctuation is information indicating the degree of expectation for a big win.

[Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-3,
The game machine, wherein the effect control means can display a pending image corresponding to the pending memory on the first display device.

[Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-4,
The effect control means shifts the reserved image on the first display device in accordance with the consumption of the reserved memory, and moves as if the reserved image corresponding to the next variation is moved to the second display device. A game machine characterized by executing a performance.

[Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-5,
A gaming machine, wherein the moving effect is performed using a third display device located behind the first display device and the second display device.

[Aspect B4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-6,
A gaming machine, wherein the reserved image is displayed on a display screen of a display device other than the first display device when the reserved image is not displayed on the first display device.

108 to 111, the suspension icon interlocking effects A to D will be described below. This suspended icon interlocking effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90,
When an instruction to execute a pending icon-linked effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and An image is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R). Also, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the pending icon-linked effect is included, the left sub-display device 10L or the right sub-display device 10R). change the position and tilt of the

[Hold icon interlocking effect A]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon-linked effect A. FIG. In the holding icon interlocking effect A, first, as shown in FIG.
L and the right sub-display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. On the left sub-display device 10L, four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, a description will be given of a pending icon interlocking effect in which a specific image displayed for a specific pending icon, which is one of the four pending icons 9A, is moved in conjunction with the specific pending icon. In this embodiment, of the four pending icons 9A in FIG. 108A, the third pending icon from the right will be described as the specific pending icon. Here, among the four pending icons 9A, the pending icon that undergoes a predetermined pending change is called a specific pending icon.

As shown in FIG. 108(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four pending icons 9A are horizontally arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal sides of the display screen. there is As shown in FIG. 108(B), the hold icon 9A of the third hold from the right among the four hold icons 9A changes to hold by prefetching. Here, the specific image TG is displayed so as to be superimposed on the suspension icon 9A of the round image. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific target. Here, the specific image TG is a character image representing "heat". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

As shown in FIG. 108(C), when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
), the pending icon 9A is shifted due to the pending digestion. Specifically, the first pending (rightmost) pending icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L moves to the right, frames out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and then moves to the right. It is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the pending icon frames in from the left side of the display screen, moves rightward, and then out of the frame from the right side of the display screen. That is, in this embodiment, the pending icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th holds are moved rightward by one (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd holds. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) the shift movement of the pending icon 9A (the specific pending icon 9A) on which the specific image TG is superimposed. Therefore, the specific image TG is continuously displayed overlapping the same pending icon 9A (specific pending icon 9A). This specific pending icon 9A becomes the second pending pending icon 9A through shift movement.

As shown in FIG. 108(D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed at a position below and close to the overlapping pending icon 9A (specific pending icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have a larger character "Heat" or a different shape. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols are variably displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 108(E), when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) displays pending digestion. The shift movement of the hold icon 9A by is performed again. Specifically, the first pending (rightmost) pending icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L moves to the right, frames out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and then moves to the right. It is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the pending icon frames in from the left side of the display screen, moves rightward, and then out of the frame from the right side of the display screen. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the second and third holds are moved rightward by one (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. Specific image T
G moves (in conjunction with) the shift movement of the upper specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific pending icon 9A does not change before and after the shift movement. The specific pending icon 9A becomes the first pending pending icon 9A through shift movement.

After that, the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the sub-display device 10 (
In the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R), the shift movement of the pending icon 9A due to pending digestion is performed again. Specifically, the first pending (rightmost) specific pending icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L moves rightward to become the pending state, and is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. After being framed out from the screen, it is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the specific pending icon 9A frames in from the left side of the display screen, moves rightward, and then frames out from the right side of the display screen. At this time, the specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) the movement of the specific pending icon 9A. Specifically, the specific image TG is framed out (disappeared) from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L in accordance with the movement of the specific pending icon 9A, and then displayed (newly displayed) on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. ) is displayed. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the specific image TG frames in from the left side of the display screen, moves rightward, and then out of the frame from the right side of the display screen. As a result, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific pending icon 9A does not change during the movement of the specific pending icon (always the specific pending icon 9
A).

As shown in FIG. 108(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a variable display corresponding to the specific pending icon 9A is performed. On the left sub-display device 10L, the number of pending is 1 due to the completion of pending, and one pending icon 9A is displayed. A specific image TG represented by "heat" enters the frame from the right side of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R and moves leftward.
That is, the specific image TG re-frames from the right side of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R where the specific pending icon 9A has once framed out. Then, as shown in FIG. 108(I), the specific image TG stops near the center of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. After that, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are "3".
A reach that is temporarily stopped at is formed. That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that the expectation of the big win is high in the variation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9A. After that, as shown in FIG. 108(J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Holding icon interlocking effect B]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the suspended icon-linked effect B. FIG. In the holding icon interlocking effect B, first, as shown in FIG.
L and the right sub-display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. On the left sub-display device 10L, four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, a description will be given of a pending icon interlocking effect in which a specific image displayed for a specific pending icon, which is one of the four pending icons 9A, is moved in conjunction with the specific pending icon. In this embodiment, of the four pending icons 9A in FIG. 109A, the third pending icon from the right will be described as the specific pending icon. Here, among the four pending icons 9A, the pending icon that undergoes a predetermined pending change is called a specific pending icon.

As shown in FIG. 109(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four pending icons 9A are horizontally arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal sides of the display screen. there is As shown in FIG. 109B, the hold icon 9A of the third hold from the right among the four hold icons 9A changes to hold by prefetching. Here, the specific image TG is displayed so as to be superimposed on the suspension icon 9A of the round image. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific target. Here, the specific image TG is a character image representing "heat". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

As shown in FIG. 109(C), when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7 display a pending icon due to pending digestion. A shift move of 9A is performed. Specifically, the first pending (rightmost) pending icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L moves to the upper right direction, and after being framed out of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the main It is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the pending icon 9A frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right, and then out of the frame from the right side of the display screen 7a. That is, in this embodiment, the pending icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th holds are moved rightward by one (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd holds. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) the shift movement of the pending icon 9A (the specific pending icon 9A) on which the specific image TG is superimposed. Therefore, the specific image TG is
It is continuously displayed overlapping the same pending icon 9A (specific pending icon 9A). This specific pending icon 9A becomes the second pending pending icon 9A through shift movement.

As shown in FIG. 109(D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed at a position below and close to the overlapping pending icon 9A (specific pending icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have a larger character "Heat" or a different shape. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols are variably displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 109(E) , when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10) and the main display device 7 display The shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed again. Specifically, the first pending (rightmost) pending icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L moves to the upper right direction, and after being framed out of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the main It is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the pending icon frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right direction, and then out of the frame from the right side of the display screen 7a. That is, in this embodiment, the pending icon is not displayed. Left sub-display device 1
On the display screen of 0L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the second and third holds are moved one place to the right (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) the shift movement of the upper specific pending icon 9A. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific pending icon 9A does not change before and after the shift movement. This specific pending icon 9A becomes the first pending pending icon 9A through shift movement.

After that, the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the sub-display device 10 (
On the left sub-display device 10) and the main display device 7, the pending icon 9 due to pending digestion
A's shift movement is performed again. Specifically, the first pending (rightmost) specific pending icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L moves to the upper right to become the pending state, and is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. After being framed out from the screen, it is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 . On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific hold icon 9
After A enters the frame from the lower center of the display screen 7a and moves to the upper right direction, the display screen 7a
Frame out from the right side of the . At this time, the specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) the movement of the specific pending icon 9A. Specifically, the specific image TG is a specific pending icon 9
As A moves, it is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 after being framed out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific image TG frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves in the upper right direction, and then out of the frame from the right side of the display screen 7a. As a result, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific pending icon 9A does not change during the movement of the specific pending icon 9A (always positioned below the specific pending icon 9A).

As shown in FIG. 109(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a variable display corresponding to the specific pending icon 9A is performed. On the left sub-display device 10L, the number of pending is 1 due to the completion of pending, and one pending icon 9A is displayed. A specific image TG represented by "Heat" enters the frame from the right side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and moves leftward.
That is, the specific image TG is framed again from the right side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 where the specific pending icon 9A was once framed out. Then, as shown in FIG. 109I, the specific image TG stops near the right end of the display screen 7a of the main display device . After that, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are "3".
A reach that is temporarily stopped at is formed. That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that the expectation of a big win is high in the variation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9A. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109(J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Hold icon interlocking effect C]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon-linked effect C. FIG. In the pending icon-linked effect C, first, as shown in FIG.
L and the right sub-display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. On the left sub-display device 10L, four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, a description will be given of a pending icon interlocking effect in which a specific image displayed for a specific pending icon, which is one of the four pending icons 9A, is moved in conjunction with the specific pending icon. In this embodiment, of the four pending icons 9A in FIG. 110A, the third pending icon from the right will be described as the specific pending icon. Here, among the four pending icons 9A, the pending icon that undergoes a predetermined pending change is called a specific pending icon.

As shown in FIG. 110(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four pending icons 9A are horizontally arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal sides of the display screen. there is Of the four suspend icons 9A, the third suspend icon 9A from the right changes to suspend by prefetching. Here, the specific image TG is displayed so as to be superimposed on the suspension icon 9A of the round image. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific target. Here, the specific image TG is a character image representing "heat". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

As shown in FIG. 110(B), when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a pending icon due to pending digestion is displayed on the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10) and the main display device 7. A shift move of 9A is performed. Specifically, the first pending (rightmost) pending icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L moves in the upper right direction, and after being framed out of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the main It is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the pending icon 9A is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moved to the upper right, and then draws a parabolic trajectory, as shown in FIG. 110(C). Move to the lower right direction to display the right sub-display device 10R.
is framed out from the lower side of the display screen 7a. That is, in this embodiment, the pending icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the second to fourth
The hold icon 9A corresponding to the hold is moved one place to the right (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first to third holds. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) the shift movement of the pending icon 9A (specific pending icon 9A) on which the specific image TG is superimposed. Therefore, the specific image TG is continuously displayed overlapping the same pending icon 9A (specific pending icon 9A). This specific pending icon 9A becomes the second pending pending icon 9A through shift movement.

As shown in FIG. 110(D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed at a position below and close to the overlapping pending icon 9A (specific pending icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have a larger character "Heat" or a different shape. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols are variably displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 110(E) , when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10) and the main display device 7 display the The shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed again. Specifically, the first pending (rightmost) pending icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L moves in the upper right direction, and after being framed out of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the main It is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the pending icon frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right direction, then draws a parabolic trajectory, moves to the lower right direction, and moves to the right sub-display device. Above 10R, the frame is framed out from the lower side of the display screen 7a. That is, in this embodiment, the pending icon is not displayed. Left sub-display device 10L
2, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the second and third holds are moved to the right by one (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) the shift movement of the upper specific pending icon 9A. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific pending icon 9A does not change before and after the shift movement. This specific pending icon 9A becomes the first pending pending icon 9A through shift movement.

After that, the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the sub-display device 10 (
On the left sub-display device 10) and the main display device 7, the pending icon 9 due to pending digestion
A's shift movement is performed again. Specifically, the first pending (rightmost) specific pending icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L moves to the upper right to become the pending state, and is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L. After being framed out from the screen, it is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 . On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific hold icon 9
A enters the frame from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right, then moves to the lower right along a parabolic trajectory, and moves from the lower side of the display screen 7a to the upper side of the right sub-display device 10R. frame out. At this time, the specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) the movement of the specific pending icon 9A. Specifically, the specific image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 after being framed out from the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L in accordance with the movement of the specific pending icon 9A. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific image TG enters the frame from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right direction, then draws a parabolic trajectory and moves to the lower right direction, and then moves to the right sub-display device. Above 10R, the frame is framed out from the lower side of the display screen 7a. As a result, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific pending icon 9A does not change during the movement of the specific pending icon 9A (always the specific pending icon 9A
below).

As shown in FIG. 110(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a variable display corresponding to the specific pending icon 9A is performed. On the left sub-display device 10L, the number of pending is 1 due to the completion of pending, and one pending icon 9A is displayed. A specific image TG represented by "Heat" enters the frame from the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and moves upward.
That is, the specific image TG is framed again from the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 from which the specific pending icon 9A once framed out. Then, as shown in FIG. 110(I), the specific image TG stops near the bottom right of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG. After that, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are "3".
A reach that is temporarily stopped at is formed. That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that the expectation of the big win is high in the variation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9A. After that, as shown in FIG. 110(J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Holding icon interlocking effect D]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon-linked effect D. FIG. In the pending icon-linked effect D, first, as shown in FIG.
L and the right sub-display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. On the left sub-display device 10L, four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, a description will be given of a pending icon interlocking effect in which a specific image displayed for a specific pending icon, which is one of the four pending icons 9A, is moved in conjunction with the specific pending icon. In this embodiment, of the four pending icons 9A in FIG. 110A, the third pending icon from the right will be described as the specific pending icon. Here, among the four pending icons 9A, the pending icon that undergoes a predetermined pending change is called a specific pending icon. The pending icon 9C is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

As shown in FIG. 111(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four pending icons 9A are horizontally arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal sides of the display screen. there is Of the four suspension icons 9A, the third suspension icon 9A from the right changes to suspension by prefetching. Here, the specific image TG is displayed so as to be superimposed on the round image pending icon 9A. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific target. Here, the specific image TG is a character image representing "heat". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

As shown in FIG. 111(B), when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, on the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10) and the main display device 7, a pending icon due to pending digestion A shift move of 9A is performed. Specifically, the pending icon 9C on the right sub-display device 10R disappears. The first pending (rightmost) pending icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L moves to the upper right direction, and the left sub-display device 10
After being framed out from the display screen of L, it is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 . On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the pending icon 9A is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right direction, and then draws a parabolic trajectory and is shown in FIG.
As shown in , the display screen 7a moves downward to the right, and the display screen 7a is displayed above the right sub-display device 10R.
frame out from the bottom side of the Then, it is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is framed in from the upper side of the display screen, moved downward, stopped at a predetermined position as shown in FIG. It becomes icon 9C. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th holds are moved rightward by one (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd holds. The specific image TG is the pending icon 9 on which the specific image TG is superimposed.
It moves (in conjunction with) the shift movement of A (the specific hold icon 9A). Therefore, the specific image TG is continuously displayed overlapping the same pending icon 9A (specific pending icon 9A). This specific hold icon 9A is changed to the hold icon 9 of the second hold by shift movement.
Become A.

As shown in FIG. 111(D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed at a position below and close to the overlapping pending icon 9A (specific pending icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have a larger character "Heat" or a different shape. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols are variably displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 111(E) , when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub-display device 10 (left sub-display device 10) and the main display device 7 display the The shift movement of the hold icon 9A is performed again. Specifically, the pending icon 9C on the right sub-display device 10R disappears. The first pending (rightmost) pending icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L moves to the upper right direction, and after being framed out of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, is displayed on the main display device 7. displayed on the screen 7a. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the pending icon frames in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right direction, then draws a parabolic trajectory, moves to the lower right direction, and moves to the right sub-display device. Above 10R, the frame is framed out from the lower side of the display screen 7a. Then, the right sub-display device 10
It is displayed on the R display screen. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the pending icon 9
A enters the frame from the upper side of the display screen, moves downward, stops at a predetermined position, and becomes the pending icon 9C. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the second and third holds are moved rightward by one (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The specific image TG moves (in conjunction with) the shift movement of the upper specific pending icon 9A. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific pending icon 9A does not change before and after the shift movement. This specific pending icon 9A becomes the first pending pending icon 9A through shift movement.

After that, the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the sub-display device 10 (
On the left sub-display device 10) and the main display device 7, the pending icon 9 due to pending digestion
A's shift movement is performed again. Specifically, the pending icon 9C on the right sub-display device 10R disappears. The first pending (rightmost) specific pending icon 9A displayed on the left sub-display device 10L moves to the upper right direction and frames out of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L in order to become the pending state. After that, it is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 . On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific pending icon 9A is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right direction, then draws a parabolic trajectory and moves to the lower right direction,
Above the right sub display device 10R, the frame is framed out from the lower side of the display screen 7a. Then, it is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the pending icon 9A enters the frame from the upper side of the display screen, moves downward, stops at a predetermined position, and becomes the pending icon 9C. At this time, the specific image TG is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 after the specific pending icon 9A is framed out of the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. That is, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific pending icon 9A is not linked on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 111(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a variable display corresponding to the specific pending icon 9A is performed. On the left sub-display device 10L, the number of pending is 1 due to the completion of pending, and one pending icon 9A is displayed. A specific image TG represented by "Heat" enters the frame from the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and moves upward.
That is, the specific image TG is framed again from the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 from which the specific pending icon 9A once framed out. Then, as shown in FIG. 111(I), the specific image TG stops near the bottom right of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG. After that, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are "3".
A reach that is temporarily stopped at is formed. That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that the expectation of the big win is high in the variation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9A. After that, as shown in FIG. 111(J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending icon interlocking effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the left sub-display device 10L
and a specific image TG for a specific pending icon, which is one of the pending icons displayed on the left sub-display device 10L.
and a third effect in which a specific image TG is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R after the specific pending icon disappears from the left sub-display device 10L. According to these configurations, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. A second effect in which a specific image TG is displayed for a specific pending icon, which is one of the pending icons displayed in the main display after the specific pending icon disappears from the left sub-display device 10L. a third effect in which the specific image TG is displayed on the display device 7;
can be executed. According to these configurations, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, in the second effect, after the specific image TG is displayed on the left sub-display device 10L, the movement of the specific pending icon is interlocked. to move the specific image TG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, in the second effect, after the specific image TG is displayed overlapping the specific hold icon 9A, the display position of the specific image TG is changed to It changes and appears in close proximity to a specific hold icon. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 108, in the third effect, after the specific pending icon 9A disappears from the left sub-display device 10L, the specific pending icon 9A appears on the right sub-display device 10R. After being displayed and disappearing from the right sub-display device 10R, the right sub-display device 10R
, the specific image TG is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109, 110, and 111, in the third effect, after the specific pending icon 9A disappears from the left sub-display device 10L, the main display device 7, the specific pending icon 9A is displayed, and after disappearing from the main display device 7, the specific image TG is displayed on the main display device 7. FIG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 108, in the third effect, when the specific pending icon 9A is put on hold, the left sub-display device 10L changes to the right sub-display device 1.
After moving to 0R, moving to the right sub-display device 10R, moving toward the outside of the right sub-display device 10R, it disappears from the right sub-display device 10R. A specific image TG appears from the disappeared position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109, 110, and 111,
In the third effect, when the specific pending icon 9A becomes the relevant pending, the left sub-display device 10L
to the main display device 7, and after moving to the main display device 7, it disappears from the main display device 7 by moving toward the outside of the main display device 7. A specific image TG appears from the disappeared position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, the specific image T
G suggests information related to the expectation of the winning lottery corresponding to the specific pending icon 9A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the pending icon interlocking effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the holding icon-linked effects A to D, the specific image TG represents "heat". However, the specific image TG may be a character image other than "heat". For example, the specific image TG may be "no way", "chance", or "extreme heat". Then, depending on the contents of the characters, the degree of expectation of the winning lottery corresponding to the specific pending icon may be changed. In other words, depending on the contents of the characters, it may be possible to suggest a difference in the degree of expectation.

[Modification 2]
In the pending icon interlocking production A to D, the holding icon 9A corresponding to the special figure 1 was illustrated, but the holding icon interlocking production may be the holding icon 9B corresponding to the special figure 2. Moreover, both the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9B may perform the above effects.

[Modification 3]
In the suspension icon interlocking effects A to D, the suspension icon 9A does not change its orientation when moved. However, in the pending icon interlocking effect, the pending icon 9A may change its direction when it is moved. For example, the hold icon 9A may move while rotating. Also, the hold icon 9A may change in size or blink when moved.

[Modification 4]
In the pending icon interlocking effects A to D, when the pending icon 9A is moved, the portion that maintains the display may not maintain the display, and the portion that does not maintain the display may maintain the display. may

[Modification 5]
In the pending icon-linked effects A to D, the pending icon 9A may be displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub-display device 10. FIG. The specific image TG may also be displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 .

[Modification 6]
The contents of the pending icon-linked effects A to D may be combined as appropriate. Further, the pending icon-linked effects A to D may not include some of the described effects, or may be added with other effects.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B5-1]
a first display means capable of displaying an image;
A gaming machine comprising second display means capable of displaying an image,
a first effect in which a pending icon is displayed on the first display means;
a second effect in which a specific image is displayed for a specific pending icon, which is one of the pending icons displayed on the first display means;
A third effect in which the specific image is displayed on the second display means after the specific pending icon disappears from the first display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
In the second effect, after the specific image is displayed on the first display means, the specific image moves in conjunction with the movement of the specific pending icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B5-1 or aspect B5-2,
In the second effect, after the specific image is displayed overlapping the specific pending icon,
The display position of the specific image changes and is displayed at a position close to the specific hold icon,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3,
In the third effect, after the specific pending icon disappears from the first display means, the specific pending icon is displayed on the second display means, and after disappearing from the second display means,
the specific image is displayed on the second display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-4,
In the third effect, when the specific pending icon becomes the pending, it moves from the first display means to the second display means, and after moving to the second display means, the second disappears from the second display means by moving toward the outside of the display means, and the specific image appears from the position where the specific hold icon disappears in the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-5,
The specific image suggests information related to the expectation of the winning lottery corresponding to the specific pending icon,
A gaming machine characterized by:

112 to 115, the suspension change suggesting effects A to D will be described below. This pending change suggestive effect can be executed during a variable effect of decorative symbols (for example, during a pseudo-continuous effect). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the pending change suggesting image effect is included, the ROM 1
03 to display the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screens of a and the sub-display device 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R).

[Pending Change Suggestion Effect A]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the pending change suggestion effect A. FIG. In pending change suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 112(A), sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 3 is exemplified. Also, the color of the three suspension icons 9A and the suspension icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappears once, and the pending icon 9 is displayed.
A first pending change suggestion image HG1 suggesting the possibility of a pending change of C is displayed. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 includes an ally character CRA, which is an image representing an ally character, and an enemy character CRB, which is an image representing an enemy character. The enemy character CRA includes an image suggesting a mode after the suspension change of the suspension icon 9C. In this embodiment, the entire enemy character CRA is "red" to suggest the color of the suspension icon 9C after the suspension change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112C, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the teammate character CRA performs a predetermined effect (action). Here, allied character CR
A makes a motion of throwing a ball BG at the enemy character CRB. A ball BG, which is an image representing a ball, is included in the first pending change suggesting image HG1. Next, FIG. 112 (D
), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA to the enemy character CRB hits the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a second hold change suggesting image HG2 that suggests the possibility of a hold change of the hold icon 9C is displayed. The second pending change suggesting image HG2 is an image suggesting that the pending change of the pending icon 9C will be executed. Specifically, an image representing that the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB and damages the enemy character CRA is displayed. That is, an image representing that the predetermined effect has succeeded is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the enemy character CRB makes a regretful action after being damaged. Here, a character image is displayed that represents the words of the enemy character CRB, "I was killed!". Next, FIG. 112 (
As shown in G), the enemy character CRB is displayed so as to move downward from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the hold icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R while slightly rotating counterclockwise. be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(H), the enemy character CRB is displayed so as to move from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The enemy character CRB is displayed across the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. Next, as shown in FIG. 112(I), on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R, the enemy character CRB collides with the pending icon 9C, causing the pending icon 9C to appear.
Hold change. Specifically, the hold icon 9C changes from "white" to the enemy character CR
It changes to "red" which is the color of B. Next, as shown in FIG. 112(J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the second pending change suggesting image HG2 disappears.

[Pending Change Suggestion Effect B]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining pending change suggestion effect B. FIG. In pending change suggestion effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 113(A), sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 3 is exemplified. Also, the color of the three suspension icons 9A and the suspension icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappears once, and the pending icon 9 is displayed.
A first pending change suggestion image HG1 suggesting the possibility of a pending change of C is displayed. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 includes an ally character CRA, which is an image representing an ally character, and an enemy character CRB, which is an image representing an enemy character. The enemy character CRA includes an image suggesting a mode after the suspension change of the suspension icon 9C. In this embodiment, the entire enemy character CRA is "red" to suggest the color of the suspension icon 9C after the suspension change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113C, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the teammate character CRA performs a predetermined effect (action). Here, allied character CR
A makes a motion of throwing a ball BG at the enemy character CRB. A ball BG, which is an image representing a ball, is included in the first pending change suggesting image HG1. Next, FIG. 113 (D
), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA to the enemy character CRB hits the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a second hold change suggestion image HG2 that suggests the possibility of a hold change of the hold icon 9C is displayed. The second pending change suggesting image HG2 is an image suggesting that the pending change of the pending icon 9C is not executed. Specifically, the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, but an image is displayed showing that the ball BG bounces off the enemy character CRA. That is, an image representing that the predetermined effect has failed is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the enemy character CRB is damaged and makes a regretful action. Here, a character image representing the line "Kikanuwa!" of the enemy character CRB is displayed. Next, FIG. 113 (
G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the second pending change suggestion image H
The display of G2 disappears.

[Pending Change Suggestion Effect C]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the pending change suggestion effect C. FIG. In pending change suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 114(A), sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 3 is exemplified. Also, the color of the three suspension icons 9A and the suspension icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappears once, and the pending icon 9 is displayed.
A first pending change suggestion image HG1 suggesting the possibility of a pending change of C is displayed. The first pending change suggesting image HG1 includes a teammate character CRA, which is an image representing a teammate character, and a ball BG, which is an image representing a ball. The ball BG includes an image suggesting a mode after the suspension change of the suspension icon 9C. In this embodiment, the entire ball BG is "red" to suggest the color of the hold icon 9C after the hold change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114C, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the teammate character CRA performs a predetermined effect (action). Here, allied character CR
A makes an action like throwing the ball BG. Next, as shown in FIG. 114(D), the ball BG thrown by the teammate character CRA flies toward the left sub-display device 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 114(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ball BG thrown by the teammate character CRA hits the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a second hold change suggestion image HG2 that suggests the possibility of a hold change of the hold icon 9C is displayed. The second pending change suggesting image HG2 is an image suggesting that the pending change of the pending icon 9C will be executed. Specifically, the ball BG thrown by the teammate character CRA jumps into the left sub-display device 10L and moves toward the second hold icon 9A from the right among the three hold icons 9A. It is displayed across the display screen 7a of the display device 7 and the left sub-display device 10L. That is, an image representing that the predetermined effect has succeeded is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(G), the ball BG thrown by the teammate character CRA collides with the second hold icon 9A from the right among the three hold icons 9A on the left sub-display device 10L, and the hold icon 9A is displayed. The icon 9A changes pending. Specifically, the pending icon 9A changes from "white" to "red" which is the same color as the ball BG. Next, as shown in FIG. 114(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the teammate character CRA makes a happy action. Here, a character image is displayed that represents the line of the ally character CRA saying "I did it!". Next, as shown in FIG. 114(I), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the second pending change suggesting image HG2 disappears.

[Holding Change Suggestion Effect D]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the pending change suggestion effect D. FIG. In pending change suggestion effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 115(A), sub-display devices 10 (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, and the pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C represent the appearance of a particular object. Here, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a circular shape representing the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the state in which the special figure 1 pending number is 3 is exemplified. Also, the color of the three suspension icons 9A and the suspension icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappears once, and the pending icon 9 is displayed.
A first pending change suggestion image HG1 that suggests the possibility of a pending change of C is displayed. The first pending change suggesting image HG1 includes a teammate character CRA, which is an image representing a teammate character, and a ball BG, which is an image representing a ball. The ball BG includes an image suggesting a mode after the suspension change of the suspension icon 9C. In this embodiment, the entire ball BG is "red" to suggest the color of the hold icon 9C after the hold change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the teammate character CRA performs a predetermined effect (action). Here, allied character CR
A makes an action like throwing the ball BG. Next, as shown in FIG. 115(D), the ball BG thrown by the teammate character CRA flies toward the left sub-display device 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 115(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ball BG thrown by the teammate character CRA hits the left sub-display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a second hold change suggestion image HG2 that suggests the possibility of a hold change of the hold icon 9C is displayed. The second pending change suggesting image HG2 is an image suggesting that the pending change of the pending icon 9C is not executed. Specifically, the ball BG thrown by the teammate character CRA hits the left sub-display device 10L, but an image is displayed showing that the ball BG bounces back. That is, an image representing that the predetermined effect has failed is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the teammate character CRA makes a regrettable action. Here, a character image representing the line "No!" of the ally character CRA is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 115(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the second pending change suggesting image HG2 disappears.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the pending change suggestive image rendering will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the left sub-display device 10
A first effect in which the pending icon 9A (the relevant pending icon 9C) is displayed on L (the right sub-display device 10R), and after the first display effect, the pending change of the pending icon 9A (the relevant pending icon 9C). and a second effect in which a first pending change suggesting image HG1 suggesting a possibility is displayed. Then, the first hold change suggesting image HG1 includes, at least in part, an image suggesting the mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, after the second effect, a first hold change suggestion that suggests the possibility of a hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) A third effect can be executed in which a second pending change suggesting image HG2 different from the image HG1 is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the second pending change suggesting image HG2 at least partially suggests the mode after the pending change of the pending icon 9A (the pending icon 9C). contains images that According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 114, the second pending change suggesting image HG2 is an image suggesting that the pending change of the pending icon 9A (the relevant pending icon 9C) will be executed. be. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 114, in the third effect, at least part of the second hold change suggesting image HG2 is displayed as the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C). Display to move toward the position where you are. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 114, after the third effect, there is a fourth mode that changes the pending icon 9A (the pending icon 9C) from the first mode to the second mode.
can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained,
Interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 and 115, the second pending change suggestion image HG2 is an image suggesting that the pending change of the pending icon 9A (the pending icon 9C) is not executed. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the pending change suggesting image rendering will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
112 to 115, the first pending change suggesting image HG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The information may be displayed on the device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R, other display devices, or the like. Also, the display may be made across a plurality of display devices.
[Modification 2]
112 to 115, a part of the first hold change suggesting image HG1 is an image (enemy character CRB, ball BG) suggesting the state after the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C). However, the entire first hold change suggesting image HG1 may be an image suggesting the mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C).
[Modification 3]
112 to 115, a part of the second hold change suggesting image HG2 is an image (enemy character CRB, ball BG) suggesting the state after the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C). However, the whole of the second suspension change suggesting image HG2 may be an image suggesting the state after the suspension change of the suspension icon 9A (the suspension icon 9C).
[Modification 4]
112 to 115, the first hold change suggesting image HG1 and the second hold change suggesting image HG2 are continuously displayed. After disappears, the second pending change suggesting image HG2 may be displayed.
[Modification 5]
112 to 115, the first hold change suggesting image HG1 and the second hold change suggesting image HG2 are related images. The image may be completely unrelated to the suggestive image HG2.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B6-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
a first effect in which a pending icon is displayed on the display means;
After the first display effect, a second effect in which a first pending change suggesting image that suggests the possibility of a pending change of the pending icon is displayed, and
The first hold change suggesting image includes, at least in part, an image suggesting a state after the hold change of the hold icon,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1,
After the second effect, a third effect can be executed in which a second pending change suggesting image different from the first pending change suggesting image is displayed, suggesting the possibility of the pending change of the pending icon. is
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-2,
The second hold change suggesting image includes, at least in part, an image suggesting the state of the hold icon after the hold change,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B6-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect B6-2 or aspect B6-3,
The second pending change suggesting image is an image suggesting that the pending change of the pending icon is to be performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-4,
In the third effect, displaying at least part of the second pending change suggesting image so as to move toward the position where the pending icon is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B6-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-4 or aspect B6-5,
After the third effect, a fourth effect of changing the hold icon from the first mode to the second mode
It is possible to perform the production of
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B6-7]
A gaming machine according to aspect B6-2 or aspect B6-3,
The second pending change suggesting image is an image suggesting that the pending change of the pending icon is not executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

116 to 119, decorative pattern display mode effects A to D will be described below. This decorative symbol display mode effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols, during a jackpot game, or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the pending change suggesting image effect is included, the ROM 1
03 to display the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screens of a and the sub-display device 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R).

[Decorative pattern display mode production A]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display mode effect A. FIG. In the decorative pattern display mode effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 116(A), the second movable accessory 15 is positioned at the retracted position (home position). Display screen 7a of main display device 7 during jackpot game
, the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are
They are displayed side by side along a horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. The number of times (number of times of variation) of the decorative symbol variation effect during this jackpot game is the 99th time. Next, as shown in FIG. 116(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are confirmed and stopped in a failing manner. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along a horizontal line LN1. As a result, the 99th decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are used to create a decorative design variation effect (variation display).
is executed. The number of decorative pattern fluctuation effects (number of fluctuations) during this jackpot game is 10
It is the 0th time. Next, as shown in FIG. 116(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are confirmed and stopped in a manner of losing. As a result, the 100th decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game ends.
That is, the number of fluctuations during the jackpot game reaches 100 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(E), when the number of variations during the jackpot game reaches 100, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C.
and the display of the right decorative pattern 8R disappears once. Next, as shown in FIG. 116(F), the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Then, as shown in FIG. Next, as shown in FIG. 116(G), the second movable accessory 15 stops at the advanced position (deployed position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 . Next, as shown in FIG. 116(H), the second movable accessory 15 rotates to the left at the advanced position and stops at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(I), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern are displayed again. A decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. The number of times (number of times of variation) of the decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game is the 101st time. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side under the second movable accessory 15. - 特許庁The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side while being inclined at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15 from the horizontal direction. Left decorative pattern 8L
and the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are inclined lines L inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.
They are displayed side by side along N2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are determined and stopped in a failing manner. As a result, the 101st decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game ends. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side under the second movable accessory 15. - 特許庁The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are positioned second from the horizontal direction.
They are displayed side by side in a state of being tilted at the same angle as the movable accessory 15.例文帳に追加The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

[Decorative pattern display mode production B]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display mode effect B. FIG. In the decorative pattern display mode effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 117(A), the second movable accessory 15 is positioned at the retracted position (home position). Display screen 7a of main display device 7 during jackpot game
, the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are
They are displayed side by side along a horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. The number of times (number of times of variation) of the decorative symbol variation effect during this jackpot game is the 99th time. Next, as shown in FIG. 117(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are confirmed and stopped in a manner of losing. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along a horizontal line LN1. As a result, the 99th decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are used to create a decorative design variation effect (variation display).
is executed. The number of decorative pattern fluctuation effects (number of fluctuations) during this jackpot game is 10
It is the 0th time. Next, as shown in FIG. 117(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are confirmed and stopped in a manner of losing. As a result, the 100th decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game ends.
That is, the number of fluctuations during the jackpot game reaches 100 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(E), when the number of fluctuations during the jackpot game reaches 100 times, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C.
and the display of the right decorative pattern 8R disappears once. Next, as shown in FIG. 117(F), the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Then, as shown in FIG. Next, as shown in FIG. 117(G), the second movable accessory 15 stops at the advanced position (deployed position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 . Next, as shown in FIG. 117(H), the second movable accessory 15 rotates to the left at the advanced position and stops at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(I), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern are displayed again. A decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. The number of times (number of times of variation) of the decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game is the 101st time. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side under the second movable accessory 15. - 特許庁The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are each displayed horizontally. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are determined and stopped in a failing manner. As a result, the 101st decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game ends. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side under the second movable accessory 15. - 特許庁The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are each displayed horizontally. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

[Decorative pattern display mode production C]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display mode effect C. FIG. In the decorative pattern display mode production C, first, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the second movable accessory 15 is positioned at the retracted position (home position). Also, although not shown in FIG. 118(A), the first movable accessory 14 (left movable accessory 14L, right movable accessory 14R) is also at the retracted position (home position).
located in On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along a horizontal line LN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number (here, "7") to form a reach. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along a horizontal line LN1. next,
As shown in FIG. 118(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed at the timing just before the middle decorative design 8C that is changing is stopped. disappears once, and the button image BTN and the operation prompting image SSG are displayed. The operation prompting image SSG is a character image of "press", and prompts the player to perform an operation (pressing operation).

Next, when the player presses the production button 63, the left movable accessory 14L moves rightward toward the center of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, as shown in FIG. 118(D). Also, the right movable accessory 14R moves rightward toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. As shown in FIG. Together with these, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 . Next, as shown in FIG. 118(E), the left movable accessory 14
L and the right movable accessory 14R are united at the advanced position (deployed position) to form one logo, and stop so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. - 特許庁Also, the second
The movable accessory 15 stops at an advanced position (deployed position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG. Then, the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14 . In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are partially overlapped and combined to stand still. Next, as shown in FIG. 118(F), the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 rotate left at the advanced position, and stop in a state inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction. The tilt angle at this time is shown in FIGS. 116H and 117H.
is the same angle as the second movable accessory 15 of . Next, as shown in FIG. 118(G), the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 rotate right at the advanced position, return to the horizontal position, and stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(H), the left movable accessory 14L moves leftward from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Also, the right movable accessory 14R moves rightward from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Together with these, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Next, as shown in FIG. 118(I), the left movable accessory 14L returns to the retracted position and stops. Also, the right movable accessory 14R returns to the retracted position and stops. Also, the second
The movable accessory 15 returns to the retracted position and stops. Next, as shown in FIG. 118(J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed.
is the same number ("7" here). Left decorative pattern 8L
, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along a horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect D]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display mode effect D. FIG. In the decorative design display mode effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 119(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 during the jackpot game, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed. A decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed. At this time, as in FIG. 116(I), the second movable accessory 15 stops in a state of being inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction at the advanced position.
The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side under the second movable accessory 15. - 特許庁The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side while being inclined at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15 from the horizontal direction. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R have the same number (here, "7"). It is decided to stop in the form of a jackpot. At this time, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed side by side under the second movable accessory 15, as in FIG. 116(J). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side while being inclined at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15 from the horizontal direction. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(C), the display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 remains unchanged, and the first movable accessory 14 is displayed.
And the second movable accessory 15 rotates to the right at the advanced position, returns to the horizontal position and stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 119(D), the second movable accessory 15 returns to the retracted position and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(E), the left movable accessory 14L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.
Move to the right toward the center of the Also, the right movable accessory 14R moves rightward toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. As shown in FIG. Together with these, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 . Next, as shown in FIG. 119(F), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are combined at the advanced position (deployed position) to form one logo, and the display screen of the main display device 7 is displayed. Stop so as to cover the vicinity of the center of 7a. Also, the second movable accessory 15 stops at an advanced position (deployed position) near the center of the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 . Then, the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14 . In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are partially overlapped and combined to stand still. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(G), the first movable role product 14 and the second movable role product 15 rotate left at the advanced position and stop in a state inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction. The inclination angle at this time is the same as that of the second movable accessory 15 shown in FIGS. 119(A) and 119(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(H), the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 rotate right at the advanced position, return to the horizontal position, and stop. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(I), the left movable accessory 14L moves leftward from the advanced position toward the retracted position. again,
The right movable accessory 14R moves rightward from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Together with these, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Next, Fig. 11
As shown in 9(J), the left movable accessory 14L returns to the retracted position and stops. Also, the right movable accessory 14R returns to the retracted position and stops. Also, the second movable accessory 15 returns to the retracted position and stops.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern display mode production will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along the first direction (horizontal line L1). and a second display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along a second direction (inclined line LN2) different from the first direction. A display mode and a are executable. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display mode changes from the first display mode to the second display mode when a predetermined condition is satisfied. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the predetermined condition is that the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) in the jackpot game. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the second movable role 15 is arranged along the first direction (horizontal line LN1) in the first display mode, is arranged along the second direction (inclined line LN2) in the display mode of . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, when the jackpot is won, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are combined at the advanced position to move in the first direction (horizontal line LN1). ), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R in a combined state are rotated and arranged along the second direction (inclined line LN2). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, when the jackpot is won, the second movable accessory 15 moves in the same direction as the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. placed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative pattern display mode production will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern display mode effects A to C of FIGS. 116 to 118, in the first display mode, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are in the first direction (horizontal direction, horizontal line L1). , the first direction is not limited to the horizontal direction and may be any direction.
[Modification 2]
116, 117, and 119, in the decorative design display mode effects A, B, and D, in the second display mode, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are arranged in the first direction (horizontal direction). , along a slanted line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal line LN1), but the second direction is not limited to such a direction, and is different from the first direction. It can be in any direction.
[Modification 3]
116, 117, and 119, in the decorative design display mode effects A, B, and D, in the second display mode, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are arranged in the first direction (horizontal direction). , along a slanted line LN2 which is slanted at a predetermined angle from the horizontal line LN1), but the slanted angle of the slanted line LN2 can be freely set.
[Modification 4]
In the decorative symbol display mode effects A and B in FIGS. 116 and 117, the predetermined condition for changing from the first display mode to the second display mode is that the number of fluctuations in the jackpot game is a predetermined number (for example, 10
0 times), but the predetermined condition is not limited to this and can be arbitrarily set.
[Modification 5]
In the decorative pattern display mode production of FIGS. 116 to 119, it is arranged along the first direction (horizontal line LN1) in the first display mode, and in the second direction (tilt line LN2) in the second display mode The movable part placed along the first movable part 1 is the second movable part 15 .
4 (left movable accessory 14L, right movable accessory 14R) or other movable accessories.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
A first display mode in which a plurality of said decorative patterns are displayed side by side along a first direction, and a plurality of said decorative patterns are displayed side by side along a second direction different from said first direction. and
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the display mode changes from the first display mode to the second display mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-2,
The predetermined condition is that the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number in the jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
further comprising a first movable accessory configured to be movable,
The first movable accessory is arranged along the first direction in the first display mode, and arranged along the second direction in the second display mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-4,
a second movable accessory configured to be movable;
a third movable accessory configured to be movable,
When the jackpot is won, the second movable accessory and the third movable accessory are combined at a predetermined position and arranged along the first direction, and then the second movable accessory in the combined state is arranged. the role object and the third movable role object are rotated and arranged along the second direction;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-5,
When the jackpot is won, the first movable role is arranged along the same direction as the second movable role and the third movable role.
A gaming machine characterized by:

120 to 123, the decorative symbol variation effects A to D will be described below. This decorative design variation effect can be executed during the decorative design variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the character display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. , the left sub-display device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R, the illumination panel 18, and the like. Note that the illumination panel 18
is a transparent display panel, which is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10 . This decorative pattern variation production is a production that performs a variation production different from the normal variation production of decorative patterns. In the normal variation effect of decorative patterns, the decorative patterns fluctuate downward.

[Decorative pattern variation effect A]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect A. FIG. In the decorative symbol variation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 120(A), the effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation is performed. In this effect before the start of the decorative pattern variation, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation pre-start effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(B), a left decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this left decorative design variation start performance, the decorative design 8L moves from the variation start position to the right where the decorative design 8C is located, and fluctuates so as to collide with (contact with) the decorative design 8C. In this case, the decorative pattern 8L temporarily stops at that place after colliding with the decorative pattern 8C. note that,
The reserved icon 9A is reduced by one when the decorative pattern starts to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(C), a middle decorative design variation start effect is performed. In this intermediate decorative design variation start performance, the decorative design 8C moves from the variation start position to the right where the decorative design 8R is located, based on the fact that the decorative design 8L collides with (contacts with) the decorative design 8C. It is a production that fluctuates so as to hit (contact). In this case, the decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops at that place after colliding with the decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(D), a right decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this right decorative pattern variation start effect, the decorative pattern 8R fluctuates to move to the right when the decorative pattern 8C collides (contacts) with the decorative pattern 8R. In this case, the decorative pattern 8R temporarily stops at that place after moving rightward by a predetermined distance. Instead of temporarily stopping at that place, the robot may move in a predetermined direction (for example, leftward, which is the opposite direction to the direction in which it moved).

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(E), a failure display effect is performed. In this losing display effect, the temporarily stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the left decorative pattern fluctuation start effect, the middle decorative pattern change start effect, and the right decorative pattern change start effect are instantly converted into other patterns and confirmed. Perform stop display. In the example of the figure, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R which were the patterns of "5 6 7"
is converted to "2 3 4".

[Decorative pattern variation effect B]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect B. FIG. In the decorative symbol variation performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 121(A), the performance before the start of the decorative symbol variation is performed. In this effect before the start of the decorative pattern variation, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation pre-start effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(B), a left decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this left decorative pattern variation start performance, the decorative pattern 8L moves from the variation start position to the right direction where the decorative pattern 8C is present while rotating, and fluctuates so as to collide with (contact with) the decorative pattern 8C. In this case, the decorative pattern 8L temporarily stops at that place after colliding with the decorative pattern 8C. It should be noted that the reserved icon 9A is reduced by one when the decorative symbols start to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(C), a middle decorative design variation start effect is performed. In this middle decorative pattern variation start effect, the decorative pattern 8C moves from the variation start position to the right where the decorative pattern 8R is located while rotating, based on the fact that the decorative pattern 8L collides with (contacts with) the decorative pattern 8C. It is an effect that fluctuates so as to hit (contact) the decorative pattern 8R. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops at that place after colliding with the decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(D), a right decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this right decorative pattern variation start performance, the decorative pattern 8R is changed so as to rotate and move rightward based on the fact that the decorative pattern 8C collides (contacts) with the decorative pattern 8R. In this case, the decorative pattern 8R temporarily stops at that place after moving rightward by a predetermined distance. Instead of temporarily stopping at that place, the robot may move in a predetermined direction (for example, leftward, which is the opposite direction to the direction in which it moved).

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(E), a failure display effect is performed. In this losing display effect, the temporarily stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the left decorative pattern fluctuation start effect, the middle decorative pattern change start effect, and the right decorative pattern change start effect are instantly converted into other patterns and confirmed. Perform stop display. In the example of the figure, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R which were the patterns of "5 6 7"
is converted to "2 3 4".

[Decorative pattern variation effect C]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect C. FIG. In the decorative symbol variation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 122(A), the effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation is performed. In this effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation pre-start effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(B), a left decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this left decorative pattern variation start performance, the decorative pattern 8L moves from the variation start position to the right direction where the decorative pattern 8C is located while rotating, and fluctuates so as to collide (contact) with the decorative pattern 8C. In this case, after the decorative pattern 8L collides with the decorative pattern 8C, an explosion image ZD1 representing the explosion is displayed, and the decorative pattern 8L explodes and temporarily stops there. In addition, the hold icon 9A
is displayed with one decrease due to the start of variation of the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(C), a middle decorative design variation start effect is performed. In this middle decorative pattern variation start effect, the decorative pattern 8C moves from the variation start position to the right where the decorative pattern 8R is located while rotating, based on the fact that the decorative pattern 8L collides with (contacts with) the decorative pattern 8C. It is an effect that fluctuates so as to collide with (contact with) the decorative pattern 8R. In this case, after the decorative pattern 8C collides with the decorative pattern 8R, the explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and the decorative pattern 8C explodes and temporarily stops there.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(D), a right decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this right decorative pattern variation start performance, the decorative pattern 8R fluctuates while rotating rightward based on the fact that the decorative pattern 8C collides with (contacts with) the decorative pattern 8R. In this case, after the decorative pattern 8R moves rightward by a predetermined distance, the explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and the decoration pattern 8R explodes and temporarily stops there. Instead of temporarily stopping at that place, the robot may move in a predetermined direction (for example, leftward, which is the opposite direction to the direction in which it moved).

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(E), a failure display effect is performed. In this losing display effect, the temporarily stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the left decorative pattern fluctuation start effect, the middle decorative pattern change start effect, and the right decorative pattern change start effect are instantly converted into other patterns and confirmed. Perform stop display. In the example of the figure, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R which were the patterns of "5 6 7"
is converted to "2 3 4".

[Decorative pattern variation effect D]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect D. FIG. In the decorative symbol variation effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 123(A), the effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation is performed. In this effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation pre-start effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(B), a left decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this left decorative design variation start effect, the decorative design 8L is rotated at the variation start position, an explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and an effect is shown showing an explosion. It should be noted that the reserved icon 9A is reduced by one when the decorative symbols start to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(C), the left decorative pattern sublimation effect is performed. In this left decorative pattern sublimation effect, after the decorative pattern 8L explodes, it flies upward while rotating (moves).

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(D), a middle decorative design variation start effect is performed. In this intermediate decorative design variation start effect, the decorative design 8C rotates at the variation start position, an explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and it is an effect showing an explosion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(E), a middle decorative pattern sublimation effect is performed. In this middle decorative pattern sublimation effect, after the decorative pattern 8L explodes, it flies upward while rotating (moves).

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(F), a right decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this right decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8R rotates at the variation start position, an explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and it is an effect representing an explosion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(G), the right decorative symbol sublimation effect is performed. In this right decorative pattern sublimation effect, after the decorative pattern 8L explodes, it flies upward while rotating (moves).

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(F), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed stopped at the same pattern (7 patterns in the drawing), and the ready-to-win display is performed in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. The reach display represents a so-called reach state. In this ready-to-win effect, the character ARA performs various effects. In addition, it is not limited to the ready-to-win effect, and a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, and the like may be performed.

In the decorative symbol variation effects A to D, the same variation is performed from the left decorative symbol variation start effect to the ready-to-win effect. Note that these effects may be performed with different variations instead of the same variations. For example, the left decorative symbol variation start effect, the middle decorative symbol variation start effect, and the right decorative symbol variation start effect may be performed with different variations.

[Modification]
In the decorative pattern variation effect D, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are made to fly upward, but they may fly in directions different from the upward direction, or they may fly in different directions. You can say Also, in the decorative pattern variation effect D, the decorative patterns 8L, 8
The order in which C and 8R fly upwards was the order of decorative pattern 8L, decorative pattern 8C, and decorative pattern 8R, but is not limited to this, and various patterns such as decorative pattern 8C, decorative pattern 8R, and decorative pattern 8L. can be in that order.
In the above-mentioned decorative pattern variation effects A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are changed to different patterns after all the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped.
Not limited to this, when the decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped, it may be converted to a different design before the decorative design 8C is changed, and when the decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped, it is before the decorative design 8R is changed. It may be converted into a different design.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern variation effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the decorative design variation effect, the decorative design 8L moves in the direction of the decorative design 8C and the decorative design 8
By hitting C, the decorative pattern 8C starts to change. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a new variation pattern of decorative symbols, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the decorative design variation effect, the decorative design 8L moves in the direction of the decorative design 8C and the decorative design 8
It explodes when it hits C. According to this configuration, a strong impact can be given to the start of variation of the decorative symbols 8C, and the interest of the variation performance of the decorative symbols can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the decorative design variation effect, the decorative design 8L moves in the direction of the decorative design 8C and the decorative design 8
After the explosion when hitting C, the decorative pattern 8L different from before the explosion is stopped at the explosion position. According to this configuration, a strong impact can be given to stop the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, and the interest of the variation performance of the decorative symbols can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the decorative design variation effect, the display of the decorative design 8R is performed before the effect that the decorative designs 8L and 8C start to change, and the decorative design 8C collides with the decorative design 8R.
The effect of C starting to change is performed, the effect of starting the variation of the decorative pattern 8R is performed after the effect of the decorative pattern 8C colliding with the decorative pattern 8R, and the effect of starting the variation of the decorative pattern 8R The design 8C collides with the decorative design 8R in the effect that the decorative design 8C collides with the decorative design 8R. According to this configuration, a strong impact can be given to the start of variation of the decorative symbols 8R, and the interest of the variation performance of the decorative symbols can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above-mentioned decorative pattern variation effect, in the effect that the decorative pattern 8C collides with the decorative pattern 8R, the decorative pattern 8C explodes when it collides with the decorative pattern 8R. According to this configuration, a strong impact can be given to stop the variation of the decorative symbols 8R, and the interest of the variation performance of the decorative symbols can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZD-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a first decorative pattern,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying a second decorative pattern,
The third display effect is a effect in which the first decorative pattern starts to change,
The fourth display effect is a effect in which the first decorative pattern collides with the second decorative pattern,
The fifth display effect is a effect in which the second decorative pattern starts to change,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, and the fifth display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, the third display effect is performed after the first display effect and the second display effect,
After the third display effect, the fourth display effect is performed, after the fourth display effect, the fifth display effect is performed, and in the fifth display effect, the fourth display effect is performed. When the first decorative design collides with the second decorative design in the display effect, the second decorative design starts to change,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZD-2]
The gaming machine described in ZD-1,
In the combination effect, in the fourth display effect, the first decorative pattern explodes when it collides with the second decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZD-3]
The gaming machine described in ZD-2,
In the combination effect, in the fourth display effect, after the first decorative pattern explodes, a decorative pattern different from that before the explosion is stopped at the explosion position,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZD-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of ZD-1 to ZD-3,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects, and a seventh display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
An eighth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display effect is a effect of displaying a third decorative pattern,
The seventh display effect is a effect in which the second decorative pattern collides with the third decorative pattern,
The eighth display effect is a effect in which the third decorative pattern starts to change,
The combined effect includes the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, the fifth display effect, the sixth display effect, and the seventh display effect. and the eighth display effect,
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed before the third display effect and the fifth display effect, and the seventh display effect is performed after the fifth display effect. , the eighth display effect is performed after the seventh display effect, and in the eighth display effect, the second decorative pattern collides with the third decorative pattern in the seventh display effect. By this, the variation of the third decorative pattern is started,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZD-5]
A gaming machine according to ZD-4,
In the combination effect, in the seventh display effect, the second decorative pattern explodes when it collides with the third decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Note that the above aspect may be modified as follows.
○ The first decorative design collides with the second decorative design while rotating.
○Assuming that the direction in which the first decorative design collides with the second decorative design is the first direction, if the first decorative design moves in the second direction different from the first direction after the explosion, A predetermined effect (reach effect) is performed. In this case, it fluctuates in a direction different from that during normal fluctuation.

The pseudo continuous effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. FIG. Pseudo continuous performance A
1 to D are examples of different configurations of the temporary stop effect in the pseudo-continuation. This pseudo-continuous effect can be executed, for example, during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the pseudo-continuous effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the main display device is displayed. 7 and the display screen of the sub-display device 10 to display an image.

[Pseudo continuous performance A]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo continuous effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 124(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at retracted positions (home positions).
It is in. A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. there is on the other hand,
The pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(B), a combo rush effect is executed. In the combo rush effect, a message image "continuous combo rush" is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124(C), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by the line L1, "5" stops at the lower stage of the left production pattern 8L, and "5" is at the upper stage of the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R.
has stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124(D), a re-variation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation effect is a effect in which the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are shown to be variably displayed. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(E), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by the line L2, "8" stops at the upper stage of the left production pattern 8L and the middle production pattern 8C, and "8" stops at the lower stage of the right production pattern 8R.
has stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124(F), a re-variation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation effect is a effect in which the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are shown to be variably displayed. .
124 (F
) to FIG. 124(C), and the temporary stop effect and the re-fluctuation effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop production is different. In addition, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-fluctuation effect and the variation time from the re-variation effect to the temporary stop effect are shortened. Then, the shorter the interval time and the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation for a big win.

After a predetermined period of time has passed (when the continuous combo period ends), as shown in FIG. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 124(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big win) is a effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the arrangement of the big win on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "7"
is stopped at The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the finalization and stoppage of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Pseudo continuous performance B]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo continuous effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 125(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at retracted positions (home positions).
It is in. A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. there is on the other hand,
The pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(B), a combo rush effect is executed. In the combo rush effect, a message image "continuous combo rush" is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in FIG. 125(C), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by the line L1, "5" stops at the lower stage of the left production pattern 8L, and "5" is at the upper stage of the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R.
has stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 125(D), a re-variation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation production is a production in which the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R start to fluctuate again, and here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are shown to be variably displayed. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(E), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by the line L2, the special symbol "Speed Up" is stopped at the upper stage of the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C, and the special symbol "Speed Up" is stopped at the lower stage of the right effect symbol 8R. .
Next, as shown in FIG. 125(F), a re-variation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation production is a production in which the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R start to fluctuate again, and here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are shown to be variably displayed. .
125 (F
) to FIG. 125(C), and the temporary stop effect and the re-fluctuation effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop production is different. Also, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-fluctuation effect and the fluctuation time from the re-varying effect to the temporary stop effect are shortened by arranging the special symbol "Speed Up" on the predetermined line. and,
The shorter the interval time and fluctuation time, the higher the expectation for a big win.

After a predetermined time has passed (when the continuous combo period ends), as shown in FIG. 125(G), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 125(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big win) is a effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the arrangement of the big win on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "7"
is stopped at The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the finalization and stoppage of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Pseudo continuous performance C]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo continuous effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 126(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at retracted positions (home positions).
It is in. A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. there is on the other hand,
The pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(B), a combo rush effect is executed. In the combo rush effect, a message image "continuous combo rush" is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in FIG. 126(C), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped in the same combination of colors. Here, the left production pattern 8L is "
0", the middle production pattern 8C is "4", and the right production pattern 8R is "6", and these production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are all blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 126(D), a re-variation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation production is a production in which the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R start to fluctuate again, and here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are shown to be variably displayed. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(E), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped in the same combination of colors. Here, the left production pattern 8L is "
7", the middle production pattern 8C is "1", and the right production pattern 8R is "9", and these production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all red.
Next, as shown in FIG. 126(F), a re-variation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation production is a production in which the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R start to fluctuate again, and here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are shown to be variably displayed. .
126 (F
) to FIG. 126(C), the temporary stop effect and the re-fluctuation effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop production is different. In addition, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-fluctuation effect and the variation time from the re-variation effect to the temporary stop effect are shortened. It should be noted that the interval time and the variation time may be shortened when the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of a specific color (for example, red) are aligned. Then, the shorter the interval time and the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation for a big win.

After a predetermined time has passed (when the continuous combo period ends), as shown in FIG. 126(G), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 126(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big win) is a effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the arrangement of the big win on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "7"
is stopped at The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the finalization and stoppage of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Pseudo continuous performance D]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo continuous effect D. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 127(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at retracted positions (home positions).
It is in. A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. there is on the other hand,
The pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(B), a combo rush effect is executed. In the combo rush effect, a message image "continuous combo rush" is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in FIG. 127(C), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the middle effect pattern 8C is stopped with the special pattern "continue". Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "5", the middle effect symbol 8C is "continuation", and the right effect symbol 8R is "4".
Next, as shown in FIG. 127(D), a re-variation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation production is a production in which the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R start to fluctuate again, and here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are shown to be variably displayed. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(E), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the middle effect pattern 8C is stopped with the special pattern "continue". Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "8", the middle effect symbol 8C is "continuation", and the right effect symbol 8R is "2".
Next, as shown in FIG. 127(F), a re-variation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation effect is a effect in which the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are shown to be variably displayed. .
127 (F
) to FIG. 127(C), and the temporary stop effect and the re-fluctuation effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop production is different. In addition, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-fluctuation effect and the variation time from the re-variation effect to the temporary stop effect are shortened. Then, the shorter the interval time and the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation for a big win.

After a predetermined time has passed (when the continuous combo period ends), as shown in FIG. 127(G), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 127(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big win) is a effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the arrangement of the big win on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "7"
is stopped at The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the finalization and stoppage of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pseudo continuous effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when entering the continuous combo, the temporary stop effect and the re-variation effect are repeated until the period of the continuous combo ends (FIGS. 124(B) to (F), FIG. 125(B).
~ (F), Figures 126 (B) ~ (F), Figures 127 (B) ~ (F)). Moreover, the repetition time from the start of the fluctuation to the restart of the fluctuation after the temporary stop is shortened. According to this configuration, the pseudo-runs continue for a certain period of time, and the intervals between the repetitions of the pseudo-runs become shorter, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-fluctuation effect and the variation time from the re-variation effect to the temporary stop effect are shortened. According to this configuration, since the repetition interval of the pseudo-run becomes shorter, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the temporary stop effect, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in a predetermined arrangement (FIGS. 124(C)(F), 125(C)(F)). )).
According to this configuration, the repetition of the pseudo-run becomes easy to understand, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the special symbol is temporarily stopped in the temporary stop effect is exemplified (FIGS. 125(E), 127(C) and (E)). According to this configuration, the repetition of the pseudo-run becomes easy to understand, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the temporary stop effect, the repetition time is shortened by temporarily stopping the special symbol (FIG. 125(E)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the change in the repetition time, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the shorter the repetition time, the higher the expectation for a big win. According to this configuration, the repetition of the pseudo-run becomes interesting, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Modification]
A modified example of the pseudo-continuous effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, the configuration for shortening the repetition time of pseudo-runs that are repeated in a predetermined period has been described, but the configuration may be such that the repetition time for pseudo-runs is lengthened. Alternatively, it may be configured to be longer and shorter.

[Modification 2]
In the above, both the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-fluctuation effect and the variation time from the re-variation effect to the temporary stop effect are both shortened, but at least one of the interval time and the variation time is shortened. It may be a configuration that goes on.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
A game machine capable of executing a repeated pseudo-continuous performance in which a pseudo-continuous performance in which a performance symbol that has started to change temporarily stops and starts to change again is repeated in a predetermined period,
The repetitive pseudo-continuous performance is a performance in which a repetition time from the start of variation of the performance symbols to the start of variation again after the temporary stop changes within the predetermined period.

[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1,
The repetitive pseudo-continuous performance includes a variation time, which is the time from the start of the variation to the temporary stop, and the time from the temporary stop to the start of the variation, which constitutes the repetition time. A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the interval times is an effect that changes.

[Aspect C3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the repetitive pseudo-continuous effect, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in a predetermined arrangement.

[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-3,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the repetitive pseudo-continuous effect, a special symbol among the effect symbols may be temporarily stopped.

[Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the repetitive pseudo-continuous effect, the repetitive time is changed by temporarily stopping the special symbols.

[Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-5,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the repetitive pseudo-continuous effect, the greater the change in the repetitive time, the greater the degree of expectation for a big win.

[Aspect C3-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-6,
The repetitive pseudo continuous effect is performed on the display screen of the first display device, and a pending image corresponding to the pending memory can be displayed on the display screen of a second display device different from the first display device. game machine.

128 to 131, decorative symbol facing effects A to D will be described below. This decorative symbol facing effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the character display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. , the left sub-display device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R, the illumination panel 18, and the like. Note that the illumination panel 18
is a transparent display panel, which is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10 .

[Decorative pattern facing effect A]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol facing effect A. FIG. In the decorative symbol facing effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 128(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a.
Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9A,
9C is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(B), a decorative symbol low speed variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern low speed variation production, the decorative pattern 8L is changed at low speed (low speed movement) in the downward direction, and the decorative pattern 8C
, 8R is an effect of low-speed fluctuation (low-speed movement) in the upward direction. In this case, decorative patterns 8C, 8R
are lined up and slowly fluctuate upward at the same speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(C), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that have been fluctuating at low speed are stopped and displayed on the reach line LN. In the figure, the decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped at "7 patterns", and the decorative pattern 8
C is stop-displayed at "8 patterns", and decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed at "8 patterns". In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop displays of "7 8 8" and indicate chances (chance-up display) to increase the expectation of big wins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(D), a decorative pattern re-variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern re-fluctuation effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are again variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(E), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped in the same pattern (seven patterns), and the ready-to-win display showing the ready-to-win state in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates is performed. Also, in the reach production, the character CRZ
A predetermined action is performed by E on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(F), a big win symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern display performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as jackpot patterns on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When this jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by the character CRZE.

[Decorative pattern facing effect B]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol facing effect B. FIG. In the decorative symbol facing effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 129(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a.
Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9A,
9C is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(B), the decorative symbol low speed variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern low speed variation production, the decorative pattern 8L is changed at low speed (low speed movement) in the downward direction, and the decorative pattern 8C
, 8R is an effect of low-speed fluctuation (low-speed movement) in the upward direction. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates upward at a lower speed than the decorative pattern 8R. In addition, it is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern 8
The R may be changed upward at a lower speed than the decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(C), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that have been fluctuating at low speed are stopped and displayed on the reach line LN. In the figure, the decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped at "7 patterns", and the decorative pattern 8
C is stop-displayed at "8 patterns", and decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed at "8 patterns". In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop displays of "7 8 8" and indicate chances (chance-up display) to increase the expectation of big wins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(D), a decorative pattern re-variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern re-fluctuation effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are again variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(E), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped in the same pattern (seven patterns), and the ready-to-win display showing the ready-to-win state in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates is performed. Also, in the reach production, the character CRZ
A predetermined action is performed by E on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(F), a big hit symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed as jackpot patterns on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When this jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by the character CRZE.

[Decorative pattern facing effect C]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol facing effect C. FIG. In the decorative symbol facing effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 130(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a.
Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9A,
9C is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(B), a decorative symbol low speed variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern low speed variation production, the decorative pattern 8L is changed at low speed (low speed movement) in the downward direction, and the decorative pattern 8C
, 8R is an effect of low-speed fluctuation (low-speed movement) in the upward direction. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates upward at a lower speed than the decorative pattern 8R. In addition, it is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern 8
The R may be changed upward at a lower speed than the decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(C), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop effect, the decorative patterns 8C and 8R which have been fluctuating at a low speed are stopped and displayed at a position different from the reach line LN. In this case, the decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN, and the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed side by side slightly above the reach line LN. In the figure, the decorative pattern 8L is stopped at "7 patterns", the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at "8 patterns", and the decorative pattern 8R is stopped at "8 patterns". In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C,
8R is a stop display of "7 8 8" and indicates a chance number (chance-up display) to increase the expectation of a big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(D), a decorative pattern re-variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern re-fluctuation effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are again variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(E), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped in the same pattern (seven patterns), and the ready-to-win display showing the ready-to-win state in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates is performed. Also, in the reach production, the character CRZ
A predetermined action is performed by E on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(F), a big hit symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern display performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as jackpot patterns on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When this jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by the character CRZE.

[Decorative pattern facing effect D]
FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol facing effect D. FIG. In the decorative symbol facing effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 131(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.
Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9A,
9C is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(B), a decorative symbol low speed variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern low speed variation production, the decorative pattern 8L is changed at low speed (low speed movement) in the downward direction, and the decorative pattern 8C
, 8R is an effect of low-speed fluctuation (low-speed movement) in the upward direction. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates upward at a lower speed than the decorative pattern 8R. In addition, it is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern 8
The R may be changed upward at a lower speed than the decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(C), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop effect, the decorative patterns 8C and 8R which have been fluctuating at a low speed are stopped and displayed at a position different from the reach line LN. In this case, the decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed on the reach line LN, and the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are stop-displayed in parallel slightly above the reach line LN.
Further, in this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed in predetermined chance-up symbols. This chance-up pattern is a pattern that is not included in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are fluctuating during the decorative pattern variation performance, and this decorative pattern temporary stop performance. Sometimes, it is a pattern included in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. When this chance-up symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a so-called chance eye (chance-up display), indicating that the degree of expectation for a big win is increased. In the figure, the decorative pattern 8L is stopped at "7 patterns", the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at "8 patterns", and the decorative pattern 8R is stopped at "8 patterns".

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(D), a decorative pattern re-variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern re-fluctuation effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are again variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(E), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped in the same pattern (7 patterns), and the ready-to-win display is performed to represent the ready-to-win state in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates. Also, in the reach production, the character CRZ
A predetermined action is performed by E on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(F), a big win symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed as jackpot patterns on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When this jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by the character CRZE.

[Modification]
In the decorative pattern facing effect, the decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed downward, the decorative patterns 8C, 8R are variably displayed upward, and then the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stop-displayed. is repeated a plurality of times, and the greater the number of repetitions, the higher the expectation of a big win.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative symbol facing effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the above-mentioned decorative design facing effect, the decorative design 8L is variably displayed downward, the decorative design 8C is variably displayed upward, and then the decorative designs 8L and 8C are stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, since the variable performance is performed in which the decorative patterns move in opposite directions (opposite directions), the variable performance can be dynamically performed such that the decorative patterns move away from each other or approach each other in the variable performance. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the above-mentioned decorative symbol facing effect, the chance up display is performed according to the stop mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. According to this configuration, after the dynamic variation performance, the chance-up display advantageous to the player is performed, so that the decoration patterns can be continuously given interest to the player until the variation performance is stopped. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above decorative design facing effect, the decorative design 8L is variably displayed downward, the decorative designs 8C, 8R are variably displayed upward, and then the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are stop-displayed. According to this configuration, since the variable performance is performed in which the decorative patterns move in opposite directions (opposite directions), the variable performance can be dynamically performed such that the decorative patterns move away from each other or approach each other in the variable performance. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the decorative pattern facing effect, the decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed downward, and at that time, the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are variably displayed upward, but the moving speeds of the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are different. According to this configuration, the decorative patterns 8L and the decorative patterns 8C can perform a dynamic variation effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the decorative pattern facing effect, the decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed downward, the decorative patterns 8C, 8R are variably displayed upward, and then the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stop-displayed. is repeated a plurality of times, and the greater the number of repetitions, the higher the expectation of a big hit. According to this configuration, the more the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate, the more happy the player is, so the interest of the variable performance using the decorative patterns can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZE-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of variably displaying the first decorative pattern in a first direction,
The second display effect is a effect of variably displaying the second decorative pattern in a second direction opposite to the first direction,
The third display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZE-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZE-1,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, a chance up display is performed by a stop display mode including the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZE-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZE-1 or aspect ZE-2,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of variably displaying the third decorative pattern in the second direction,
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed while the first display effect and the second display effect are being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZE-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZE-3,
The second decorative pattern in the second display effect and the third decorative pattern in the fourth display effect have different moving speeds in the second direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZE-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZE-1 to ZE-4,
In the combined effect, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, and then the third display effect is performed. The more is, the higher the expected jackpot is,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Note that the above aspect may be modified as follows.
○ In the case of a big win, there is a case where a jackpot pattern arrangement including a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern is formed on a predetermined line. At least one of the decorative patterns is not stopped and displayed on a predetermined line.
○ In the third display effect, the first decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is a decorative pattern that is not included in the decorative patterns that are variably displayed during the first display effect.

132 to 135, the decorative symbol look-ahead display effects A to D will be described below.
This decorative symbol look-ahead display effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect (for example, during a pseudo continuous effect), during a jackpot game, or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 is connected to the sub-control board 9
0 is analyzed, and if it contains an instruction to execute a pending change suggesting image effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R).

[Decorative pattern look-ahead display effect A]
FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect A. FIG. In the decorative design look-ahead display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 132(A), the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. Here, the combination of the three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) capable of reporting hits and losses is also called "a set of decorative designs". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 132(A), four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the decorative symbol prefetch display effect is described in which prefetching is performed for the specific pending icon 9AZ, which is one of the four pending icons 9A, and the prefetch display effect is executed for the decorative symbol. In this embodiment, among the four pending icons 9A shown in FIG. 132(A),
The leftmost fourth suspension will be described as the specific suspension icon 9AZ. Here, among the pending icons 9A, the pending icon to be prefetched is called a specific pending icon 9AZ. Also, the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in the mode of failure "472". . The image representing the number "4" of the left decorative design 8L is "blue", the image representing the number "7" of the middle decorative design 8C is "red", and the image representing the number "2" of the right decorative design 8R is "blue". is. In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers "1" to "9", the numbers "1", "3", "5",
The images representing '7' and '9' are 'red' and the images representing the numbers '2', '4', '6' and '8' are 'blue'.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(C), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
, shift movement of the pending icon 9A is performed due to pending digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the display screen of 0L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th holds are moved one place to the right (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design are displayed. The temporary stop display is performed in the order of the pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the specific left decorative design 8LZ is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative design 8L by prefetching the specific reserved icon 9AZ of the third reservation. That is, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ representing the specific image is temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ. This specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is a smiling face image, and the whole is represented in "red". In addition, the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but characters, figures,
It also includes abstract items such as symbols and conceptual items whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. After the specific left decorative design 8LZ is temporarily stopped and displayed, the "red" images representing the numbers "3" and "5" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R as usual. In this way, during the fluctuation three times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ, three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8
R) are all “red” images, and one of them (the left decorative pattern 8
L) is stopped and displayed with a specific decoration pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(E), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
, shift movement of the pending icon 9A is performed due to pending digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the display screen of 0L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the second and third holds are moved one place to the right (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design are displayed. The temporary stop display is performed in the order of the pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, by prefetching the second reserved specific reserved icon 9AZ, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ, which represent the specific image, are temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ. This specific image is the same as that represented in the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ during the previous variation. Specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and specific middle decorative pattern 8C
After the temporary stop display of Z, the "red" image representing the number "1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern 8R as usual. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ, as a look-ahead effect, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are " It is a red image, and two of them (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C) are stop-displayed as specific decorative designs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(G), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
, shift movement of the pending icon 9A is performed due to pending digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the display screen of 0L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold is moved to the right by one (shifted) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the first hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design are displayed. The temporary stop display is performed in the order of the pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific reserved icon 9AZ of the first reserved, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific hold icon 9A
As a look-ahead effect during the variation one time before the variation corresponding to Z, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ, the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ, and the specific right decorative pattern 8RZ showing the specific image are temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is the same as that represented in the specific left decorative design 8LZ and the specific middle decorative design 8CZ during the previous variation. In this way, during the fluctuation one time before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ, as a look-ahead effect, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are " It is a "red" image, and is stopped and displayed with a specific decoration pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(I), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
, shift movement of the pending icon 9A is performed due to pending digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the display screen of 0L, the specific hold icon 9AZ corresponding to the first hold is shifted to display the specific hold icon 9CZ at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R.
Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are used to display the decorative design variation effect (variation display) corresponding to the particular reserved icon 9CZ that is the target of the prefetching. ) is executed

After that, as shown in FIG. 132(J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixed and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. Figure 132
(J) shows a state in which the fixed stop display is performed in the jackpot mode "777".
The above-described look-ahead effect suggests that the variation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AT has a higher chance of winning than usual.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead display effect B]
FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect B. FIG. In the decorative design look-ahead display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 133(A), the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. Here, the combination of the three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) capable of reporting hits and losses is also called "a set of decorative designs". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 133(A), four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, a decorative symbol prefetch display effect is described in which prefetching is performed for the specific pending icon 9AZ, which is one of the four pending icons 9A, and the prefetch display effect is executed on the decorative symbol. In this embodiment, among the four pending icons 9A shown in FIG. 133(A),
The leftmost fourth suspension will be described as the specific suspension icon 9AZ. Here, among the pending icons 9A, the pending icon to be prefetched is called a specific pending icon 9AZ. Also, the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a failing mode "472". . The image representing the number "4" of the left decorative design 8L is "blue", the image representing the number "7" of the middle decorative design 8C is "red", and the image representing the number "2" of the right decorative design 8R is "blue". is. In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers "1" to "9", the numbers "1", "3", "5",
The images representing '7' and '9' are 'red' and the images representing the numbers '2', '4', '6' and '8' are 'blue'.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(C), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
, shift movement of the pending icon 9A is performed due to pending digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the display screen of 0L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th holds are moved one place to the right (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design are displayed. The temporary stop display is performed in the order of the pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the specific left decorative design 8LZ is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative design 8L by prefetching the specific reserved icon 9AZ of the third reservation. That is, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ representing the specific image is temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ. The specific image is an image representing a specific object. Here, it is an image combining a smiling face image and a rectangular image with the word "chance" written below the smiling face image. is marked in red. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. i.e.
The specific target here includes all aspects in which the number can be specified when there are multiple specific targets. After the specific left decorative design 8LZ is temporarily stopped and displayed, the "red" images representing the numbers "3" and "5" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R as usual. Thus, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ,
As a look-ahead effect, three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R
) are all “red” images, and one of them (the left decorative design 8L
) is stopped and displayed with a specific decoration pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(E), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
, shift movement of the pending icon 9A is performed due to pending digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the display screen of 0L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the second and third holds are moved one place to the right (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design are displayed. The symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by prefetching the second reserved specific reserved icon 9AZ, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ, which represent the specific image, are temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ. This specific image is the same as that represented in the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ during the previous variation. Specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and specific middle decorative pattern 8C
After the temporary stop display of Z, the "red" image representing the number "1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern 8R as usual. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ, as a look-ahead effect, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are " It is a red image, and two of them (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C) are stop-displayed as specific decorative designs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(G), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
, shift movement of the pending icon 9A is performed due to pending digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the display screen of 0L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold is moved to the right by one (shifted) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the first hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design are displayed. The temporary stop display is performed in the order of the pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific reserved icon 9AZ of the first reserved, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific hold icon 9A
As a look-ahead effect during the variation one time before the variation corresponding to Z, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ, the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ, and the specific right decorative pattern 8RZ, which represent the specific image, are temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is the same as that represented in the specific left decorative design 8LZ and the specific middle decorative design 8CZ during the previous variation. In this way, during the fluctuation one time before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ, as a look-ahead effect, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are " It is a "red" image, and is stopped and displayed with a specific decoration pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(I), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
, shift movement of the pending icon 9A is performed due to pending digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the display screen of 0L, the specific hold icon 9AZ corresponding to the first hold is shifted to display the specific hold icon 9CZ at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R.
Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are used to display the decorative design variation effect (variation display) corresponding to the particular reserved icon 9CZ that is the target of the prefetching. ) is executed

After that, as shown in FIG. 133(J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixed and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. Figure 133
(J) shows a state in which the fixed stop display is performed in the jackpot mode "777".
The above-described look-ahead effect suggests that the variation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AT has a higher chance of winning than usual. note that,

[Decorative pattern look-ahead display effect C]
FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect C. FIG. In the decorative design look-ahead display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 134(A), the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. Here, a combination of three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) capable of informing hits and losses is also called "a set of decorative designs". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 134(A), four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, a decorative symbol prefetch display effect is described in which prefetching is performed for the specific pending icon 9AZ, which is one of the four pending icons 9A, and the prefetch display effect is executed on the decorative symbol. In this embodiment, among the four pending icons 9A shown in FIG. 134(A),
The leftmost fourth suspension will be described as the specific suspension icon 9AZ. Here, among the pending icons 9A, the pending icon to be prefetched is called a specific pending icon 9AZ. Also, the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in the mode of failure "472". . The image representing the number "4" of the left decorative design 8L is "blue", the image representing the number "7" of the middle decorative design 8C is "red", and the image representing the number "2" of the right decorative design 8R is "blue". is. In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers "1" to "9", the numbers "1", "3", "5",
The images representing '7' and '9' are 'red' and the images representing the numbers '2', '4', '6' and '8' are 'blue'.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(C), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
, shift movement of the pending icon 9A is performed due to pending digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the display screen of 0L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th holds are moved one place to the right (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design are displayed. The temporary stop display is performed in the order of the pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the specific left decorative design 8LZ is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative design 8L by prefetching the specific reserved icon 9AZ of the third reservation. That is, the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ representing the specific image is temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ. The specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, it is a smiling face image, and the whole is represented in "blue". In addition, the specific target is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but characters, figures,
It also includes abstract items such as symbols and conceptual items whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. After the specific left decorative design 8LZ is temporarily stopped and displayed, the "blue" images representing the numbers "8" and "6" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R as usual. In this way, during the fluctuation three times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ, three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8
R) are all “blue” images, and one of them (the left decorative pattern 8
L) is stopped and displayed with a specific decoration pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(E), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
, shift movement of the pending icon 9A is performed due to pending digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the display screen of 0L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the second and third holds are moved one place to the right (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design are displayed. The temporary stop display is performed in the order of the pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, by prefetching the second reserved specific reserved icon 9AZ, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ, which represent the specific image, are temporarily stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ. This specific image is the same as that represented in the specific left decorative symbol 8LZ during the previous variation. Specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and specific middle decorative pattern 8C
After the temporary stop display of Z, the "blue" image representing the number "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern 8R as usual. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ, as a look-ahead effect, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are " It is a blue image, and two of them (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C) are stop-displayed as specific decorative designs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(G), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
, shift movement of the pending icon 9A is performed due to pending digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the display screen of 0L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold is moved to the right by one (shifted) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the first hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design are displayed. The temporary stop display is performed in the order of the pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, by pre-reading the specific reserved icon 9AZ of the first reserved, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific hold icon 9A
As a look-ahead effect during the variation one time before the variation corresponding to Z, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ, the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ, and the specific right decorative pattern 8RZ showing the specific image are temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is the same as that represented in the specific left decorative design 8LZ and the specific middle decorative design 8CZ during the previous variation. In this way, during the fluctuation one time before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ, as a look-ahead effect, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are " It is an image of "blue" and is stopped and displayed with a specific decoration pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(I), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
, shift movement of the pending icon 9A is performed due to pending digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the display screen of 0L, the specific hold icon 9AZ corresponding to the first hold is shifted to display the specific hold icon 9CZ at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R.
Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are used to display the decorative design variation effect (variation display) corresponding to the particular reserved icon 9CZ that is the target of the pre-reading. ) is executed

After that, as shown in FIG. 134(J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixed and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. Figure 134
(J) shows a state in which the fixed stop display is performed in the jackpot mode "777".
The above-described look-ahead effect suggests that the variation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AT has a higher chance of winning than usual.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead display effect D]
FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect D. FIG. In the decorative design prefetch display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 135(A), the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. Here, the combination of the three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) capable of reporting hits and losses is also called "a set of decorative designs". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 135(A), four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Here, the decorative symbol prefetch display effect is described in which prefetching is performed for the specific pending icon 9AZ, which is one of the four pending icons 9A, and the prefetch display effect is executed for the decorative symbol. In this embodiment, among the four pending icons 9A shown in FIG. 135(A),
The leftmost fourth hold is described as the specific hold icon 9AZ. Here, among the pending icons 9A, the pending icon to be prefetched is called a specific pending icon 9AZ. Also, the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a failing mode "472". . The image representing the number "4" of the left decorative design 8L is "blue", the image representing the number "7" of the middle decorative design 8C is "red", and the image representing the number "2" of the right decorative design 8R is "blue". is. In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers "1" to "9", the numbers "1", "3", "5",
The images representing '7' and '9' are 'red' and the images representing the numbers '2', '4', '6' and '8' are 'blue'.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(C), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
, shift movement of the pending icon 9A is performed due to pending digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the display screen of 0L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th holds are moved one place to the right (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design are displayed. The temporary stop display is performed in the order of the pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, by prefetching the third reserved specific reserved icon 9AZ, the specific decorative patterns having specific images displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as the look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ showing the first specific image and the specific middle decorative pattern showing the second specific image 8CZ and specific right decorative pattern 8RZ
is temporarily stopped. The specific image is an image representing a specific target. The first specific image is a combined image of a smiling face image and a rectangular image with the word "chance" written below the smiling face image, and is entirely represented in "red". The second specific image is a smiling face image and is entirely represented in "red". In addition, the specific target is a character, a living thing,
It is not limited to physical objects, but also includes abstract things such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual things whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. In this way, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ, as a look-ahead effect, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are "red" image, and one of them (left decorative pattern 8L) is stopped and displayed as a specific decorative pattern showing the first specific image, and the remaining two decorative patterns (middle decorative pattern 8C , right decorative pattern 8R) is the second
is stopped and displayed with a specific decoration pattern in which the specific image of is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(E), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
, shift movement of the pending icon 9A is performed due to pending digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the display screen of 0L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the second and third holds are moved one place to the right (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design are displayed. The symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by pre-reading the second reserved specific reserved icon 9AZ, the specific decorative patterns in which the specific images are displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ, which display the first specific image, and the second specific image are displayed. Specific right decorative pattern 8RZ
is temporarily stopped. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ, as a look-ahead effect, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are " and two of them (the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C) are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative patterns showing the first specific image, and the remaining one decorative pattern. (Right decorative pattern 8R) is stop-displayed as a specific decorative pattern showing the second specific image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(G), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
, shift movement of the pending icon 9A is performed due to pending digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the display screen of 0L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold is moved to the right by one (shifted) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the first hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design are displayed. The symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by pre-reading the specific reserved icon 9AZ of the first reserved, the specific decorative patterns in which the specific images are displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ, the specific middle decorative pattern 8CZ, and the specific right decorative pattern 8RZ, which represent the first specific image, are tentatively used as a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation one time before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ. Stop is displayed. In this way, during the fluctuation one time before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AZ, as a look-ahead effect, all three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are "
A specific decoration pattern that is an image of "red" and that represents the first specific image is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(I), the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R
, shift movement of the pending icon 9A is performed due to pending digestion. Left sub-display device 1
On the display screen of 0L, the specific hold icon 9AZ corresponding to the first hold is shifted to display the specific hold icon 9CZ at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R.
Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are used to display the decorative design variation effect (variation display) corresponding to the particular reserved icon 9CZ that is the target of the prefetching. ) is executed

After that, as shown in FIG. 135(J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixed and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. Figure 135
(J) shows a state in which the fixed stop display is made in the jackpot mode "777".
The above-described look-ahead effect suggests that the variation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AT has a higher chance of winning than usual.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8L) temporarily stopped and displayed in the first production can be executed. 8R), the degree of expectation for winning differs depending on the type of decorative pattern that constitutes the 8R). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect during the variation following the variation in which the first effect is executed. A set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) that is a combination of the same kind of decorative patterns as (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) is temporarily stopped. A second presentation to be displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, during the fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation in which the first production is executed, a set of temporarily stop-displayed in the first production A set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R), which is a combination of decorative patterns of the same type as the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R). It is possible to execute a third effect that is temporarily stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, after the first effect, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) wins. ,
Alternatively, a definite stop display is made to notify the deviation. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect.
is a combination of decorative patterns of the same color (blue, red). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect.
is a combination of decorative patterns of a first color (blue) and a combination of decorative patterns of a second color (red) different from the first color (blue). If the set of decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) is a combination of decorative designs of the second color (red), the decorative design of the first color (blue) is combined. The expectation of winning is higher than in the case of a combination.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
132 to 135, in the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect, the look-ahead effect during the change three times before, two times before, and once before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ is performed. A look-ahead effect may be performed during the variation two times or one time before the variation corresponding to , or a look-ahead effect may be performed during the variation one time before the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ. .
[Modification 2]
132 to 135, a set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative design 8R) are temporarily stopped and displayed, but this set of decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) is the same figure, pattern, design,
It may be a combination of decorative patterns such as letters.
[Modification 3]
132 to 135, a set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8L, middle Decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are temporarily stopped and displayed,
The color of the decorative pattern may be a color other than blue and red.
[Modification 4]
In the decorative symbol prefetch display effect D of FIG. 135, a set of decorative symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are temporarily stopped and displayed, but a set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8L, middle Decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) may be used.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C5-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of informing whether or not a win is achieved,
A first effect in which the set of decorative symbols, which is a combination of decorative symbols of the same type, is temporarily stopped and displayed by a look-ahead during the fluctuation can be executed,
The degree of expectation for winning differs depending on the type of the decorative pattern that constitutes the set of decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the first production.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-1,
Said one set of decorative symbols is a combination of the same kind of decorative symbols as said one set of decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in said first effect during the next variation after said first effect is executed. is capable of executing a second effect that is temporarily stopped and displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C5-1 or aspect C5-2,
The one set of decorative symbols which is a combination of the same type of decorative symbols as the one set of decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect during the variation immediately before the variation in which the first effect is executed. It is possible to execute a third effect in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-3,
After the first effect, the set of decorative symbols provides a fixed stop display that notifies of winning or losing,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-4,
The set of decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect is a combination of decorative patterns of the same color.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-5,
The set of decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect may be a combination of decorative patterns of a first color or a combination of decorative patterns of a second color different from the first color. and if there is
When the set of decorative patterns is a combination of decorative patterns of the second color, the first
The expectation of winning is higher than if it is a combination of decorative patterns of colors,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative symbol look-ahead effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. FIG. This decorative symbol look-ahead effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the decorative symbol prefetch effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display is performed. The display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the device 7 and the sub display device 10
An image is displayed on the display screens of (left sub-display device 10L and right sub-display device 10R).
Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the decorative symbol prefetch effect is included, the left sub display device 10L
, and the position and inclination of the right sub-display device 10R).

[Decorative pattern look-ahead effect A]
FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead effect A. FIG. Decorative pattern look-ahead effect A
First, as shown in FIG. 136A, the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are displayed. Here, a combination of three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) capable of informing hits and losses is also called "a set of decorative designs". Left sub-display device 1
In 0L, four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line.
Here, the decorative symbol prefetch effect is described in which prefetch is performed for the specific pending icon 9AT, which is one of the four pending icons 9A, and the prefetch effect is executed on the decorative symbol. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A in FIG. 136(A), the leftmost fourth hold will be described as the specific hold icon 9AT. Here, among the pending icons 9A, the pending icon to be prefetched is called a specific pending icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 136(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four pending icons 9A are horizontally arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal sides of the display screen. there is The pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. FIG. 136(A) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at "789", and then the pending icon 9C disappears (holding is completed). As shown in FIG. 136(B), in the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R), the hold icon 9A shifts due to the hold digestion.
On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th holds are moved rightward by one (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. And left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C
, the right decorative pattern 8R starts to be displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 136(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative pattern (
Left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) are temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of left decorative design 8L, right decorative design 8R, and middle decorative design 8C after variable display. At this time,
The specific left decorative design 8LT is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative design 8L by prefetching the specific pending icon 9AT of the third reserve. That is, 3 of the variations corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT
As a look-ahead effect during the previous variation, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT representing the specific image is temporarily stopped and displayed. The specific image is an image representing a specific object, and is a smiling face image here. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LT, images representing numbers ("2" and "6" in this case) are temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R as usual. After that, the suspension icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R due to suspension. In this way, one decorative design (left decorative design 8L) is stop-displayed as the specific decorative design as a look-ahead effect during the three changes before the specific suspension icon 9AT.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(D), in the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R), the pending icon 9A is shifted due to pending digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the second and third holds are moved rightward by one (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start to be variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R) are variably displayed, and then the left decorative pattern 8
L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by prefetching the second reserved specific pending icon 9AT, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific hold icon 9AT
As a look-ahead effect during the variation two times before the variation corresponding to , the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT representing the specific image are temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is the same as the one shown in the specific left decorative symbol 8LT during the previous variation. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT, numbers (here, "
6”) is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, the suspension icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R due to suspension. In this way, two decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are stop-displayed in the specific decorative pattern as a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AT. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(F), in the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R), the pending icon 9A is shifted due to pending digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific pending icon 9AT corresponding to the second pending is moved rightward by one (shifted) to become the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first pending. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start to be variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R) are variably displayed, and then the left decorative pattern 8
L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by pre-reading the specific pending icon 9AT of the first reserve, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the variation that is one time before the variation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AT, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT, the specific right decorative pattern 8RT, and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CT, which each display a specific image, are temporarily stopped. Is displayed. This specific image is the same as that represented in the specific left decorative design 8LT and the specific right decorative design 8RT during the previous variation. After that, the suspension icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R due to suspension. Thus, all (three) decorative symbols are stop-displayed as the specific decorative symbols as a look-ahead effect during the one-time variation before the variation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AT.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(H), in the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R), the pending icon 9A is shifted due to pending digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold is moved to the right by one (shifted), and the specific relevant hold icon 9CT is displayed at the hold position of the right sub-display device 10R. be. Then, the variable display corresponding to the specific relevant pending icon 9CT that is the target of prefetching is started.

In the change corresponding to the specific relevant pending icon 9CT, the display screen 7 of the main display device 7
In a, three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) are not displayed, and the corresponding image CRG is displayed. This corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed in the specific decorative pattern as a look-ahead effect. Here, the specific image is a smiling face image, and this corresponding image CRG is also a smiling face image. The corresponding image CRG is
Any image may be used as long as it corresponds to the specific image, and may not be the same as the specific image. For example, the corresponding image CRG may be a character representation of the content of the specific image, or may be a modified shape of the specific image. The corresponding image CRG may be moved. 136 (
J), three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R
) is displayed as a fixed stop in the form of a big hit or a loss. FIG. 136(J) shows a state in which the fixed stop display is performed in a jackpot mode. The above-described look-ahead effect suggests that the variation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AT has a higher chance of winning than usual.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead effect B]
FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead effect B. FIG. Decorative pattern look-ahead effect B
First, as shown in FIG. 137(A), the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are displayed. Here, the combination of the three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) capable of reporting hits and losses is also called "a set of decorative designs". Left sub-display device 1
In 0L, four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line.
Here, a decorative symbol prefetch effect is described in which prefetch is performed for the specific pending icon 9AT, which is one of the four pending icons 9A, and the prefetch effect is executed for the decorative symbol. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A in FIG. 137A, the leftmost fourth hold will be described as the specific hold icon 9AT. Here, among the pending icons 9A, the pending icon to be prefetched is called a specific pending icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 137(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four pending icons 9A are horizontally arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal sides of the display screen. there is The pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. FIG. 137(A) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at "789", and then the pending icon 9C disappears (holding is completed). As shown in FIG. 137(B), in the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R), the pending icon 9A is shifted due to pending digestion.
On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th holds are moved rightward by one (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. And left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C
, the right decorative pattern 8R starts to be displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 137(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative pattern (
Left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) are temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of left decorative design 8L, right decorative design 8R, and middle decorative design 8C after variable display. At this time,
The specific left decorative design 8LT is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative design 8L by prefetching the specific reserved icon 9AT of the third reservation. That is, 3 of the variations corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT
As a look-ahead effect during the previous variation, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT representing the specific image is temporarily stopped and displayed. The specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here represents a part of the left side of the smiling face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the specific image displayed on the specific left decorative pattern 8LT is also called "first specific image". After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LT, images representing numbers ("2" and "6" in this case) are temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R as usual. After that, the suspension icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R due to suspension. Thus, during the variation three times before the variation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AT, the specific decorative design is stopped and displayed in one decorative design (left decorative design 8L) as a look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(D), in the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R), the pending icon 9A is shifted due to pending digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the second and third holds are moved rightward by one (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start to be variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R) are variably displayed, and then the left decorative pattern 8
L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by pre-reading the specific pending icon 9AT of the second reserve, the specific decorative patterns showing specific images corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as the look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AT, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT representing the first specific image and the specific right decoration symbol representing the second specific image are displayed. A symbol 8RT is temporarily stopped and displayed. The first specific image is the same as that represented in the specific left decorative symbol 8LT during the previous variation. The second specific image represents a portion of the right side of the smiling face image. After the specified left decorative pattern 8LT and the specified right decorative pattern 8RT are temporarily stopped and displayed, an image representing a number (here, "6") is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle decorative pattern 8C as usual. After that, the suspension icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R due to suspension. Thus, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, as a look-ahead effect,
Two decorative designs (left decorative design 8L and right decorative design 8R) are stop-displayed as specific decorative designs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(F), in the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R), the pending icon 9A is shifted due to pending digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific pending icon 9AT corresponding to the second pending is moved rightward by one (shifted) to become the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first pending. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start to be variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R) are variably displayed, and then the left decorative pattern 8
L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by pre-reading the specific reservation icon 9AT of the first reservation, the specific decorative patterns showing the specific images corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the first
A specified left decorative pattern 8LT representing the second specified image, a specified right decorative pattern 8RT representing the second specified image, and a specified middle decorative pattern 8CT representing the third specified image are temporarily stopped and displayed. . first
The specific image and the second specific image are the same as those represented in the specific left decorative design 8LT and the specific right decorative design 8RT during the previous variation. The third specific image represents a central part of the smiling face image. By arranging the first specific image, the second specific image, and the third specific image, one smiling face image is obtained. After that, the suspension icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R due to suspension. Thus, all (three) decorative symbols are stop-displayed as the specific decorative symbols as a look-ahead effect during the one-time variation before the variation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AT.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(H), in the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R), the pending icon 9A is shifted due to pending digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold is moved to the right by one (shifted), and the specific relevant hold icon 9CT is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R. be. Then, the variable display corresponding to the specific relevant pending icon 9CT that is the target of prefetching is started.

In the change corresponding to the specific relevant pending icon 9CT, the display screen 7 of the main display device 7
In a, three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) are not displayed, and the corresponding image CRG is displayed. This corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed in the specific decorative pattern as a look-ahead effect. Here, the specific image is a smiling face image, and this corresponding image CRG is a character image representing "Smile!!!".
In this way, the corresponding image CRG may be an image corresponding to the specific image, and may not be the same as the specific image. After that, as shown in FIG. 137(J), three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8
L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R) are fixed and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. FIG. 137(J) shows a state in which the fixed stop display is performed in a jackpot mode. The above-described look-ahead effect suggests that the variation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AT has a higher chance of winning than usual.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead effect C]
FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead effect C. FIG. Decorative pattern look-ahead effect C
First, as shown in FIG. 138(A), the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are displayed. Here, the combination of the three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) capable of reporting hits and losses is also called "a set of decorative designs". Left sub-display device 1
In 0L, four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line.
Here, a decorative symbol prefetch effect is described in which prefetch is performed for the specific pending icon 9AT, which is one of the four pending icons 9A, and the prefetch effect is executed for the decorative symbol. In this embodiment, of the four pending icons 9A in FIG. 138(A), the leftmost fourth pending will be described as the specific pending icon 9AT. Here, among the pending icons 9A, the pending icon to be prefetched is called a specific pending icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 138(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four pending icons 9A are horizontally arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal sides of the display screen. there is The pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. FIG. 138(A) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at "789", and then the pending icon 9C disappears (holding is completed). As shown in FIG. 138(B), in the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R), the pending icon 9A is shifted due to pending digestion.
On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th holds are moved rightward by one (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. And left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C
, the right decorative pattern 8R starts to be displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 138(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative pattern (
Left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) are temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of left decorative design 8L, right decorative design 8R, and middle decorative design 8C after variable display. At this time,
The specific left decorative design 8LT is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative design 8L by prefetching the specific reserved icon 9AT of the third reservation. That is, 3 of the variations corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT
As a look-ahead effect during the previous variation, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT representing the specific image is temporarily stopped and displayed. The specific image is an image representing a specific object, and in this case, it is a character image representing the hiragana character "ma". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the specific image displayed on the specific left decorative pattern 8LT is also called "first specific image". After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LT, images representing numbers ("2" and "6" in this case) are temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R as usual. After that, the suspension icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R due to suspension. In this way, one decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8
L), the specific decoration pattern is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(D), in the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R), the pending icon 9A is shifted due to pending digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the second and third holds are moved rightward by one (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start to be variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative designs (the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, the right decorative design 8R) are variably displayed, and then the left decorative design 8
L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by pre-reading the specific pending icon 9AT of the second reserve, the specific decorative patterns showing specific images corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as the look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AT, the specific left decorative symbol 8LT representing the first specific image and the specific right decoration symbol representing the second specific image are displayed. A symbol 8RT is temporarily stopped and displayed. The first specific image is the same as that represented in the specific left decorative symbol 8LT during the previous variation. The second specific image is a character image representing the character "ka" in hiragana. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT, in the middle decorative pattern 8C,
As usual, an image showing a number (here, "6") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, the suspension icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R due to suspension.
In this way, two decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are stop-displayed in the specific decorative pattern as a look-ahead effect during the fluctuation two times before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AT. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(F), in the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R), the pending icon 9A is shifted due to pending digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific pending icon 9AT corresponding to the second pending is moved rightward by one (shifted) to become the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first pending. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start to be variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative designs (the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, the right decorative design 8R) are variably displayed, and then the left decorative design 8
L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by pre-reading the specific reservation icon 9AT of the first reservation, the specific decorative patterns showing the specific images corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the first
A specified left decorative pattern 8LT representing the second specified image, a specified right decorative pattern 8RT representing the second specified image, and a specified middle decorative pattern 8CT representing the third specified image are temporarily stopped and displayed. . first
The specific image and the second specific image are the same as those represented in the specific left decorative design 8LT and the specific right decorative design 8RT during the previous variation. The third specific image is a character image representing "sa" in hiragana. By arranging the first specific image, the second specific image, and the third specific image, it becomes a word with one meaning of "no way". After that, the suspension icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R due to suspension. in this way,
During the one-time fluctuation before the fluctuation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AT, all (three) decorative patterns are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative pattern as a look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(H), in the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R), the pending icon 9A is shifted due to pending digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold is moved to the right by one (shifted), and the specific relevant hold icon 9CT is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R. be. Then, the variable display corresponding to the specific relevant pending icon 9CT that is the target of prefetching is started.

In the change corresponding to the specific relevant pending icon 9CT, the display screen 7 of the main display device 7
In a, three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) are not displayed, and the corresponding image CRG is displayed. This corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed in the specific decorative pattern as a look-ahead effect. Here, the specific image is "no way"
, and this corresponding image CRG is a character image representing "no way!!!". Note that the corresponding image CRG may be an image corresponding to the specific image, and may not be the same as the specific image. For example, the corresponding image CRG may be characters that have the same meaning as the content of the specific image, or may be changed fonts or converted into romaji or katakana. After that, as shown in FIG. 138(J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixed and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. Figure 1
38(J) shows a state in which the fixed stop display is made in the form of a big win. The above-described look-ahead effect suggests that the variation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AT has a higher chance of winning than usual.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead effect D]
FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol look-ahead effect D. FIG. Decorative pattern look-ahead effect D
First, as shown in FIG. 139(A), the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) are positioned at the retreat position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are displayed. Here, a combination of three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) capable of informing hits and losses is also called "a set of decorative designs". Left sub-display device 1
In 0L, four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line.
Here, the decorative symbol prefetch effect is described in which prefetch is performed for the specific pending icon 9AT, which is one of the four pending icons 9A, and the prefetch effect is executed on the decorative symbol. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A in FIG. 139A, the leftmost fourth hold will be described as the specific hold icon 9AT. Here, among the pending icons 9A, the pending icon to be prefetched is called a specific pending icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 139(A), on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, four pending icons 9A are horizontally arranged (displayed) in a straight line along the horizontal sides of the display screen. there is The pending icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. FIG. 139(A) shows a state where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at "789", and then the pending icon 9C disappears (holding is completed). As shown in FIG. 139(B), in the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R), the pending icon 9A is shifted due to pending digestion.
On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 2nd to 4th holds are moved rightward by one (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the 1st to 3rd holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. And left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C
, the right decorative pattern 8R starts the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 139(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative pattern (
Left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) are temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of left decorative design 8L, right decorative design 8R, and middle decorative design 8C after variable display. At this time,
The specific left decorative design 8LT is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative design 8L by prefetching the specific reserved icon 9AT of the third reservation. That is, 3 of the variations corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT
As a look-ahead effect during the previous variation, a specific left decorative symbol 8LT representing a specific image is temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is an image representing a specific object, and here, "No way!!!
It is a character image representing ". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LT, images representing numbers ("2" and "6" in this case) are temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R as usual. After that, the suspension icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R due to suspension. In this way, one decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8
L) a specific image is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(D), in the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R), the pending icon 9A is shifted due to pending digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the second and third holds are moved rightward by one (shifted) to become the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first and second holds. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Due to this shift movement, the hold icon 9A of the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start to be variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R) are variably displayed, and then the left decorative pattern 8
L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by prefetching the second reserved specific pending icon 9AT, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific hold icon 9AT
As a look-ahead effect during the variation two times before the variation corresponding to , the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT each representing a specific image are temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is the same as that represented in the specific left decorative symbol 8LT during the previous variation. After the specified left decorative pattern 8LT and the specified right decorative pattern 8RT are temporarily stopped and displayed, an image representing a number (here, "6") is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle decorative pattern 8C as usual. After that, the suspension icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R due to suspension. In this way, two decorative patterns (
The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are stop-displayed as specific decorative patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(F), in the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R), the pending icon 9A is shifted due to pending digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific pending icon 9AT corresponding to the second pending is moved rightward by one (shifted) to become the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first pending. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold on the left sub-display device 10L is displayed at the hold position on the right sub-display device 10R by shift movement. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start to be variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R) are variably displayed, and then the left decorative pattern 8
L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by pre-reading the specific pending icon 9AT of the first reserve, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in order. That is, as a look-ahead effect during the one-time change before the change corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AT, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT, the specific right decorative pattern 8RT, and the specific middle decorative pattern 8CT, which respectively represent the specific images, are temporarily stopped and displayed. be done. This specific image is the same as the one temporarily stopped and displayed on the specific left decorative design 8LT and the specific right decorative design 8RT during the previous variation. After that, the suspension icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R due to suspension. In this way, all (3
1) decoration pattern is stopped and displayed with a specific decoration pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(H), in the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R), the pending icon 9A is shifted due to pending digestion. On the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold is moved to the right by one (shifted), and the specific relevant hold icon 9CT is displayed at the hold position of the right sub-display device 10R. be. Then, the variable display corresponding to the specific relevant pending icon 9CT that is the target of prefetching is started.

In the change corresponding to the specific relevant pending icon 9CT, the display screen 7 of the main display device 7
In a, three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) are not displayed, and the corresponding image CRG is displayed. This corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed in the specific decorative pattern as a look-ahead effect. Here, the specific image is "No way!
! ! This corresponding image CRG is also a character image representing "no way!!!". Note that the corresponding image CRG may be an image corresponding to the specific image, and may not be the same as the specific image. For example, the corresponding image CRG may be characters that have the same meaning as the content of the specific image, or may be changed fonts or converted into romaji or katakana. After that, as shown in FIG. 139(J), three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8
L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R) are fixed and displayed in the form of a big hit or a loss. FIG. 139(J) shows a state in which the fixed stop display is performed in a jackpot mode. The above-described look-ahead effect suggests that the variation corresponding to the specific pending icon 9AT has a higher chance of winning than usual.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative symbol look-ahead effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, a particular decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as at least one of a set of decorative symbols by prefetching during variation. 1 effect and, after the first effect, a second effect in which a corresponding image CRG corresponding to the specific image represented by the specific decorative pattern is displayed during the fluctuation corresponding to the look-ahead. can. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, during the next fluctuation after the fluctuation in which the first production is executed, the specific decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first production are displayed. It is possible to execute a third effect in which the number of specific decorative symbols larger than the number of is temporarily stopped and displayed.
According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, during the fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation in which the first production is executed, a specific stop display is performed in the first production. It is possible to execute a fourth effect in which the number of specific decorative symbols that is smaller than the number of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, after the second effect, a set of decorative symbols is used to perform a fixed stop display that informs of winning or losing. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 138 to 139, the specific decoration pattern includes an image representing a predetermined character, and in the second effect, the same content as the predetermined character is displayed. An image is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, in the third effect, all of the set of decorative symbols are the specific decorative symbols and are temporarily stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative symbol look-ahead effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative design look-ahead effects A to D, the number of specific decorative patterns is "0", "1", and "2" for each variable effect.
” and “3”, which are incremented one by one. However, the number of specific decorative patterns may be increased arbitrarily. For example, after FIG. 138(B), without executing FIG. 138(C) and (D), FIG.
(E) may be performed. In this case, the number of specific decorative patterns increases to "0", "2", and "3". Also, after FIG. 138(B), FIG. 138(G) may be executed without executing FIGS. 138(C) to (F). In this case, the number of specific decorative patterns increases to "0" and "3". The same applies to FIGS. 136, 137 and 139. FIG.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol prefetching effects A to D, the prefetching effect of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the special figure 1 was explained, but the decorative symbol prefetching effect may be executed as the prefetching effect of the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the special figure 2. .

[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol look-ahead effects A to D, the content of the specific image may be changed depending on the difference in the degree of expectation for the big win. For example, the expectation of a big hit may be higher in the look-ahead effect of FIG. 137 than in the look-ahead effect of FIG.

[Modification 4]
In the decorative design look-ahead effects A to D, the specific decorative design may not be displayed in the order of the left decorative design, the right decorative design, and the middle decorative design. For example, the specific decorative pattern is first displayed in the middle decorative pattern, and in the next change, the middle decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern become the specific decorative patterns, and finally, all three become the specific decorative patterns. good too.

[Modification 5]
In the decorative symbol look-ahead productions A to D, the production may end in the middle. For example, Figure 138
After (A) to (F), FIG. 138(A) may be executed again instead of FIG. 138(G).

[Modification 6]
The contents of the decorative symbol look-ahead effects A to D may be combined as appropriate. Further, the decorative symbol look-ahead effects A to D may not include part of the described effects, or may be added with other effects.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C6-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of informing whether or not a win is achieved,
a first effect in which a specific decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed as at least one of the set of decorative patterns by prefetching during fluctuation;
After the first effect, during the fluctuation corresponding to the look-ahead, a second effect in which an image corresponding to the image represented by the specific decorative pattern is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-1,
During the variation following the variation in which the first effect is executed, the number of the specific decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect is greater than the number of the specific decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed. 3 productions can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C6-1 or aspect C6-2,
During the variation immediately before the variation in which the first effect is executed, the specific decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a number smaller than the number of the specific decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect. capable of executing a fourth production that
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-3,
After the second effect, a fixed stop display is provided to notify of winning or losing by the set of decorative symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-4,
The specific decorative pattern includes an image representing a predetermined character,
In the second effect, an image having the same content as the predetermined character is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C6-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-2,
In the third effect, all of the set of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as the specific decorative symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Operation image tilt display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 140 to 143. FIG. This operation image tilt display effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90,
When an instruction to execute an operation image tilt display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 or the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L). and the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R). Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the operation image tilt display effect is included, the left sub-display device 10L or the right sub-display device 10R is displayed. ) position and tilt.

[Operating Image Tilt Display Effect A]
140 is a diagram for explaining the operation image tilt display effect A. FIG. In the operation image tilt display effect A, first, as shown in FIG.
L and the right sub-display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). During the variable display, the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays an opening image OPG with the words "Erase the smile!!!". This opening image OPG is displayed at the start of the game effect to determine whether or not the player can operate the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a variable display of decorative symbols, and the sub-display device 10 may display a pending icon 9A.

As shown in FIG. 140(B), when the game effect is started, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2. A specific image is an image representing a specific object, and is a smiling face image here. In addition, the specific target is
It is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract things such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual things whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are the same image, but different images (
For example, it may be a smiling face and a crying face). The first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are
When displayed, the images are displayed with different tilts. After that, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are displayed in a state rotated to the left and right so that the tilt of the image changes while maintaining the state in which the tilts of the images are different from each other. After that, Figure 14
As shown in 0(C), the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 while maintaining different image tilts.
Move so that the display position changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(D), a switching effect is executed. The switching effect is a effect in which a plurality of specific images TG are switched to button images BTN all at once. Specifically, the first
The specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 emit light at the same time, and the first effect image EF
1 and the second effect image EF2 are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 140(E),
, when the first effect image EF1 and the second effect image EF2 disappear, the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are simultaneously displayed at the respective positions. That is, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 emit light simultaneously to form the first button image BTN1.
and the second button image BTN2 all at once (simultaneously). The first button image BTN1 and the second
Each button image BTN2 is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63, and is the same image here. When the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are displayed at the same time, the inclination of the images is the same as that of the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2. Therefore, when the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are displayed at the same time, they are displayed with different tilts of the images. Note that the first button image B
TN1 and the second button image BTN2 may have different image sizes or different image shapes. A first button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
1 and the second button image BTN2 are displayed, the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are changed so that the inclinations of the images change while maintaining the state in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other. Appears rotated left and right. After that, as shown in FIG. 140(F), the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 while maintaining the state in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other. Move so that the display position changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(G), the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN
2 stops at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, "
Hit! ! is displayed. The operation prompting image SPG is an image in which the current operation effective period of the effect button 63 is present, and the image recommends the player to operate the effect button 63 . When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIGS. 140(H) and 140(I), a button image disappearing effect is executed. The button image disappearing effect is an effect in which a plurality of button images disappear in order on the main display device 7 . Here, the button images BTN are exploded one by one in accordance with the number of operations (presses) of the effect button 63, and are switched to the explosion image EX. Here, the second button image BTN2 is first switched to the second explosion image EX2, and then the first button image BTN1 is switched to the first explosion image EX1. After the explosion image EX is displayed, a smoke image KM representing the smoke after the explosion is displayed, and then the display disappears from the main display device 7 . In FIG. 140(I), the second smoke image KM2 is displayed after the second explosion image EX2. In this way, the button images BTN are exploded one by one according to the number of operations (presses) of the effect button 63.
As shown in J), three decorative symbols are displayed and then stopped. Here, it is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win. In addition, the decorative pattern may be stop-displayed in a lost mode.

[Operating Image Tilt Display Effect B]
FIG. 141 is a diagram for explaining operation image tilt display effect B. FIG. In the operation image tilt display effect B, first, as shown in FIG.
L and the right sub-display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). During the variable display, the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays an opening image OPG with the words "Erase the smile!!!". This opening image OPG is displayed at the start of the game effect to determine whether or not the player can operate the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a variable display of decorative symbols, and the sub-display device 10 may display a pending icon 9A.

As shown in FIG. 141(B), when the game effect is started, a first specific image TG1, a second specific image TG2, a third specific image TG3, and a fourth specific image TG1 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. A specific image TG4 is displayed. A specific image is an image representing a specific object, and is a smiling face image here. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the first to fourth specific images TG1 to TG
4 are all the same image, but may be different images (for example, a smiling face and a crying face). When the first to fourth specific images TG1 to TG4 are displayed, the tilts of the images are displayed in a state of being randomly different. After that, the first to fourth specific images TG1 to TG4 are displayed in a state rotated left and right so that the tilt of the image changes at random.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 141(C) to 141(E), a switching effect is executed. The switching effect is a effect in which a plurality of specific images TG are randomly switched to the button image BTN or the select button image SKB. Here, first, as shown in FIG. 141(C), the second specific image TG2 and the third specific image TG3 are simultaneously (simultaneously) displayed as the second select button image S.
It switches to KB2 and the third button image BTN3. The second select button image SKB2 is an image representing the appearance of the select button 68 . Also, the third button image BTN3 is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63 . When the second select button image SKB2 and the third button image BTN3 are displayed at the same time, the tilts of the images are displayed in different states.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(D), the first specific image TG1 is the first button image BTN1.
switch to The first button image BTN1 is an image representing the appearance of the effect button 63.
It is the same image as the third button image BTN3. When the first button image BTN1 is displayed, the inclination of the image is displayed in a state different from that of the third button image BTN3. Next, Figure 141
As shown in (E), the fourth specific image TG4 is switched to the fourth select button image SKB4. The fourth select button image SKB4 is an image representing the appearance of the select button 68, and is the same image as the second select button image SKB2. Fourth select button image SKB
When 4 is displayed, the tilt of the image is displayed in a state different from that of the second select button image SKB2. The first button image BTN1, the second select button image SKB2, the third button image BTN3, and the fourth select button image SKB4 are statically displayed with their image tilts different from each other. It should be noted that these images may not be displayed still, but may be displayed in a state rotated to the left or right so that the tilt of the image changes while maintaining the state in which the tilt of the image is different from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(F), an operation prompting image SPG indicating "Hit!!" is displayed above the display screen 7a. The operation prompting image SPG is an image in which the current operation effective period of the effect button 63 and the select button 68 is in effect, and the player is recommended to operate the effect button 63 and the select button 68 . When the player operates the effect button 63 and the select button 68, as shown in FIGS. 141(G) to 141(I), a button image disappearing effect is executed. The button image disappearing effect is an effect in which a plurality of button images (the button image BTN and the select button image SKB) disappear randomly on the main display device 7 . 141(G) in response to the operation (pressing) of the select button 68.
, the select button image SKB explodes all at once and switches to the explosion images EX2 and EX4. After the explosion images EX2 and EX4 are displayed, smoke images KM2 and KM4 representing the smoke after the explosion are displayed as shown in FIG. In addition, the button images BTN are exploded one by one in accordance with the number of operations (presses) of the effect button 63, and switched to the explosion image EX. Here, as shown in FIG. 141(H), the third button image BTN3 is first switched to the third explosion image EX3, and then the
As shown in 1(I), the first button image BTN1 is switched to the first explosion image EX1. After the explosion image EX is displayed, a smoke image KM representing smoke after the explosion is displayed, and then the display disappears from the main display device 7 . In FIG. 141(I), the third smoke image KM3 is displayed after the third explosion image EX3. In this way, the button image BTN and the select button image SKB explode according to the operation (pressing) of the effect button 63 and the select button 68, and when all explode, three decorations are displayed as shown in FIG. 141(J). A pattern is displayed and then stopped. Here, it is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win. In addition, the decorative pattern may be stop-displayed in a lost mode.

[Operating Image Tilt Display Effect C]
FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the operation image tilt display effect C. FIG. In the operation image tilt display effect C, first, as shown in FIG.
L and the right sub-display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). During the variable display, the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays an opening image OPG with the words "Erase the smile!!!". This opening image OPG is displayed at the start of the game effect to determine whether or not the player can operate the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a variable display of decorative symbols, and the sub-display device 10 may display a pending icon 9A.

As shown in FIG. 142(B), when the game effect is started, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screens of the sub-display devices 10 (the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R) display the 1 specific image TG1, 2nd specific image TG2, 3rd specific image TG3, 4th specific image TG4, 5th specific image TG5, 6th specific image TG6, 7th specific image TG
7 and an eighth specific image TG8 are displayed. A specific image is an image representing a specific object, and is a smiling face image here. In addition, the specific target is a character, a living thing,
It is not limited to physical objects, but also includes abstract things such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual things whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are all the same image, but may be different images (for example, a smiling face and a crying face). The first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed side by side in a ring straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 . The first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are
When displayed, each of the face images is tilted so that the lower side of the face image faces the central position of the arranged rings. In other words, when the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed, the tilts of the images are displayed in different states. After that, as shown in FIG. 142(C), the first to
Each of the eight specific images TG1 to TG8 has its image color changed at random while maintaining the image inclinations different from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(D), a switching effect is executed. The switching effect is a effect in which a plurality of specific images TG are switched to button images BTN all at once. Specifically, the first
.about.8 specific images TG1 to TG8 emit light at the same time. Effect image EF6 and seventh effect image EF
7 and an eighth effect image EF8 are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 142(E), when the first to eighth effect images EF1 to EF8 disappear, a first button image BTN1, a second button image BTN2, and a third button image BTN3 are placed in their respective positions. , the fourth button image BTN4, the fifth button image BTN5, the sixth button image BTN6, the seventh button image BTN7, and the eighth button image BTN8 are displayed simultaneously. That is, the 1st to 8th
The specific images TG1 to TG8 emit light at the same time and switch to the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 all at once (simultaneously). The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are images representing the appearance of the effect button 63, respectively, and are the same image here. The 1st to 8th button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed in a ring, straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 . When the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed simultaneously, the inclination of the images is the same as that of the corresponding first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8. Therefore, when the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed at the same time, they are displayed with different inclinations of the images. The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are
The sizes of the images may be different from each other, and the shapes of the images may be different. When the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. Randomly change the color of the image while keeping the states different from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(G), after the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed in a ring straddling the in-display device 7 and the sub-display device 10, the ring is displayed. An operation prompting image SPG is displayed in the center with "Hit!!". The operation prompting image SPG is an image in which the current operation effective period of the effect button 63 is present, and the image recommends the player to operate the effect button 63 . When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIGS. 142(H) and 142(I), a button image disappearing effect is executed. The button image disappearing effect is an effect in which a plurality of button images disappear in order on the main display device 7 . Here, depending on the number of operations (presses) of the effect button 63, the button images BTN arranged in a circle are displayed.
are exploded one by one and switched to the explosion image EX. Here, the first button image BT
N1, the second button image BTN2, the third button image BTN3, the fourth button image BTN4, the fifth button image BTN5, the sixth button image BTN6, the seventh button image BTN7, and the eighth button image BTN8 are sequentially displayed as the first button image BTN2. Explosion image EX1, second explosion image EX2, third explosion image EX
3, 4th explosion image EX4, 5th explosion image EX5, 6th explosion image EX6, 7th explosion image EX
7. The display is switched to the eighth explosion image EX8, and the display disappears from the main display device 7 in order. In this way, the button images BTN are exploded one by one according to the number of operations (presses) of the production button 63. When all the button images BTN are exploded, three decorative patterns are displayed as shown in FIG. 142(J). and then stop display. Here, it is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win. In addition, the decorative pattern may be stop-displayed in a lost mode.

[Operating Image Tilt Display Effect D]
FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining the operation image tilt display effect D. FIG. In the operation image tilt display effect D, first, as shown in FIG.
L and the right sub-display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). During the variable display, the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 displays an opening image OPG with the words "Erase the smile!!!". This opening image OPG is displayed at the start of the game effect to determine whether or not the player can operate the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a variable display of decorative symbols, and the sub-display device 10 may display a pending icon 9A.

As shown in FIG. 143(B), when the game effect is started, a first specific image TG1, a second specific image TG2, and a third specific image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. TG3, a fourth specific image TG4, a fifth specific image TG5, a sixth specific image TG6, and a seventh specific image TG6.
A specific image TG7 and an eighth specific image TG8 are displayed. A specific image is an image representing a specific object, and is a smiling face image here. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, graphics, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all aspects in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the first
.about.8 specific images TG1-TG8 are all the same images, but different images (for example,
smiling face and crying face). The first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed on the main display device 7.
are displayed in a ring on the display screen 7a. When the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed, they are tilted so that the lower side of the face image faces the central position of the arranged rings. In other words, when the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed, the tilts of the images are displayed in different states. After that, as shown in FIG. 143(C), the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are enlarged and displayed while expanding the ring, straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, respectively. The image is rotated left and right so that the tilt of the image changes while maintaining the tilts of the images different from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(D), a switching effect is executed. The switching effect is a effect in which a plurality of specific images TG are switched to button images BTN all at once. Specifically, the first
.about.8 specific images TG1 to TG8 emit light at the same time. Effect image EF6 and seventh effect image EF
7 and an eighth effect image EF8 are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 143(E), when the first to eighth effect images EF1 to EF8 disappear, a first button image BTN1, a second button image BTN2, and a third button image BTN3 are placed in their respective positions. , the fourth button image BTN4, the fifth button image BTN5, the sixth button image BTN6, the seventh button image BTN7, and the eighth button image BTN8 are displayed simultaneously. That is, the 1st to 8th
The specific images TG1 to TG8 emit light at the same time and switch to the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 all at once (simultaneously). The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are images representing the appearance of the effect button 63, respectively, and are the same image here. The 1st to 8th button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed in a ring, straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 . When the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed simultaneously, the inclination of the images is the same as that of the corresponding first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8. Therefore, when the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed at the same time, they are displayed with different inclinations of the images. The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are
The sizes of the images may be different from each other, and the shapes of the images may be different. When the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. Randomly rotates left and right while maintaining different states and moves, and the color of the image changes randomly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(G), the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are again displayed in a ring across the in-display device 7 and the sub-display device 10. An operation prompting image SPG is displayed in the center of the ring with the words "Hit!!". Operation promotion image SPG
is an image for recommending the operation of the effect button 63 to the player, in which the present is the operation effective period of the effect button 63 . When the player operates the production button 63, FIG. 143 (H
) and as shown in FIG. 143(I), the effect of disappearing the button image is executed. The button image disappearing effect is an effect in which a plurality of button images disappear in order on the main display device 7 . Here, the annularly arranged button images BTN are exploded one by one in accordance with the number of operations (presses) of the effect button 63, and switched to the explosion image EX. Here, the first button image BTN1, the second button image BTN2, the third button image BTN3, the fourth button image BTN
4, 5th button image BTN5, 6th button image BTN6, 7th button image BTN7, 8th
The button image BTN8 is, in order, the first explosion image EX1, the second explosion image EX2, the third explosion image EX3, the fourth explosion image EX4, the fifth explosion image EX5, the sixth explosion image EX6, the seventh explosion image EX7, The display is switched to the eighth explosion image EX8, and the display disappears from the main display device 7 in turn. In this way, the button image BTN is set to 1 according to the number of operations (presses) of the production button 63.
Explodes one by one, and when all explode, three decorative symbols are displayed as shown in FIG. 143(J), and then stopped. Here, it is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win. In addition, the decorative pattern may be stop-displayed in a lost mode.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation image tilt display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 140 (E), FIG. 142 (E), FIG.
As shown in E), a display effect in which a plurality of button images BTN are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 can be executed. there is According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 141(C), a plurality of button images (the button image BTN and the select button image SKB) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. A display effect can be executed, and in this display effect, the inclinations of the plurality of button images (the button image BTN and the select button image SKB) are different from each other. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIG. 140 (E), FIG. 142 (E), FIG.
As shown in E), in the display effect, the state in which the plurality of button images BTN are not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is switched all at once to the state in which all the plurality of operation means images are displayed. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, FIGS.
E), as shown in FIGS. 143(C) to (E), in the display effect, from a state in which a plurality of specific images TG are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, all of the plurality of specific images TG are displayed. are switched to the button image BTN all at once. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, in the display effect, the plurality of specific images TG are displayed in a ring. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 to 143, after the display effect, a disappearing effect in which a plurality of button images BTN disappear in order can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 to 143, the disappearance effect is executed in accordance with the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the operation image tilt display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the operation image tilt display presentations C to D in FIGS. 142 and 143, it is assumed that no image is displayed inside the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 arranged in a circle. However, images may be displayed inside the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 arranged in a ring. Then, for example, the image may change when the game is successful.

[Modification 2]
In the operation image tilt display effects A to D, the game effects when the game is successful have been described. Therefore, when the game fails, a different effect may be executed. For example, Figure 142
, if the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 have not all disappeared within a predetermined period of time, the decorative pattern of the losing eye may be stopped and displayed.

[Modification 3]
The number of specific images and button images shown in the operation image tilt display effects A to D is an example, and a different number of specific images and button images may be displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the operation image tilt display effects A to D, the button image disappearing effect may be executed even if the player does not operate the effect button 63 . That is, even if the player does not operate the effect button 63, the button images may be switched to the explosion image EX in order.

[Modification 5]
In the operation image tilt display effects A to D, the operation prompting image SPG may be characters other than "hit!!". For example, the operation prompting image SPG may be "Consecutive hits!!". again,
The opening image OPG may be characters other than "Remove the smile!!!". For example, the opening image OPG may be "Make the mission successful!!!".

[Modification 6]
The contents of the operation image tilt display effects A to D may be combined as appropriate. Also, the operation image tilt display effects A to D may not include some of the described effects, or may be added with other effects.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image representing the operation means;
a display effect in which a plurality of images of the operation means are displayed on the display means;
In the display effect, the tilts of the plurality of operation means images are different from each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
In the display effect, a state in which the plurality of operation means images are not displayed on the display means is simultaneously switched to a state in which all the plurality of operation means images are displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2,
one of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific target;
In the display effect, from a state in which the plurality of specific images are displayed on the display means, all of the plurality of specific images are switched to the operation means image all at once.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-3,
In the display effect, the plurality of operating means images are displayed in a ring.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-4,
capable of executing a disappearing effect in which the plurality of operating means images disappear in order after the display effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-5,
The disappearance effect is executed in accordance with the operation of the operation means by the player,
A gaming machine characterized by:

144 to 147, decorative design button stop effects A to D will be described below.
This decorative pattern button stop effect can be executed during a decorative pattern variation effect. i.e.
The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the character display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a, left side. Sub display device 10L, right sub display device 10R
, to display an image on the illumination panel 18 or the like. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10 .

[Decorative pattern button stop effect A]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop effect A. FIG. In the decorative symbol button stop effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 144(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern variation production, the hold icon 9A
and a pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(B), button display effect 1 is performed. In the button display effect 1, the button image ZF representing the effect button 63 is displayed while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are changing
1 is displayed. This button image ZF1 is the decorative design 8 so as to correspond to the decorative design 8L.
It is displayed at a position above the variation area of L. As a result, the player can understand that the button image ZF1 and the decorative pattern 8L are associated with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(C), button depression effect 1 is performed. In this button pressing effect 1, the decoration pattern 8L is stop-displayed on the reach line LN based on the pressing of the effect button 63 by the player who saw the button image ZF1. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8L is
"6 symbols" are stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(D), button display effect 2 is performed. In this button display effect 2, the button image ZF1 representing the effect button 63 is displayed while the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are changing.
is displayed again. This button image ZF1 is displayed at a position on the variable area of the decorative design 8C so as to be associated with the decorative design 8C. Thereby, the player can understand that the button image ZF1 and the decoration pattern 8C are associated with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(E), button pressing effect 2 is performed. In this button pressing effect 2, the decoration pattern 8C is stop-displayed based on the pressing of the effect button 63 by the player who saw the button image ZF1. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" are stopped and displayed as the decorative symbols 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(F), button display effect 3 is performed. In this button display effect 3, the button image ZF1 representing the effect button 63 is displayed again while the decorative pattern 8R is changing. This button image ZF1 is displayed at the position of the variable area on the decorative design 8C so as to be associated with the decorative design 8R. Thereby, the player can understand that the button image ZF1 and the decorative pattern 8R are associated with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(G), button depression effect 3 is performed. In this button pressing effect 3, the decoration pattern 8R is stop-displayed based on the fact that the player who has seen the button image ZF1 presses the effect button 63. - 特許庁In this case, the decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed so as to be aligned with the decorative pattern 8C at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" are stopped and displayed as the decorative symbols 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(H), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in the same pattern (7 patterns in the figure) on the ready-to-win line LN, and the ready-to-win display is performed in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. In this ready-to-win effect, the character CRZE performs various effects.
After this ready-to-win effect, a losing pattern display and a big hit pattern display are performed.

[Decorative pattern button stop effect B]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop effect B. FIG. In the decorative symbol button stop effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 145(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern variation production, the hold icon 9A
and a pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(B), button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three button images ZF1, ZF2 and ZF3 representing the effect button 63 are displayed while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are changing. The button image ZF1 is displayed at a position above the variable area of the decorative design 8L so as to be associated with the decorative design 8L. The button image ZF2 is displayed at a position above the variable area of the decorative design 8C so as to be associated with the decorative design 8C. The button image ZF3 is displayed at a position above the variable area of the decorative design 8R so as to be associated with the decorative design 8R. As a result, the player associates the button image ZF1 with the decorative design 8L, associates the button image ZF2 with the decorative design 8C, and associates the button image ZF3 with the decorative design 8R.
It can be seen that is associated with

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(C), button depression effect 1 is performed. In this button pressing effect 1, the decoration pattern 8L is stop-displayed on the reach line LN based on the pressing of the effect button 63 by the player who saw the button image ZF1. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8L is
"6 symbols" are stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(D), button display effect 2 is performed. In this button display effect 2, the button image ZF2 and the button image ZF3 are continuously displayed on the variation area of the decorative patterns 8C and 8R while the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(E), button pressing effect 2 is performed. In this button pressing effect 2, the decoration pattern 8C is stopped and displayed based on the fact that the player who has seen the button image ZF2 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" are stopped and displayed as the decorative symbols 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(F), button display effect 3 is performed. In this button display effect 3, while the decorative pattern 8R is changing, the button image ZF3 representing the effect button 63 is continuously displayed on the variable area of the decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(G), button depression effect 3 is performed. In this button pressing effect 3, the decoration pattern 8R is stop-displayed based on the fact that the player who has seen the button image ZF3 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed so as to be aligned with the decorative pattern 8C at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" are stopped and displayed as the decorative symbols 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(H), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in the same pattern (7 patterns in the figure) on the ready-to-win line LN, and the ready-to-win display is performed in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. In this ready-to-win effect, the character CRZE performs various effects.
After this ready-to-win effect, a losing pattern display and a big hit pattern display are performed.

[Decorative pattern button stop effect C]
FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop effect C. FIG. In the decorative symbol button stop effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 146(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern variation production, the hold icon 9A
and a pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(B), button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three button images ZF1, ZF2 and ZF3 representing the effect button 63 are displayed while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are changing. The button image ZF1 is displayed on the variable area of the decorative design 8L so as to be associated with the decorative design 8L. The button image ZF2 has a decorative pattern 8
It is displayed on the variable area of the decorative pattern 8C so as to correspond to C. The button image ZF3 is displayed on the variable area of the decorative design 8R so as to be associated with the decorative design 8R. These
The player understands that the button image ZF1 is associated with the decorative design 8L, the button image ZF2 is associated with the decorative design 8C, and the button image ZF3 is associated with the decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(C), button pressing effect 1 is performed. In this button pressing effect 1, the decoration pattern 8L is stop-displayed on the reach line LN based on the pressing of the effect button 63 by the player who saw the button image ZF1. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8L is
"6 symbols" are stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(D), button display effect 2 is performed. In this button display effect 2, the button image ZF2 and the button image ZF3 are continuously displayed on the variable areas of the decorative patterns 8C and 8R while the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(E), button depression effect 2 is performed. In this button pressing effect 2, the decoration pattern 8C is stopped and displayed based on the fact that the player who has seen the button image ZF2 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" are stopped and displayed as the decorative symbols 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(F), button display effect 3 is performed. In this button display effect 3, while the decorative pattern 8R is changing, the button image ZF3 representing the effect button 63 is continuously displayed on the variable area of the decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(G), button depression effect 3 is performed. In this button pressing effect 3, the decoration pattern 8R is stop-displayed based on the fact that the player who has seen the button image ZF3 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed so as to be aligned with the decorative pattern 8C at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" are stopped and displayed as the decorative symbols 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(H), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in the same pattern (7 patterns in the figure) on the ready-to-win line LN, and the ready-to-win display is performed in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. In this ready-to-win effect, the character CRZE performs various effects.
After this ready-to-win effect, a losing pattern display and a big hit pattern display are performed.

[Decorative pattern button stop effect D]
FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop effect D. FIG. In the decorative symbol button stop effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 147(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern variation production, the hold icon 9A
and a pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These suspension icons 9A and 9C are white suspension icons without patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(B), button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three button images ZF4, ZF5 and ZF6 representing the effect button 63 are displayed while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are changing. The button image ZF4 includes a stop order suggestion display and is displayed on the variable area of the decorative design 8L so as to be associated with the decorative design 8L. The button image ZF5 includes a stop order suggestion display and is displayed on the variable area of the decorative design 8C so as to be associated with the decorative design 8C. The button image ZF6 includes a stop order suggestion display and is displayed on the variable area of the decorative design 8R so as to be associated with the decorative design 8R. As a result, the player can understand that the button image ZF1 is associated with the decorative pattern 8L, the button image ZF2 is associated with the decorative pattern 8C, and the button image ZF3 is associated with the decorative pattern 8R. . Further, the stop order suggesting display of the button image ZF4 is displayed as "1", the stop order suggesting display of the button image ZF5 is displayed as "2", and the stop order suggesting display of the button image ZF6 is displayed as "3". Is displayed. The stop order suggestion display "1" of the button image ZF4 indicates that when the production button 63 is pressed, the corresponding decorative pattern 8L among the varying decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is stopped and displayed. The stop order suggesting display "2" of the button image ZF5 indicates that when the production button 63 is pressed, the corresponding decorative pattern 8C among the fluctuating decorative patterns 8C and 8R is stopped and displayed. The stop order suggestion display "see" of ZF5 indicates that when the production button 63 is pressed, the corresponding decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed. That is, the stop order suggestion display of the button images ZF4, ZF5 and ZF6 indicates the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R when the production button 63 is pressed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(C), button depression effect 1 is performed. In this button pressing effect 1, the decoration pattern 8L is stop-displayed on the reach line LN based on the pressing of the effect button 63 by the player who saw the button image ZF4. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8L is
"6 symbols" are stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(D), button display effect 2 is performed. In this button display effect 2, the button image ZF5 and the button image ZF6 are continuously displayed on the variable area of the decorative patterns 8C and 8R while the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are fluctuating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(E), button depression effect 2 is performed. In this button pressing effect 2, the decoration pattern 8C is stopped and displayed based on the fact that the player who has seen the button image ZF5 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" are stopped and displayed as the decorative symbols 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(F), button display effect 3 is performed. In this button display effect 3, while the decorative pattern 8R is changing, the button image ZF6 representing the effect button 63 is continuously displayed on the variable area of the decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(G), button depression effect 3 is performed. In this button pressing effect 3, the decoration pattern 8R is stop-displayed based on the fact that the player who has seen the button image ZF6 presses the effect button 63. - 特許庁In this case, the decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed so as to be aligned with the decorative pattern 8C at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 symbols" are stopped and displayed as the decorative symbols 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(H), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in the same pattern (7 patterns in the figure) on the ready-to-win line LN, and the ready-to-win display is performed in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. In this ready-to-win effect, the character CRZE performs various effects.
After this ready-to-win effect, a losing pattern display and a big hit pattern display are performed.

The decorative pattern button stop effect is performed in the same variation. Note that the decorative symbol button stop effect may be divided into a plurality of variations instead of the same variation. For example, in the decorative pattern button stop effect D, button display effect 1 and button pressing effect 1 are the first variation, button display effect 2 and button pressing effect 2 are the second variation, button display effect 3 and button pressing effect 3. may be performed with the third variation. Further, the decorative pattern button stop effect may be a predetermined effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a look-ahead effect. Further, in the decorative symbol button stop effect, the stop mode of the decorative symbol stopped in the button pressing effect 3 may be a chance (chance up display) for increasing the expectation of the big win.

[Modification]
In the decorative pattern button stop effect, when the effect button 63 is pressed once, the decorative patterns 8L, 8
C and 8R may be stopped simultaneously.
The decorative pattern button stop effect may be continuously performed with a plurality of variations. For example, the decorative pattern button stop effect D may be performed in the first variation, the next second variation, the next third variation, and so on. In this case, it is also possible to change the stop order suggestion display of the button images associated with the decorative patterns, and to change the order of the decorative patterns to be stopped among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R when the production button 63 is pressed. good. For example, in the first variation, the button image ZF4 is associated with the decorative design 8L, the button image ZF5 is associated with the decorative design 8C, the button image ZF6 is associated with the decorative design 8R, and the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are associated. The order of stopping is set to decorative pattern 8L→decorative pattern 8C→decorative pattern 8R. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R may be stopped in the order of the decorative pattern 8C→the decorative pattern 8R→the decorative pattern 8L in association with the button image ZF6.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative design button stop effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the decorative pattern button stop effect, when the effect of displaying the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is being performed, the effect of displaying the button image is performed, and then the effect button 6 is performed.
3 is operated, at least one of the changing decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can stop the variation of the decorative symbols, so that the player can enjoy the variation effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the decorative pattern button stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are decorative pattern groups consisting of a large number of decorative patterns, respectively, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that are being changed by operating the production button 63. stop displaying at least one of the decoration patterns. According to this configuration, the player can stop the variation of the decorative symbols, so that the player can enjoy the variation effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the decorative pattern button stop effects B to D, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable manner, the button image ZF1, the button image ZF2, and the button image ZF3 are displayed, and then the production button 63 is operated. As a result, one of the decorative symbols 8L and/or the decorative symbols 8C is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can stop the variation of the decorative symbols, so that the player can enjoy the variation effect. resulting in,
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the decorative pattern button stop effects B to D, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable manner, the button image ZF1, the button image ZF2, and the button image ZF3 are displayed, and then the production button 63 is operated. By doing so, one of the decorative patterns 8L is stop-displayed, and after that, by further operating the performance button 63, one of the decorative patterns 8C is stop-displayed. According to this configuration, the player can stop the variation of the decorative symbols one by one, so that the player can enjoy the variable effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the decorative pattern button stop effect D, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable manner, the button image ZF4, the button image ZF5, and the button image ZF6 are displayed. An image is included, and each time the performance button 63 is operated, the variation of the decoration pattern associated with the button image including the stop order suggesting image stops in the order based on the stop order suggesting image. According to this configuration, the player can stop the decorative patterns one by one in the state that the order of stopping the decorative patterns is known, so that the player can enjoy the variable presentation. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZF-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and operation means operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of variably displaying a plurality of decorative patterns,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying a first operation means image representing the operation means,
The third display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying at least one of the plurality of decorative symbols being variably displayed in the first display effect,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, and then the third display effect is performed by operating the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZF-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZF-1,
The plurality of decorative designs include a first decorative design group and a second decorative design group,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, one decorative pattern out of the first decorative pattern group is stopped and displayed by operating the operation means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZF-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZF-2,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of displaying a second operation means image representing the operation means,
The fifth display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying at least one decorative pattern in the second decorative pattern group that is being variably displayed in the first display effect,
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, and the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, and then the fifth display effect is performed by operating the operating means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZF-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZF-3,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, and the fourth display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed. , after the second display effect and the fourth display effect, the third display effect is performed by operating the operation means, and after the third display effect, the operation means is operated again; The fifth display effect is performed by being operated,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZF-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZF-4,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display effect is a effect of displaying a first stopping order suggesting image and a second stopping order suggesting image,
The first stop order suggesting image is associated with the first operation means image in the second display effect, and when the operation means is operated, the first one of the plurality of decorative symbols is displayed. an image suggesting that the decorative pattern of the decorative pattern group is stopped and displayed before the second decorative pattern group;
The second stop order suggesting image is associated with the second operation means image in the fourth display effect, and when the operation means is operated, the second one of the plurality of decorative symbols is displayed. an image suggesting that the decorative pattern of the decorative pattern group is stopped and displayed after the decorative pattern of the first decorative pattern group;
When the combination effect includes the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, the fifth display effect, and the sixth display effect there is
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed while the second display effect and the fourth display effect are being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Note that the above aspect may be modified as follows.
○ The first operating means image is on the variation line of the first decorative pattern group. The second operating means image is on the variation line of the second decorative pattern group.
○ The stop order of the first decorative pattern group and the second decorative pattern group changes when fluctuation changes.
○ The stop positions of the decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol group and the decorative symbols of the second decorative symbol group are deviated from the reach line. The decorative design of the first decorative design group and the decorative design of the second decorative design group are the same design.
○Combination effect is performed during pseudo-continuous effect.
The stop display mode of the decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol group and the decorative symbols of the second decorative symbol group is the chance up mode.
○ Performed with the same variation.

The icon display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. FIG. This icon display effect can be executed, for example, during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the character display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. , the left sub-display device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R, the illumination panel 18, and the like. Note that the illumination panel 18
is a transparent display panel, which is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10 .

[Icon display effect A]
148 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect A. FIG. In the icon effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 148(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These hold icons 9A, 9C
is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(B), an icon appearance effect is performed. In this icon appearance effect, four icons ZG1, two icons ZG2, and one icon ZG
3 is displayed. The icon ZG1 includes the character "pseudo" suggesting a pseudo continuous effect and a first character. The icon ZG2 includes the characters "SP" suggesting a super ready-to-win effect and a second character different from the first character. The icon ZG3 includes the character "hit" suggesting a big win and a third character different from the first character and the second character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(C), icon formation effect 1 is performed. In this icon formation effect 1, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a first formation. Specifically, a plurality of icons ZG1,
ZG2 and ZG3 are arranged circularly. At this time, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, Z
G3 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(D), icon formation effect 2 is performed. In this icon formation effect 2, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 form a second formation from the first formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are arranged in an "H" shape with an interval between the icons. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(E), an icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, Z arranged in the second formation
This is an effect of selecting one icon from G3. The figure shows that the icon ZG2 is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(F), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in the same pattern (7 patterns in the figure) on the ready-to-win line LN, and the ready-to-win display is performed in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. In this ready-to-win effect, the character CRZG performs various effects. This character CRZG is the icon Z
It corresponds to the second character included in G2.
After this ready-to-win effect, a losing pattern display and a big hit pattern display are performed.

[Icon display effect B]
149 is a diagram for explaining icon display effect B. FIG. In the icon effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 149(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These hold icons 9A, 9C
is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(B), an icon appearance effect is performed. In this icon appearance effect, a plurality of icons (four icons ZG1, two icons ZG2, and one
The two icons ZG3) appear (display) one by one on the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10). The icon ZG1 includes the character "pseudo" suggesting a pseudo continuous effect and a first character. The icon ZG2 includes the characters "SP" suggesting a super ready-to-win effect and a second character different from the first character. The icon ZG3 includes the character "hit" suggesting a big win and a third character different from the first character and the second character. Plural icons ZG1, ZG2
, ZG3 appear on the display screen 7a from around the upper right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(C), icon formation effect 1 is performed. In this icon formation effect 1, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a first formation. Specifically, a plurality of icons ZG1,
ZG2 and ZG3 are arranged with a circular space between the icons. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(D), icon formation effect 2 is performed. In this icon formation effect 2, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 form a second formation from the first formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in an "H" shape with a gap between the icons. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(E), icon exit/appearance is performed. In this icon exit exit, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 in a second formation state
is an effect of exiting from the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10) one by one, and all of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are exited. The drawing shows that three icons ZG1 have exited and the icon ZG1 is about to exit. A plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 exit from the upper right area of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(F), an icon reappearance effect is performed. In this icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 that have exited the display device
It is a production that appears on the display device again. In this case, in the icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are enlarged from the right side of the display screen 7a, appear on the display screen 7a one by one, and move slowly to the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, in the icon reappearance effect, a button image ZG4 representing the effect button 63 is displayed near the approximate center of the display screen 7a. A plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 move behind (back side) of button image ZG4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(G), an icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 reappearing in the icon reappearance effect
This is an effect of selecting one icon that moves slowly on the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the player who sees the button image ZG4 in the icon reappearance effect presses the effect button 63, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, Z reappeared in the icon reappearance effect are displayed.
Select one icon in G3. In this case, when the effect button 63 is pressed, the icon located behind the button image ZG4 (overlapping the button image ZG4) is selected. However, without being limited to this, an icon may be selected at random when the effect button 63 is pressed. The figure shows that the icon ZG2 is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(H), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in the same pattern (7 patterns in the figure) on the ready-to-win line LN, and the ready-to-win display is performed in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. In this ready-to-win effect, the character CRZG performs various effects. This character CRZG is the icon Z
It corresponds to the second character included in G2.
After this ready-to-win effect, a losing pattern display and a big hit pattern display are performed.

[Icon display effect C]
FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect C. FIG. In the icon effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 150(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These hold icons 9A, 9C
is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(B), an icon appearance effect is performed. In this icon appearance effect, a plurality of icons (four icons ZG1, two icons ZG2, and one
The two icons ZG3) appear (display) one by one on the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10). The icon ZG1 includes the character "pseudo" suggesting a pseudo continuous effect and a first character. The icon ZG2 includes the characters "SP" suggesting a super ready-to-win effect and a second character different from the first character. The icon ZG3 includes the character "hit" suggesting a big win and a third character different from the first character and the second character. Plural icons ZG1, ZG2
, ZG3 appear on the display screen 7a from around the upper right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(C), icon formation effect 1 is performed. In this icon formation effect 1, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a first formation. Specifically, a plurality of icons ZG1,
ZG2 and ZG3 are arranged so as to overlap (contact with) adjacent icons in a circular shape. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(D), icon formation effect 2 is performed. In this icon formation effect 2, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 form a second formation from the first formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in an "H" shape so as to overlap adjacent icons (in contact with adjacent icons). At this time, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG
2, ZG3 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(E), icon exit/appearance is performed. In this icon exit exit, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 in a second formation state
is an effect of exiting from the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10) one by one, and all of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are exited. The drawing shows that three icons ZG1 have exited and the icon ZG1 is about to exit. A plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 exit from the upper right area of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(F), an icon reappearance effect is performed. In this icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 that have exited the display device
It is a production that appears on the display device again. In this case, in the icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are enlarged from the right side of the display screen 7a, appear on the display screen 7a one by one, and move slowly to the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, in the icon reappearance effect, a button image ZG4 representing the effect button 63 is displayed near the approximate center of the display screen 7a. A plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 move behind (back side) of button image ZG4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(G), an icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 reappearing in the icon reappearance effect
This is an effect of selecting one icon that moves slowly on the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the player who sees the button image ZG4 in the icon reappearance effect presses the effect button 63, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, Z reappeared in the icon reappearance effect are displayed.
Select one icon in G3. In this case, when the effect button 63 is pressed, the icon located behind the button image ZG4 (overlapping the button image ZG4) is selected. However, without being limited to this, an icon may be selected at random when the effect button 63 is pressed. The figure shows that the icon ZG2 is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(H), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in the same pattern (7 patterns in the figure) on the ready-to-win line LN, and the ready-to-win display is performed in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. In this ready-to-win effect, the character CRZG performs various effects. This character CRZG is the icon Z
It corresponds to the second character included in G2.
After this ready-to-win effect, a losing pattern display and a big hit pattern display are performed.

[Icon display effect D]
FIG. 151 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect D. FIG. In the icon effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 151(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These hold icons 9A, 9C
is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(B), an icon appearance effect is performed. In this icon appearance effect, a plurality of icons (four icons ZG1, two icons ZG2, and one
The two icons ZG3) appear (display) one by one on the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10). The icon ZG1 includes the character "pseudo" suggesting a pseudo continuous effect and a first character. The icon ZG2 includes the characters "SP" suggesting a super ready-to-win effect and a second character different from the first character. The icon ZG3 includes the character "hit" suggesting a big win and a third character different from the first character and the second character. Plural icons ZG1, ZG2
, ZG3 appear on the display screen 7a from around the upper right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(C), icon formation effect 1 is performed. In this icon formation effect 1, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a first formation. Specifically, a plurality of icons ZG1,
ZG2 and ZG3 are arranged so as to overlap (contact with) adjacent icons in a circular shape. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are moving (rotating) counterclockwise. Note that the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 may be moved clockwise, or may be moved so that the size of the formation (the diameter of the circle) increases while maintaining the circular shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(D), icon formation effect 2 is performed. In this icon formation effect 2, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 form a second formation from the first formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are arranged in an "H" shape so as to overlap adjacent icons (in contact with adjacent icons). At this time, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG
2. ZG3 may move (rotate) counterclockwise, or may move so as to increase the size of the formation while maintaining the H shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(E), icon exit/appearance is performed. In this icon exit exit, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 in a second formation state
is an effect of exiting from the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10) one by one, and all of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are exited. The drawing shows that three icons ZG1 have exited and the icon ZG1 is about to exit. A plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 exit from the upper right area of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(F), an icon reappearance effect is performed. In this icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 that have exited the display device
It is a production that appears on the display device again. In this case, in the icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are enlarged from the right side of the display screen 7a, appear on the display screen 7a one by one, and move slowly to the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, in the icon reappearance effect, a button image ZG4 representing the effect button 63 is displayed near the approximate center of the display screen 7a. A plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 move behind (back side) of button image ZG4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(G), an icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 reappearing in the icon reappearance effect
This is an effect of selecting one icon that moves slowly on the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the player who sees the button image ZG4 in the icon reappearance effect presses the effect button 63, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, Z reappeared in the icon reappearance effect are displayed.
Select one icon in G3. In this case, when the effect button 63 is pressed, the icon located behind the button image ZG4 (overlapping the button image ZG4) is selected. However, without being limited to this, an icon may be selected at random when the effect button 63 is pressed. The figure shows that the icon ZG2 is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(H), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in the same pattern (7 patterns in the figure) on the ready-to-win line LN, and the ready-to-win display is performed in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. In this ready-to-win effect, the character CRZG performs various effects. This character CRZG is the icon Z
It corresponds to the second character included in G2.
After this ready-to-win effect, a losing pattern display and a big hit pattern display are performed.

[Modification]
In the above icon display effect, each of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 includes a character and a letter suggesting subsequent development, but in addition to these, the degree of expectation for a big win may be added.
In the icon display effects B to D, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 have substantially the same positions in the display device during the icon appearance effect and the positions in which the icon exits and exits, but they are different. good too.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the icon display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the icon display effect, in the icon appearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG, ZG2, ZG
After the effect of displaying 3 is performed, the effect of forming the first formation of the plurality of icons ZG, ZG2, and ZG3 is performed, and then the plurality of icons ZG, ZG2, and ZG is displayed.
An effect is performed in which 3 form the second formation. According to this configuration, since the plurality of icons form two formations in order, it is possible to improve interest in the icon presentation without getting tired of the icon presentation. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the icon display effects B to D, in the icon appearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1
, ZG2 and ZG3 appear one by one, and a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2 and ZG3 are displayed. According to this configuration, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 can be recognized one by one, so that the attraction of the icon presentation can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the icon display effect D, in the icon formation effect, a formation is formed such that a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 overlap each other.
According to this configuration, gaps between the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are suppressed.
It is possible to make it easier to recognize the outer shape of the formation to be formed, and it is possible to improve the attraction of the icon presentation. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the icon display effect D, in the icon formation effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 form a formation and move within the formation. According to this configuration, the formation formed by the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 can move, so that the entertainment of the formation presentation can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above icon display effects B to D, the display device (main display device 7
, sub-display device 10), after the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 form a formation, these plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 exit the display device one by one. According to this configuration, it is possible to recognize the exit of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 one by one, so that the attraction of the icon presentation can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZG-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a plurality of icons,
the second display effect is a effect in which the plurality of icons form a first formation;
the third display effect is a effect in which the plurality of icons form a second formation;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, after the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and after the second display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZG-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZG-1,
The first display effect is a effect in which the plurality of icons appear one by one on the display means from outside the display means and the plurality of icons are displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZG-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZG-1 or aspect ZG-2,
In the second display effect or the third display effect, the plurality of icons are
forming said formations on top of each other;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZG-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZG-1 to ZG-3,
In the second display effect or the third display effect, the plurality of icons are
moving within the formation while forming the formation;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZG-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZG-1 to ZG-4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the fourth display effect is a effect in which the plurality of icons exit one by one from the display means to the outside of the display means;
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Note that the above aspect may be modified as follows.
○ After the fourth display effect, the plurality of icons that have exited the display means reappear one by one on the display means.
○ The icon that has exited the display means in the fourth display effect returns to the display means in the direction opposite to the exit direction. You may return from the same position as the exit position. In this case, the icon returned to the display means may be enlarged and displayed. Also, an icon returned to the display means or an operating means image representing the operating means may be displayed on the variation line of the decorative pattern. Alternatively, an icon corresponding to the operation means image may be selected by operating the operation means, and an effect corresponding to the selected icon (such as a ready-to-win effect using a character of the icon) may be performed.

152 to 155, the effect execution confirmation effects A to D will be described below. Effect execution confirmation effects A to D can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the effect execution confirmation effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display is performed. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7 and the display screen of the sub-display device 10. FIG.

[Production execution confirmation production A]
FIG. 152 is a diagram for explaining the effect execution confirmation effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 152(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at retracted positions (home positions).
It is in. A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. there is on the other hand,
The pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(B), a preview image appearance effect is executed. In this preview image appearance effect, a hexagonal effect preview image PNG with "Continue" written inside is displayed on the display screen 7a. What this effect preview image PNG suggests is a pseudo-continuous effect. "NEXT" may be used instead of "continue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(C), the preview image moving effect is executed. In this preview image moving effect, the effect preview image PNG rolls and moves in the end area of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in FIG. 152(D), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "2". Also, the effect preview image PNG rolls and moves in the end area of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(E), an execution confirmation effect is executed. In the execution confirmation production,
As indicated by arrow YG3, effect preview image PNG rolls across the edge area of display screen 7a and moves from display screen 7a to the display screen of left sub-display device 10L. At this time, the background of the effect preview image PNG turns red on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. At this time, the pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 152(F), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the middle effect pattern 8C is stopped with the special pattern "continue". Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "2", the middle effect symbol 8C is "continuation", and the right effect symbol 8R is "2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(G), a re-variation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation production is a production in which the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R start to fluctuate again, and here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are shown to be variably displayed. .
Next, as shown in FIG. 152(H), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7".

[Production execution confirmation production B]
FIG. 153 is a diagram for explaining the effect execution confirmation effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 153(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at retracted positions (home positions).
It is in. A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. there is on the other hand,
The pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(B), a preview image appearance effect is executed. In this preview image appearance effect, a hexagonal effect preview image PNG with "Continue" written inside is displayed on the display screen 7a. What this effect preview image PNG suggests is a pseudo-continuous effect. "NEXT" may be used instead of "continue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(C), the preview image movement effect is executed. In this preview image moving effect, the effect preview image PNG rolls and moves in the end area of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153(D), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "2". Also, the effect preview image PNG rolls and moves in the end area of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(E), a preview image disappearing effect is executed. The preview image disappearing effect is an effect in which the effect preview image PNG disappears outside the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG3.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153(F), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. This confirmation stop effect (loss) is an effect for fixing and stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display device 7a. Here, both the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped at "2", and the middle effect pattern 8C is stopped at "1". It should be noted that the display of the reserved image 9C disappears as the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

[Effect execution confirmation effect C]
FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining the effect execution confirmation effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 154(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at retracted positions (home positions).
It is in. A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. there is on the other hand,
The pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(B), a preview image appearance effect is executed. In this preview image appearance effect, a hexagonal effect preview image PNG with "Continue" written inside is displayed on the display screen 7a. What this effect preview image PNG suggests is a pseudo-continuous effect. "NEXT" may be used instead of "continue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(C), the preview image movement effect is executed. In this preview image moving effect, the effect preview image PNG rolls and moves in the end area of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in FIG. 154(D), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "2". Also, the effect preview image PNG rolls and moves in the end area of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(E), a preview image disappearing effect is executed. The preview image disappearing effect is an effect in which the effect preview image PNG disappears outside the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG3.
Next, as shown in FIG. 154(F), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the middle effect pattern 8C is stopped with the special pattern "continue". Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "2", the middle effect symbol 8C is "continuation", and the right effect symbol 8R is "2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(G), a re-variation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation production is a production in which the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R start to fluctuate again, and here, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are shown to be variably displayed. .
Next, as shown in FIG. 154(H), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7".

[Effect execution confirmation effect D]
FIG. 155 is a diagram for explaining the effect execution confirmation effect D. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 155(A), a variable start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R are at retracted positions (home positions).
It is in. A pending image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. there is on the other hand,
The pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R. The pending image 9C corresponds to the current variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(B), a preview image appearance effect is executed. In this preview image appearance effect, a hexagonal effect preview image PNG with "SP" written inside is displayed on the display screen 7a. What this effect preview image PNG suggests is the SP ready-to-win effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(C), the preview image movement effect is executed. In this preview image moving effect, the effect preview image PNG rolls and moves in the end area of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in FIG. 155(D), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "2". Also, the effect preview image PNG rolls and moves in the end area of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(E), an execution confirmation effect is executed. In the execution confirmation production,
As indicated by arrow YG3, effect preview image PNG rolls across the edge area of display screen 7a and moves from display screen 7a to the display screen of left sub-display device 10L. At this time, the background of the effect preview image PNG turns red on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. The pending image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. FIG.
Next, as shown in FIG. 155(F), a reach development effect is executed. In this reach development effect, the message image MSG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the message image MSG is "development".

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(G), a battle effect is executed. This battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Ally character C here
When RA wins, the expectation of a big win is high. In this battle effect, the image of the portion covered by the sub-display device 10 among the images displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10. FIG. Here, the feet of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device 10 . Therefore, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7 of the main display device 7.
a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big win) is a effect of fixing and stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the arrangement of the big win on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "2"
is stopped at The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L. Further, the display of the reserved image 9C disappears with the finalization and stoppage of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the effect execution confirmation effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after the effect preview image PNG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the effect preview image PNG moves to the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L.
Execution of the production suggested by is determined (Fig. 152 (B) ~ (E), Figure 155 (B) ~ (E))
. According to this configuration, since the whereabouts of the effect preview image PNG makes the player's heart pound, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the effect preview image PNG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the end area of the display screen 7a is moved (FIGS. 152(C) and (D), FIGS. 153(C) and (D)). , FIGS. 154(C)(D), 155(C)(D)). According to this configuration, the effect preview image PNG
Since the whereabouts of the game is thrilling, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect preview image PNG moves along a predetermined route on the display screen 7a (FIGS. 152(C)(D), 153(C)(D), 154(C) )(D
), FIGS. 155(C)(D)). According to this configuration, the behavior of the effect preview image PNG can be easily understood, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect is performed using the effect preview image PNG for notifying the effect to be executed later (FIGS. 152(B), 153(B), 154(B), 155(B)
)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the effects to be executed later, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the effect preview image disappears outside the display screen 7a without moving to the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L (
FIG. 153(E)), in principle, non-execution of the effect indicated by the effect preview image PNG is determined. According to this configuration, since the whereabouts of the effect preview image PNG makes the player's heart pound, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the effect preview image PNG moves to the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, the background of the effect preview image PNG turns red on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L (see FIG. 152 ( E), FIG. 155(E)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the confirmation of the execution of the effect suggested by the effect preview image PNG, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the production|presentation execution confirmation production|presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, the effect preview image PNG that suggests the effect to be executed later is used, but an image that is not directly related to the subsequent effect (for example, a message image such as "Extremely hot") may be used.

[Modification 2]
In the above description, the effect preview image PNG moves along a predetermined route on the display screen 7a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the effect preview image is an image like a balloon, it may be made to float on the display screen 7a.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E2-1]
a first display device capable of displaying an image and producing an effect;
A gaming machine comprising a second display device different from the first display device,
After the predetermined image is displayed on the display screen of the first display device, execution of the specific effect is determined by moving the predetermined image from the display screen of the first display device to the display screen of the second display device. A game machine characterized by

[Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1,
A gaming machine, wherein after displaying a predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device, the predetermined image is moved on the display screen of the first display device.

[Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-2,
The game machine, wherein the predetermined image moves along a predetermined route on the display screen of the first display device.

[Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-3,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined image is a preview image for notifying execution of the specific effect.

[Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the predetermined image does not move from the first display device to the second display device, in principle, it is determined that the specific effect is not to be executed.

[Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-5,
A game machine, wherein when the predetermined image moves from the display screen of the first display device to the display screen of the second display device, an execution confirmation effect is performed on the display screen of the second display device.

[Aspect E2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-6,
It is possible to display a pending image corresponding to pending storage using the display screen of the second display device,
A gaming machine characterized by displaying the pending image on a display device other than the second display device while the execution confirmation effect is being executed.

[Aspect E2-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-7,
Even if the predetermined image does not move from the first display device to the second display device,
A gaming machine characterized in that execution of the specific effect may be determined.

The reach development selection effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 156 to 159. FIG. This reach development selection effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the character display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. , the left sub-display device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R, the illumination panel 18, and the like. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10 .

[Reach development selection effect A]
FIG. 156 is a diagram for explaining reach development selection effect A. FIG. Reach development selection production A
Then, first, as shown in FIG. 156(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9
A and 9C are white pending icons with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(B), reach selection effect 1 is performed. In this ready-to-win selection effect 1, a first area formed from three ready-to-win effect selecting areas (a ready-to-win effect selecting area ZH1, a ready-to-win effect selecting area ZH2, and a ready-to-win effect selecting area ZH3) is displayed. The ready-to-win effect selection areas ZH1, ZH2, ZH3 are circular and arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection area ZH1 includes characters "A reach". The characters "A reach" suggest that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH1 is selected, A-to reach is performed in the ready-to-win effect. The reach effect selection area ZH2 includes characters "B reach". The character "B reach" suggests that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH2 is selected, the ready-to-win effect is performed by the B-reach. The reach effect selection area ZH3 includes characters "C reach". The characters "C reach" suggest that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH3 is selected, the C-to-win effect is performed in the ready-to-win effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(C), reach selection effect 2 is performed. In this ready-to-win selection effect 2, a second area formed from three ready-to-win effect selecting areas (a ready-to-win effect selecting area ZH1A, a ready-to-win effect selecting area ZH2A, and a ready-to-win effect selecting area ZH3A) is displayed. The ready-to-win effect selection areas ZH1A, ZH2A, ZH3A are rectangular and arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection areas ZH1A, ZH2A, and ZH3A correspond to the reach effect selection areas ZH1, ZH2, and ZH3 of the first area, respectively, and the corresponding reach effect selection areas Z
Greater than H1, ZH2, ZH3. The second area is therefore larger than the first area.
The ready-to-win effect selection area ZH1A is an area corresponding to the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH1 of the first area, and includes characters "A reach". The characters "A reach" suggest that A reach is performed in the ready reach effect when the ready reach effect selection area ZH1A is selected. The reach effect selection area ZH2A is the reach effect selection area ZH of the first area.
2 and includes the letters "B reach". The characters "B reach" suggest that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH2A is selected, the ready-to-win effect is performed in the B-reach. The ready-to-win effect selection area ZH3A is an area corresponding to the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH3 of the first area, and includes characters "C reach". The characters "C reach" suggest that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH3A is selected, the C-to-win effect is performed in the ready-to-win effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(D), a ready-to-win determination effect is performed. This ready-to-reach determination effect is a effect of determining (selecting) one area from among the second areas. In the drawing, the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH2A is indicated by hatching, and a state in which the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH2A is selected is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(E), in this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in the same pattern (7 patterns in the drawing) on the reach line LN, and the decorative pattern 8C is displayed.
A reach display is performed in which the is fluctuating at high speed. In this ready-to-win effect, the character CRZH performs various effects.
After this ready-to-win effect, a losing pattern display and a big hit pattern display are performed.

[Reach development selection effect B]
FIG. 157 is a diagram for explaining reach development selection effect B. FIG. Reach development selection effect B
Then, first, as shown in FIG. 157(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9
A and 9C are white pending icons with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(B), reach selection effect 1 is performed. In this ready-to-win selection effect 1, a first area formed from three ready-to-win effect selecting areas (a ready-to-win effect selecting area ZH4, a ready-to-win effect selecting area ZH5, and a ready-to-win effect selecting area ZH6) is displayed. The ready-to-win effect selection areas ZH4, ZH5, ZH6 are circular and arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection area ZH4 includes characters "A reach", a first character, and one star mark. The characters "A reach" suggest that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH4 is selected, A-to reach is performed in the ready-to-win effect. One star mark represents the degree of expectation for a big win, which means that the degree of expectation for a big win is relatively low. The reach effect selection area ZH5 includes characters "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The characters "B reach" suggest that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH5 is selected, the ready-to-win effect is performed by the B-reach. The two star marks represent the degree of expectation for the big win, which means that the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH6 includes characters "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The characters "C reach" suggest that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH6 is selected, the C-to-win effect is performed in the ready-to-win effect. The three star marks represent the degree of expectation for a big win, which means that the degree of expectation for a big win is relatively high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(C), reach selection effect 2 is performed. In this ready-to-win selection performance 2, a second area formed from four ready-to-reach performance selection areas (read-to-reach performance selection area ZH4A, ready-to-reach performance selection area ZH5A, ready-to-reach performance selection area ZH6A, and ready-to-reach performance selection area ZH7A) is displayed. . The reach effect selection areas ZH4A, ZH5A, and ZH6A are
They are rectangular and are arranged side by side. This reach effect selection area ZH4A, ZH5A, Z
H6A corresponds to reach effect selection areas ZH4, ZH5, and ZH6 of the first area,
It is larger than the corresponding reach effect selection areas ZH4, ZH5 and ZH6. The second area is therefore larger than the first area. The ready-to-win effect selection area ZH4A is an area corresponding to the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH4 of the first area, and includes characters "A reach", a first character, and one star mark. The character "A reach" is displayed in the reach effect selection area ZH4.
When A is selected, it suggests that A reach is performed in the reach performance. One star mark represents the degree of expectation for a big win, which means that the degree of expectation for a big win is relatively low. The ready-to-win effect selection area ZH5A is an area corresponding to the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH5 of the first area, and includes characters "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The characters "B reach" suggest that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH5A is selected, the ready-to-win effect is performed by the B-reach. The two star marks represent the degree of expectation for the big win, which means that the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH6A includes characters "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The character "C reach" suggests that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH6A is selected, the ready-to-win effect will be performed for C-reach. The three star marks represent the degree of expectation for the big win, which means that the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively high. The ready-to-win effect selection area ZH7A includes characters “D-to-win”, a fourth character, and five star marks. The characters "D reach" suggest that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH7A is selected, the D-to-win effect is performed in the ready-to-win effect. Five star marks represent the degree of expectation for a big win, and indicate that the degree of expectation for a big win is extremely high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(D), a ready-to-win determination effect is performed. This ready-to-reach determination effect is a effect of determining (selecting) one area from among the second areas. In the drawing, the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH2A is indicated by hatching, and a state in which the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH2A is selected is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(E), in this ready-to-win effect, decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in the same pattern (7 patterns in the figure) on the reach line LN, and a decorative pattern 8C is displayed.
A reach display is performed in which the is fluctuating at high speed. In this ready-to-win effect, the character CRZ, which is the second character included in the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH5A determined in the ready-to-win effect, is displayed.
H performs various productions.
After this ready-to-win effect, a losing pattern display and a big hit pattern display are performed.

[Reach development selection effect C]
FIG. 158 is a diagram for explaining reach development selection effect C. FIG. Reach development selection production C
Then, first, as shown in FIG. 158(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9
A and 9C are white pending icons with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(B), reach selection effect 1 is performed. In this ready-to-win selection performance 1, a first region formed from four ready-to-reach performance selection regions (read-to-reach performance selection region ZH8, ready-to-reach performance selection region ZH9, ready-to-reach performance selection region ZH10, and ready-to-reach performance selection region ZH11) is displayed. . The reach effect selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10, ZH11 are triangular and arranged adjacently. The reach effect selection area ZH8 includes characters "A reach", a first character, and one star mark. The characters "A reach" suggest that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH8 is selected, the A-to-win effect is performed in the ready-to-win effect. One star mark represents the degree of expectation for a big win, which means that the degree of expectation for a big win is relatively low. The reach effect selection area ZH9 includes characters "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The characters "B reach" suggest that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH9 is selected, the ready-to-win effect is performed by the B-reach. The two star marks represent the degree of expectation for the big win, which means that the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH10 includes characters "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. This character "C reach" is C in the reach effect when the reach effect selection area ZH10 is selected.
It suggests that leeching is taking place. The three star marks represent the degree of expectation for the big win, which means that the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively high. The reach effect selection area ZH11 includes characters "E reach", a fifth character, and four star marks. This "E-reach"
The character indicates that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH11 is selected, E-to reach is performed in the ready-to-win effect. The four star marks represent the degree of expectation for the big win, and indicate that the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively higher than in the case of the three star marks.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(C), reach selection effect 2 is performed. In this reach selection effect 2, five reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH8A, reach effect selection area ZH9A, reach effect selection area ZH10A, reach effect selection area ZH11A, and reach effect selection area ZH12A) are formed. area is displayed. The reach effect selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A are trapezoidal and arranged adjacently. In addition, the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH12A is rhombic, and the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH8A
, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A. This reach production selection area Z
H8A, ZH9A, ZH10A and ZH11A correspond to reach effect selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10 and ZH11 of the first area, respectively. The first area and the second area correspond to the entire areas of the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R, respectively, and have the same size. The ready-to-win effect selection area ZH8A is an area corresponding to the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH8 of the first area, and includes characters "A reach", a first character, and one star mark. The characters "A reach" suggest that A reach is performed in the ready reach effect when the ready reach effect selection area ZH8A is selected. One star mark represents the degree of expectation for a big win, which means that the degree of expectation for a big win is relatively low.
The ready-to-win effect selection area ZH9A is an area corresponding to the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH9 of the first area, and includes characters "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The characters "B reach" suggest that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH9A is selected, the ready-to-win effect is performed in the B reach. The two star marks represent the degree of expectation for the big win, which means that the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH10A includes characters "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The characters "C reach" suggest that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH10A is selected, the C-to-win effect is performed in the ready-to-win effect. The three star marks represent the degree of expectation for the big win, which means that the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively high. The ready-to-win effect selection area ZH11A includes characters "E-to-win", a fifth character, and four star marks. The characters "E-reach" suggest that E-reach is performed in the ready-to-win effect when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH11A is selected. Four star marks indicate the degree of expectation for a big win, and indicate that the degree of expectation for a big win is higher than three star marks. The ready-to-win effect selection area ZH12A includes characters "D-to-win", a fourth character, and five star marks. The characters "D reach" suggest that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH12A is selected, the ready-to-win effect is performed by D-reach. Five star marks represent the degree of expectation for a big win, and indicate that the degree of expectation for a big win is extremely high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(D), a ready-to-win determination effect is performed. This ready-to-reach determination effect is a effect of determining (selecting) one area from among the second areas. In the drawing, the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH12A is indicated by hatching, and a state in which the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH12A is selected is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(E), in this ready-to-win effect, decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in the same pattern (7 patterns in the figure) on the reach line LN, and a decorative pattern 8C is displayed.
A reach display is performed in which the is fluctuating at high speed. In this ready-to-win effect, the character CR which is the fourth character included in the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH12A determined by the ready-to-win effect is determined.
ZH1 performs various productions. After this ready-to-win effect, a losing pattern display and a big hit pattern display are performed.

[Reach development selection effect D]
FIG. 159 is a diagram for explaining the reach development selection effect D. FIG. Reach development selection production D
Then, first, as shown in FIG. 159(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9
A and 9C are white pending icons with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(B), reach selection effect 1 is performed. In this ready-to-win selection performance 1, a first region formed from four ready-to-reach performance selection regions (read-to-reach performance selection region ZH8, ready-to-reach performance selection region ZH9, ready-to-reach performance selection region ZH10, and ready-to-reach performance selection region ZH11) is displayed. . The reach effect selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10, ZH11 are triangular and arranged adjacently. The reach effect selection area ZH8 includes characters "A reach", a first character, and one star mark. The characters "A reach" suggest that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH8 is selected, the A-to-win effect is performed in the ready-to-win effect. One star mark represents the degree of expectation for a big win, which means that the degree of expectation for a big win is relatively low. The reach effect selection area ZH9 includes characters "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The characters "B reach" suggest that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH9 is selected, the ready-to-win effect is performed by the B-reach. The two star marks represent the degree of expectation for the big win, which means that the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH10 includes characters "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. This character "C reach" is C in the reach effect when the reach effect selection area ZH10 is selected.
It suggests that leeching is taking place. The three star marks represent the degree of expectation for the big win, which means that the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively high. The reach effect selection area ZH11 includes characters "E reach", a fifth character, and four star marks. This "E-reach"
The character indicates that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH11 is selected, E-to reach is performed in the ready-to-win effect. The four star marks represent the degree of expectation for the big win, and indicate that the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively higher than in the case of the three star marks.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(C), ready-to-win selection effect 2 is performed. In this reach selection effect 2, five reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH8A, reach effect selection area ZH9A, reach effect selection area ZH10A, reach effect selection area ZH11A, and reach effect selection area ZH12A) are formed. area is displayed. The reach effect selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A are trapezoidal and arranged adjacently. In addition, the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH12A is rhombic, and the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH8A
, ZH9A, ZH10A, and ZH11A. This reach production selection area Z
H8A, ZH9A, ZH10A and ZH11A correspond to reach effect selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10 and ZH11 of the first area, respectively. The first area and the second area correspond to the entire areas of the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R, respectively, and have the same size. The ready-to-win effect selection area ZH8A is an area corresponding to the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH8 of the first area, and includes characters "A reach", a first character, and one star mark. The characters "A reach" suggest that A reach is performed in the ready reach effect when the ready reach effect selection area ZH8A is selected. One star mark represents the degree of expectation for a big win, which means that the degree of expectation for a big win is relatively low.
The ready-to-win effect selection area ZH9A is an area corresponding to the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH9 of the first area, and includes characters "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The characters "B reach" suggest that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH9A is selected, the ready-to-win effect is performed in the B reach. The two star marks represent the degree of expectation for the big win, which means that the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH10A includes characters "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The characters "C reach" suggest that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH10A is selected, the C-to-win effect is performed in the ready-to-win effect. The three star marks represent the degree of expectation for the big win, which means that the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively high. The ready-to-win effect selection area ZH11A includes characters "E-to-win", a fifth character, and four star marks. The characters "E-reach" suggest that E-reach is performed in the ready-to-win effect when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH11A is selected. Four star marks indicate the degree of expectation for a big win, and indicate that the degree of expectation for a big win is higher than three star marks. The ready-to-win effect selection area ZH12A includes characters "D-to-win", a fourth character, and five star marks. The characters "D reach" suggest that when the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH12A is selected, the ready-to-win effect is performed by D-reach. Five star marks represent the degree of expectation for a big win, and indicate that the degree of expectation for a big win is extremely high. Also, the fourth character included in the reach effect selection area ZH12A is
It advances into a ready-to-win effect selection area ZH8A and a ready-to-win effect selection area ZH9A adjacent to the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH12A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(D), a ready-to-win determination effect is performed. This ready-to-reach determination effect is a effect of determining (selecting) one area from among the second areas. In the drawing, the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH12A is indicated by hatching, and a state in which the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH12A is selected is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(E), in this ready-to-win effect, decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in the same pattern (7 patterns in the figure) on the reach line LN, and a decorative pattern 8C is displayed.
A reach display is performed in which the is fluctuating at high speed. In this ready-to-win effect, the character CR which is the fourth character included in the ready-to-win effect selection area ZH12A determined by the ready-to-win effect is determined.
ZH1 performs various productions. After this ready-to-win effect, a losing pattern display and a big hit pattern display are performed.
The reach development selection effects A to D are performed in the same variation.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the reach development selection effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the reach development selection effect, a first area formed from a plurality of reach effect selection areas ZH1, ZH2, ZH3 is displayed, and then a plurality of reach effect selection areas ZH1A, ZH2.
A second region consisting of A, ZH3A is displayed. According to this configuration, two areas including different ready-to-win effect selection areas are displayed in order, so that the player can be given an exciting feeling when selecting ready-to-win. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the reach development selection effect, a first area formed from a plurality of reach effect selection areas ZH1, ZH2, ZH3 is displayed, and then a plurality of reach effect selection areas ZH1A, ZH2.
A second region consisting of A, ZH3A is displayed, where the first region and the second region are the same size. According to this configuration, since two areas containing a plurality of different reach selection areas and having the same size are displayed in order, a plurality of reach selection areas are displayed in the first area and the second area. It is possible to make it easier to recognize the difference between the areas, and to give the player a sense of excitement when selecting reach. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the ready-to-win development selection effect, the plurality of ready-to-win effect selection areas are areas each including a jackpot expectation degree suggesting image that suggests a jackpot expectation degree. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with greater excitement when selecting ready-to-win. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the ready-to-reach development selection effect, the plurality of ready-to-reach effect selection areas are areas each including a character image. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with greater excitement when selecting ready-to-win. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the reach development selection effect D, the character image included in the predetermined reach effect selection area advances to another reach selection area adjacent to the predetermined reach effect selection area. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the character included in the predetermined reach selection area stand out, and when the predetermined reach selection area is selected, it is possible to impart greater excitement to the player. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZH-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a first area including a plurality of reach effect selection areas,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying a second area including a plurality of ready-to-reach effect selection areas,
The ready-to-reach effect selection area is an area including a ready-to-reach effect suggestive image that suggests development to a predetermined ready-to-win effect,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZH-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZH-1,
The first region and the second region are the same size,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZH-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZH-1 or aspect ZH-2,
The reach effect selection area is an area containing a jackpot expectation suggesting image that suggests a jackpot expectation,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZH-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZH-1 to ZH-3,
The reach effect selection area is an area containing a character image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZH-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZH-4,
The character image included in the predetermined reach selection area advances into another reach selection area adjacent to the predetermined reach selection area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Note that the above aspect may be modified as follows.
o The second area has more reach selection areas than the first area.
○ Each reach selection area in the second area and each reach selection area corresponding in the first area (first
The reach selection area including the same reach effect suggesting image as the reach selection area of the area) is different in size or shape.
○ A specific reach selection area in the second area and the corresponding reach selection area in the first area (
The ready-to-win selection area including the same ready-to-win effect suggestive image as the ready-to-win selection area of the first area) does not change the expected jackpot and the character image.
○ In the reach effect, the character image of the selected reach selection area appears.

The two-direction group effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 160 to 163. FIG. This two-way group effect can be executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 1
01 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the character display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L. , the right sub-display device 10R, the illumination panel 18, and the like. The illumination panel 18 is a transmissive display panel, and is positioned closer to the player than the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10 (player side).
are placed in

[Two direction group production A]
FIG. 160 is a diagram for explaining the two-direction group effect A. FIG. In the two-way group production A, first,
As shown in FIG. 160(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed on the left sub-display device 10.
L and below the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9A and 9C are
It is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(B), an icon group display effect is performed. In this icon group display effect, a first group image including a plurality of heart images ZI1, which are icon images, is displayed in the left area of the display screen 7a. disappears outside The heart image ZI1 is a heart-shaped icon image. In the icon group display effect, the first group image is displayed in the left area of the display screen 7a, and the heart images ZI1 move at relatively different speeds instead of maintaining the same formation on the display screen 7a. It may move to the right area and disappear outside the display screen 7a. Also, a circular icon image may be used instead of the heart image ZI1 as the icon image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(C), a character group display effect is performed. In this character group display effect, a second group image including a plurality of smiley images ZI2, which are character images, is displayed in the right area of the display screen 7a, and moves to the left area of the display screen 7a while maintaining that formation. disappears outside The smiling image ZI2 is a character image imitating a smiling face. Note that in the character group display effect, the second group image is displayed in the right area of the display screen 7a, and instead of maintaining that formation, the smiley images ZI2 move at different speeds relative to each other on the display screen 7a. It may move to the right area and disappear outside the display screen 7a. Also, instead of smiling image ZI2 as the character image, a character image simulating the whole body wearing a battle uniform may be used.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(D), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped in the same pattern (7 patterns), and the ready-to-win display is performed to represent the ready-to-win state in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates. Also, in the reach performance, Nico Nico image ZI
2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by this character image CRZI. In addition, in this ready-to-win effect, a predetermined action may be performed using the heart image ZI1.

[Two direction group production B]
FIG. 161 is a diagram for explaining the two-direction group effect B. FIG. In the two-way group production B, first,
As shown in FIG. 161(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed on the left sub-display device 10.
L and below the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9A and 9C are
It is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(B), group display effect 1 is performed. This group display effect 1
Then, a first group of images including a plurality of heart images ZI1, which are icon images, are displayed in the left area of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of smiling images ZI2, which are character images, are displayed in the right area of the display screen 7a. , the first group of images moves in the first direction (the direction toward the right area of the display screen 7a, that is, the right direction), and the second group of images moves in the second direction opposite to the first direction. It moves in the direction (the direction toward the left side area of the display screen 7a, that is, the left direction).
The heart image ZI1 is a heart-shaped icon image. The heart image ZI1 has low transparency. The smiling image ZI2 is a character image imitating a smiling face. The smiling image ZI2 has low transparency. In this case, in group display effect 1, the first group of images (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group of images (plurality of smiley images ZI2) move:
Move in a fixed formation. Without being limited to this, when the first group images (plurality of heart images ZI1) move, the respective heart images ZI1 may move at relatively different speeds instead of a constant formation. Also, when the second group of images (plural smiling images ZI2) moves, the smiling images ZI2 may move at relatively different speeds rather than in a constant formation. A circular icon image may be used instead of the heart image ZI1 as the icon image. Also, instead of smiling image ZI2 as the character image, a character image simulating the whole body wearing a battle uniform may be used.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(C), group display effect 2 is performed. This group display effect 2
Then, the first group of images (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group of images (plural of smiley images ZI1)
I2) moves, and after overlapping near the center of the display screen 7a, the first group of images moves in the first direction as it is, and moves from the right edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. As it disappears, the second group of images moves in the second direction as it is, and disappears from the left edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiling image ZI2 overlap, the heart image ZI1 is displayed in front of the smiling image ZI2. Therefore, heart image Z
Since the transparency of I1 is low, if the heart image ZI1 precedes the smiling image ZI2,
The smiling image ZI2 is hidden behind the heart image ZI1. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiling image ZI2 overlap each other, the smiling image ZI2 may be displayed in front of the heart image ZI1. In this case, if there is a smiling image ZI2 before the heart image ZI1,
The heart image ZI1 is hidden behind the smiling image ZI2. Also, in this group display effect 2, the first group image (plural heart images ZI1) and the second group image (plural smiley images ZI2)
They may pass each other without overlapping near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(D), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped in the same pattern (7 patterns), and the ready-to-win display is performed to represent the ready-to-win state in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates. Also, in the reach performance, Nico Nico image ZI
2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by this character image CRZI. In addition, in this ready-to-win effect, a predetermined action may be performed using the heart image ZI1.

[Two-direction group production C]
FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining the two-direction group effect C. FIG. In the two-way group production C, first,
As shown in FIG. 162(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed on the left sub-display device 10.
L and below the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9A and 9C are
It is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(B), group display effect 1 is performed. This group display effect 1
Then, a first group of images including a plurality of heart images ZI1, which are icon images, are displayed in the left area of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of smiling images ZI2, which are character images, are displayed in the right area of the display screen 7a. , the first group of images moves in the first direction (the direction toward the right area of the display screen 7a, that is, the right direction), and the second group of images moves in the second direction opposite to the first direction. It moves in the direction (the direction toward the left side area of the display screen 7a, that is, the left direction).
The heart image ZI1 is a heart-shaped icon image. The heart image ZI1 has high transparency. The smiling image ZI2 is a character image imitating a smiling face. The smiling image ZI2 has low transparency. In this case, in group display effect 1, the first group of images (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group of images (plurality of smiley images ZI2) move:
Move in a fixed formation. Without being limited to this, when the first group images (plurality of heart images ZI1) move, the respective heart images ZI1 may move at relatively different speeds instead of a constant formation. Also, when the second group of images (plural smiling images ZI2) moves, the smiling images ZI2 may move at relatively different speeds rather than in a constant formation. A circular icon image may be used instead of the heart image ZI1 as the icon image. Also, instead of smiling image ZI2 as the character image, a character image simulating the whole body wearing a battle uniform may be used.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(C), group display effect 2 is performed. This group display effect 2
Then, the first group of images (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group of images (plural of smiley images ZI1)
I2) moves, and after overlapping near the center of the display screen 7a, the first group of images moves in the first direction as it is, and moves from the right edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. As it disappears, the second group of images moves in the second direction as it is, and disappears from the left edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiling image ZI2 overlap, the heart image ZI1 is displayed in front of the smiling image ZI2. However, since the heart image ZI1 has high transparency, even if the heart image ZI1 is in front of the smiling image ZI2, the smiling image ZI2 is visible through the heart image ZI1. Note that when the heart image ZI1 and the smiling image ZI2 overlap, the smiling image ZI2 is the heart image Z
It may be displayed in front of I1. Then, the heart image ZI1 may have low transparency and the smiling image ZI2 may have high transparency. In this case, if the heart image ZI1 is preceded by the smiling image ZI2, the heart image ZI1 is visible through the smiling image ZI2.
Also, in this group display effect 2, the first group of images (the plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group of images (the plurality of smiley images ZI2) do not overlap each other near the center of the display screen 7a and pass each other. You may do so.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(D), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped in the same pattern (7 patterns), and the ready-to-win display is performed to represent the ready-to-win state in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates. Also, in the reach performance, Nico Nico image ZI
2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by this character image CRZI. In addition, in this ready-to-win effect, a predetermined action may be performed using the heart image ZI1.

[Two direction group production D]
FIG. 163 is a diagram for explaining the two-direction group effect D. FIG. In the two-way group production D, first,
As shown in FIG. 163(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this decorative pattern variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed on the left sub-display device 10.
L and below the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9A and 9C are
It is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(B), group display effect 1 is performed. This group display effect 1
Now, a first group of images including a plurality of heart images ZI1 that are icon images are displayed on the left side area of the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L, and a plurality of smiling images ZI2 that are character images are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. area and then the first group of images in the first direction (
While moving in the direction toward the right side area of the display screen 7a, that is, the right direction), the second group of images moves in the second direction opposite to the first direction (the direction toward the left side area of the display screen 7a, ie to the left). The heart image ZI1 is a heart-shaped icon image. The heart image ZI1 has high transparency. The smiling image ZI2 is a character image imitating a smiling face. The smiling image ZI2 has low transparency. In this case, in the group display effect 1, the first group image (the plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (the plurality of smiley images ZI1)
I2) moves in a constant formation when moving. but not limited to
When the first group images (plurality of heart images ZI1) move, the heart images ZI1 may move at relatively different speeds rather than in a constant formation.
Also, when the second group of images (plural smiling images ZI2) moves, the smiling images ZI2 may move at relatively different speeds rather than in a constant formation. A circular icon image may be used instead of the heart image ZI1 as the icon image. Also, instead of smiling image ZI2 as the character image, a character image simulating the whole body wearing a battle uniform may be used.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(C), group display effect 2 is performed. This group display effect 2
Then, the first group of images (plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group of images (plural of smiley images ZI1)
I2) moves, and after overlapping near the center of the display screen 7a, the left sub-display device 10L, and the right sub-display device 10R, the first group image moves in the first direction as it is. , disappears out of the display screen 7a from the right edge of the display screen 7a, the second group of images moves in the second direction as it is, and disappears out of the display screen 7a from the left edge of the display screen 7a. . When the heart image ZI1 and the smiling image ZI2 overlap, the heart image ZI1 is displayed in front of the smiling image ZI2. However, since the heart image ZI1 has high transparency, even if the heart image ZI1 is in front of the smiling image ZI2, the smiling image ZI2 is visible through the heart image ZI1. Note that the heart image ZI1 and the smiling image ZI2
, the smiling image ZI2 may be displayed in front of the heart image ZI1. Then, the heart image ZI1 may have low transparency and the smiling image ZI2 may have high transparency. In this case, if the heart image ZI1 is preceded by the smiling image ZI2, the heart image ZI1 is visible through the smiling image ZI2. Also, in this group display effect 2,
A first group of images (a plurality of heart images ZI1) and a second group of images (a plurality of smiling images ZI2)
may pass each other without overlapping each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(D), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped in the same pattern (7 patterns), and the ready-to-win display is performed to represent the ready-to-win state in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates. Also, in the reach performance, Nico Nico image ZI
2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by this character image CRZI. In addition, in this ready-to-win effect, a predetermined action may be performed using the heart image ZI1.
The two-way group effects A to D are performed in the same variation.

[Modification]
In the two-direction group effect, the first group of images moves in a first direction (rightward), and the second group of images moves in a second direction (leftward) opposite to the first direction. to, but not limited to,
The moving directions of the first group of images and the second group of images may be different from the opposite directions. For example, the first group of images may move upward and the second group of images may move leftward.
In the two-direction group effect, the first group image is formed of icon images, and the second group image is
Although formed of character images, this is not a limitation, and the first group of images and the second group of images may be formed of icon images, or the first group of images and the second group of images may be formed of icon images. The group image is
Character images may be used, and the first group images and the second group images may be formed of images other than icon images or character images.
In the two-direction group effect, the character group display effect, or the group display effect 1, or
A predetermined image may be displayed on the illumination panel 18 while the group display effect 2 is being performed. In this case, the predetermined image on the illumination panel 18 is
The first group of images and/or the second group of images are visibly displayed. For example, the illumination panel 18 may display a predetermined image while avoiding the area corresponding to the area where the first group of images and the second group of images overlap on the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the two-way group effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the two-direction group effect, the first group of images including a plurality of heart images ZI1 is displayed, and the second group of images including a plurality of smiling images ZI2 are displayed in the same variation. According to this configuration, since two group images are displayed in the same variation, it is possible to liven up the group presentation and improve the interest of the group presentation. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the two-direction group effect, in the same variation, while the first group of images including the heart images ZI1 is displayed, the second group of images including the smiling images ZI2 is displayed. According to this configuration, since two group performances are performed simultaneously in the same variation, the group performance can be livened up and the interest of the group performance can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above two-direction group effect, the first group of images including a plurality of heart images ZI1 moves in the first direction, and the second group of images including a plurality of smiling images ZI2 moves in the first direction. moves in a different second direction. According to this configuration, the two group images move in different directions in the same movement, so that the group effect can be performed dynamically and gorgeously, and the interest of the group effect can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the above two-direction group effect, the first group of images including a plurality of heart images ZI1 moves in the first direction, and the second group of images including a plurality of smiling images ZI2 moves in the first direction. moves in the opposite second direction. According to this configuration, the two group images move in a direction in which the two group images relatively approach or move away from each other in the same change, so that the group performance can be performed dynamically and gorgeously, and the interest of the group performance can be improved. can be done. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the two-direction group effect, the heart image ZI1 of the first group of images is an icon image, and the smiling image ZI2 of the second group of images is a character image. According to this configuration, a group effect is performed using group images of different categories in the same variation, so that the group effect can be performed gorgeously, and the interest of the group effect can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZI-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the first display effect is a display effect in which a first group image including a plurality of images moves;
the second display effect is a display effect in which a second group of images including a plurality of images moves;
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed in the same variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZI-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZI-1,
In the combination effect, in the same variation, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZI-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZI-2,
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, the first group images move in the first direction, and in the second display effect, the second group images move in the first direction. move in a second direction different from
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZI-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZI-3,
the first direction is opposite to the second direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZI-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZI-4,
the plurality of images of the first group of images are icon images;
the plurality of images of the second group of images are character images;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Note that the above aspect may be modified as follows.
o The first group of images and the second group of images overlap. A plurality of images in one group image has a transparent portion that is at least partially transparent. A plurality of images in the second group of images may also have transparent portions.
○ A ready-to-win effect is performed using images (for example, icon images and character images) that form the first group of images or the second group of images.
○ The first group of images and the second group of images pass through the main display device and the sub display device. A first group of images originates from the main display and a second group of images originates from the sub-display.
○ A third display device is provided in front, and the first group image and the second group image can be seen through the gap between the displayed images.

164 to 167, the acquired ball display effects A to D will be described below. This acquired ball display effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command for starting the variable effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the character display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. , the left sub-display device 10L, the right sub-display device 10R, the illumination panel 18, and the like. Note that the illumination panel 18
is a transparent display panel, which is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub-display device 10 .

[Acquisition ball display effect A]
FIG. 164 is a diagram for explaining the winning ball display effect A. FIG. In the acquired ball display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 164(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a.
Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9A,
9C is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(B), a big hit symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern display performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed as jackpot patterns. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by a predetermined character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(C), an effect to display the number of balls to be obtained is performed. In this planned acquisition ball number display effect, an expected acquisition ball number display ZJ1, an expected acquisition ball number display ZJ2, an expected acquisition ball number display ZJ3, and an expected acquisition ball number display ZJ4 are displayed. Acquisition number display ZJ1
is represented by the character "+15", suggesting that the number of balls to be obtained in the jackpot game is increased by "15 balls". The expected number of acquired balls display ZJ2 is represented by characters "+105", suggesting that the number of expected acquired balls in the jackpot game has increased by "105 balls". The expected number of obtained balls display ZJ3 is represented by characters "+150", suggesting that the number of expected obtained balls in the jackpot game has increased by "150 balls". The number of balls to be obtained display ZJ4 is "+300
”, suggesting that the number of balls to be obtained in the jackpot game has increased by “300 balls”. The expected number of obtained balls ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3 and ZJ4 are displayed in the same manner when indicating the same number of obtained balls, and are displayed in different manners when indicating different numbers of obtained balls. In this case, the "same aspect" means, for example, the same color,/or pattern,/or size,/or shape, and/or font. Also, "different aspect" means, for example, different colors and/or patterns and/or sizes and/or shapes and/or fonts. Also, in the expected winning ball number display effect, the right sub-display device 10R displays a big winning symbol. In addition, in this display performance of the number of balls to be acquired, the number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3
, ZJ4 may be made larger as the number of winning balls increases. For example, the expected number of balls to be acquired ZJ4 is the largest, the number of expected balls to be acquired ZJ3 is the second largest, the number of expected balls to be acquired ZJ2 is the second largest, and the number of expected balls to be acquired ZJ1 is the smallest. may In the drawing, various hatchings are used to indicate the different colors and patterns of the expected number of balls to be acquired ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(D), an effect of displaying the maximum number of balls to be obtained is performed. In this maximum expected number of balls to be acquired display effect, the maximum expected number of acquired balls display ZJ5 is displayed. The maximum expected winning ball number display ZJ5 represents the maximum expected winning ball number in the jackpot game. The maximum expected number of balls to be obtained indicated by the maximum expected number of balls to be obtained display ZJ5 is the same as the total value of the expected number of obtained balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 displayed in the above-mentioned display effect of the number of expected to be obtained balls, or is obtained. It is larger than the total value of the expected ball number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3 and ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum number of expected winning balls display ZJ5 is indicated as "MAX 2000", suggesting that the maximum number of expected winning balls in the jackpot game is 2000 balls. Also, in the display effect of the maximum number of balls to be acquired,
A jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.
The same variation is performed from the decorative symbol variation effect to the display effect of the maximum number of balls to be obtained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(E), a big win game display effect is performed. This jackpot game display effect is performed during the jackpot game, and a jackpot ball acquisition display ZJ6, a round display ZJ7, and a character image CRZJ are displayed. This ball acquisition display ZJ6
represents the number of balls obtained by the jackpot game (the number of balls paid out) (150 in the figure) and the maximum number of expected winning balls (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 represents the number of rounds of the round game. The figure shows that it is one round. Character image C
RZJ performs various effects during the jackpot game. Also, in the jackpot game display effect,
A jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

[Acquired ball display effect B]
FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining acquired ball display effect B. FIG. In the acquired ball display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 165(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.
Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9A,
9C is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(B), a big hit symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern display performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed as jackpot patterns. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by a predetermined character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(C), an effect to display the number of balls to be obtained is performed. In this planned acquisition ball number display effect, an expected acquisition ball number display ZJ1, an expected acquisition ball number display ZJ2, an expected acquisition ball number display ZJ3, and an expected acquisition ball number display ZJ4 are displayed. Acquisition number display ZJ1
is represented by the character "+15", suggesting that the number of balls to be obtained in the jackpot game is increased by "15 balls". The expected number of acquired balls display ZJ2 is represented by characters "+105", suggesting that the number of expected acquired balls in the jackpot game has increased by "105 balls". The expected number of obtained balls display ZJ3 is represented by characters "+150", suggesting that the number of expected obtained balls in the jackpot game has increased by "150 balls". The number of balls to be obtained display ZJ4 is "+300
”, suggesting that the number of balls to be obtained in the jackpot game has increased by “300 balls”. The expected number of obtained balls ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3 and ZJ4 are displayed in the same manner when indicating the same number of obtained balls, and are displayed in different manners when indicating different numbers of obtained balls. In this case, the "same aspect" means, for example, the same color,/or pattern,/or size,/or shape, and/or font. Also, "different aspect" means, for example, different colors and/or patterns and/or sizes and/or shapes and/or fonts. Also, in the expected winning ball number display effect, the right sub-display device 10R displays a big winning symbol. In addition, in this display performance of the number of balls to be acquired, the number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3
, ZJ4 may be made larger as the number of winning balls increases. For example, the expected number of balls to be acquired ZJ4 is the largest, the number of expected balls to be acquired ZJ3 is the second largest, the number of expected balls to be acquired ZJ2 is the second largest, and the number of expected balls to be acquired ZJ1 is the smallest. may In the drawing, various hatchings are used to indicate the different colors and patterns of the expected number of balls to be acquired ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(D), an effect to display the number of balls to be acquired is enlarged. In this expected ball number enlargement display effect, the expected ball number displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are moved (moving) and enlarged. In addition, in the display effect of enlarging the number of balls to be acquired, the right sub-display device 10R displays a big winning symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(E), an effect of displaying the maximum number of balls to be obtained is performed. In this maximum expected number of balls to be acquired display effect, the maximum expected number of acquired balls display ZJ5 is displayed. The maximum expected winning ball number display ZJ5 represents the maximum expected winning ball number in the jackpot game. The maximum expected number of balls to be obtained indicated by the maximum expected number of balls to be obtained display ZJ5 is the same as the total value of the expected number of obtained balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 displayed in the above-mentioned display effect of the number of expected to be obtained balls, or is obtained. It is larger than the total value of the expected ball number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3 and ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum number of expected winning balls display ZJ5 is indicated as "MAX 2000", suggesting that the maximum number of expected winning balls in the jackpot game is 2000 balls. Also, in the display effect of the maximum number of balls to be acquired,
A jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.
The same variation is performed from the decorative symbol variation effect to the display effect of the maximum number of balls to be acquired.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(F), a big win game display effect is performed. This jackpot game display effect is performed during the jackpot game, and a jackpot ball acquisition display ZJ6, a round display ZJ7, and a character image CRZJ are displayed. This ball acquisition display ZJ6
represents the number of balls obtained by the jackpot game (the number of balls paid out) (150 in the figure) and the maximum number of expected winning balls (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 represents the number of rounds of the round game. The figure shows that it is one round. Character image C
RZJ performs various effects during the jackpot game. Also, in the display of the number of balls to be acquired,
A jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

[Acquired ball display effect C]
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the winning ball display effect C. FIG. In the acquired ball display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 166(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a.
Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9A,
9C is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(B), a big hit symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern display performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed as jackpot patterns. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by a predetermined character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(C), an effect to display the number of balls to be obtained is performed. In this planned acquisition ball number display effect, an expected acquisition ball number display ZJ1, an expected acquisition ball number display ZJ2, an expected acquisition ball number display ZJ3, and an expected acquisition ball number display ZJ4 are displayed. Acquisition number display ZJ1
is represented by the character "+15", suggesting that the number of balls to be obtained in the jackpot game is increased by "15 balls". The expected number of acquired balls display ZJ2 is represented by characters "+105", suggesting that the number of expected acquired balls in the jackpot game has increased by "105 balls". The expected number of obtained balls display ZJ3 is represented by characters "+150", suggesting that the number of expected obtained balls in the jackpot game has increased by "150 balls". The number of balls to be obtained display ZJ4 is "+300
”, suggesting that the number of balls to be obtained in the jackpot game has increased by “300 balls”. The expected number of obtained balls ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3 and ZJ4 are displayed in the same manner when indicating the same number of obtained balls, and are displayed in different manners when indicating different numbers of obtained balls. In this case, the "same aspect" means, for example, the same color,/or pattern,/or size,/or shape, and/or font. Also, "different aspect" means, for example, different colors and/or patterns and/or sizes and/or shapes and/or fonts. Also, in the expected winning ball number display effect, the right sub-display device 10R displays a big winning symbol. In addition, in this display performance of the number of balls to be acquired, the number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3
, ZJ4 may be made larger as the number of winning balls increases. For example, the expected number of balls to be acquired ZJ4 is the largest, the number of expected balls to be acquired ZJ3 is the second largest, the number of expected balls to be acquired ZJ2 is the second largest, and the number of expected balls to be acquired ZJ1 is the smallest. may In the drawing, various hatchings are used to indicate the different colors and patterns of the expected number of balls to be acquired ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(D), an effect to display the number of balls to be obtained is enlarged. In this expected ball number enlargement display effect, the expected ball number displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are enlarged while moving (moving). In addition, in the display effect of enlarging the number of balls to be obtained, the right sub-display device 10R displays a big winning symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(E), an effect for displaying the reduced number of balls to be obtained is performed. In this expected ball number reduction display effect, the expected ball number displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are reduced while moving (moving) toward a predetermined position (near the center of the display screen 7a). . In addition, in the display effect of enlarging the number of balls to be acquired, the right sub-display device 10R displays a big winning symbol. 166(D) is followed by a reduced expected ball number display effect shown in FIG. 166(E).
166(D) may be performed after the reduced number of expected balls to be obtained display effect of (E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(F), an effect of displaying the maximum number of balls to be obtained is performed. In this maximum expected number of balls to be acquired display effect, the maximum expected number of acquired balls display ZJ5 is displayed. The maximum expected winning ball number display ZJ5 represents the maximum expected winning ball number in the jackpot game. The maximum number of balls to be obtained indicated by the maximum number of balls to be obtained ZJ5 is the same as the total value of the number of balls to be obtained ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 displayed in the display effect of the number of balls to be obtained, or is obtained. It is larger than the total value of the expected ball number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3 and ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum number of expected winning balls display ZJ5 is indicated as "MAX 2000", suggesting that the maximum number of expected winning balls in the jackpot game is 2000 balls. Also, in the display effect of the maximum number of balls to be acquired,
A jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.
The same variation is performed from the decorative symbol variation effect to the display effect of the maximum number of balls to be obtained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(G), a big win game display effect is performed. This jackpot game display effect is performed during the jackpot game, and a jackpot ball acquisition display ZJ6, a round display ZJ7, and a character image CRZJ are displayed. This ball acquisition display ZJ6
represents the number of balls obtained by the jackpot game (the number of balls paid out) (150 in the figure) and the maximum number of expected winning balls (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 represents the number of rounds of the round game. The figure shows that it is one round. Character image C
RZJ performs various effects during the jackpot game. Also, in the display of the number of balls to be acquired,
A jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

[Acquired ball display effect D]
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the winning ball display effect D. FIG. In the acquired ball display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 167(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the center of the display screen 7a.
Also, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed below the left sub-display device 10L and the right sub-display device 10R. These pending icons 9A,
9C is a white pending icon with no handle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(B), a big hit symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern display performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed as jackpot patterns. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by a predetermined character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(C), an effect to display the number of balls to be obtained is performed. In this display effect of the number of balls to be obtained, the number of balls to be obtained ZJ1, the number of balls to be obtained ZJ2, the number of balls to be obtained ZJ3, and the number of balls to be obtained ZJ4 are displayed while moving and overlapping each other. be. The expected number of acquired balls display ZJ1 is represented by characters "+15", suggesting that the number of expected acquired balls in the jackpot game has increased by "15 balls". The number of balls to be obtained display ZJ2 is
It is represented by the characters "+105", suggesting that the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "105 balls". The expected number of obtained balls display ZJ3 is represented by characters "+150", suggesting that the number of expected obtained balls in the jackpot game has increased by "150 balls". The expected number of obtained balls display ZJ4 is represented by characters “+300”, suggesting that the number of expected obtained balls in the jackpot game has increased by “300 balls”. These expected acquisition ball number display ZJ1, ZJ2
, ZJ3 and ZJ4 are displayed in the same manner when representing the same number of winning balls, and displayed in different manners when representing different numbers of winning balls. In this case, the "same aspect" means, for example, color and/or pattern and/or size and/or shape and/or
Or the font is the same thing. In addition, "different aspect", for example, color and /
Or different patterns and/or sizes and/or shapes and/or fonts. Also, in the expected winning ball number display effect, the right sub-display device 10R displays a big winning symbol. Note that, in this expected ball number display effect, the size of the expected ball number displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 may be made larger as the number of expected balls to be acquired increases. For example, the expected number of balls to be acquired ZJ4 is the largest, the number of expected balls to be acquired ZJ3 is the second largest, the number of expected balls to be acquired ZJ2 is the second largest, and the number of expected balls to be acquired ZJ1 is the smallest. may In the figure, the number of balls to be acquired ZJ1, Z
Various hatchings are used to show the different colors and patterns of J2, ZJ3, and ZJ4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(D), an effect for displaying the number of expected balls to be acquired is enlarged. In this effect of displaying the number of expected balls to be acquired, the display of the number of expected balls to be acquired ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 moves and expands and overlaps with each other. Also, in the expansion display effect of the number of balls to be acquired,
A jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(E), an effect for displaying the reduced number of balls to be obtained is performed. In this effect of reducing the number of expected balls to be obtained, the display of the number of expected balls to be obtained ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 overlap each other while moving and shrinking toward a predetermined position (near the center of the display screen 7a). In addition, in the display effect of enlarging the number of balls to be acquired, the right sub-display device 10R displays a big winning symbol. It should be noted that after the expansion display effect of the number of balls to be obtained in FIG. 167 (D),
167(E), the effect of displaying the number of balls to be obtained is reduced, but is not limited to this, and is shown in FIG.
After the reduction display effect of the number of expected balls to be obtained in 7(E), the display effect of increasing the number of balls to be obtained in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(F), an effect of displaying the maximum number of balls to be obtained is performed. In this maximum expected number of balls to be acquired display effect, the maximum expected number of acquired balls display ZJ5 is displayed. The maximum expected winning ball number display ZJ5 represents the maximum expected winning ball number in the jackpot game. The maximum number of balls to be obtained indicated by the maximum number of balls to be obtained ZJ5 is the same as the total value of the number of balls to be obtained ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 displayed in the display effect of the number of balls to be obtained, or is obtained. It is larger than the total value of the expected ball number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3 and ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum number of expected winning balls display ZJ5 is indicated as "MAX 2000", suggesting that the maximum number of expected winning balls in the jackpot game is 2000 balls. Also, in the display effect of the maximum number of balls to be acquired,
A jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.
The same variation is performed from the decorative symbol variation effect to the display effect of the maximum number of balls to be acquired.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(G), a big win game display effect is performed. This jackpot game display effect is performed during the jackpot game, and a jackpot ball acquisition display ZJ6, a round display ZJ7, and a character image CRZJ are displayed. This ball acquisition display ZJ6
represents the number of balls obtained by the jackpot game (the number of balls paid out) (150 in the figure) and the maximum number of expected winning balls (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 represents the number of rounds of the round game. The figure shows that it is one round. Character image C
RZJ performs various effects during the jackpot game. Also, in the display of the number of balls to be acquired,
A jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub-display device 10R.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned win ball display effect, the decoration pattern variation effect to the maximum expected ball number display effect are performed with the same variation, and the jackpot game display effect is performed during the jackpot game, but not limited to this, the expected win ball number Display effect, display effect of enlarged number of balls to be acquired, effect of reduced number of balls to be acquired,
The maximum expected number of balls to be obtained display performance may be performed during the jackpot game.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the acquired ball display presentation will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the obtained ball display effect, after the effect of displaying the jackpot pattern and informing of the big win is performed, the effect of displaying a plurality of expected winning ball numbers ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 is performed, and then the maximum winning is performed. An effect of performing the planned number of balls display ZJ5 is performed, and after that,
A jackpot game performance is performed. According to this configuration, the number of balls to be obtained display ZJ1, ZJ2
, ZJ3 and ZJ4 enable the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game to be recognized in pieces, and then the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game can be recognized by the maximum number of balls to be acquired in the maximum expected ball number display ZJ5. It is possible to enjoy a great pleasure later, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
A plurality of expected number of balls to be obtained display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, Z
When the effect of J4 is performed, a plurality of expected ball number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ
3. The display of the number of balls to be obtained that indicates the same number of balls among ZJ4 has the same aspect (e.g., color and/or
Alternatively, the patterns and/or sizes and/or shapes and/or fonts are the same). According to this configuration, the expected winning ball number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3,
In ZJ4, it becomes easier to recognize the display of the number of expected balls to be obtained that have the same number of expected balls to be obtained, in other words, it becomes easier to find the display of the number of expected balls to be obtained that has a different number of expected balls to be obtained. can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
A plurality of expected number of balls to be obtained display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, Z
When the effect of J4 is performed, a plurality of expected ball number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ
3. The display of the expected number of balls to be obtained, which indicates the number of balls different from ZJ4, has different aspects (for example, different colors, patterns, sizes, shapes, and/or fonts). ). According to this configuration, the number of balls to be obtained display ZJ1, ZJ2, Z
In J3 and ZJ4, it becomes easier to recognize the display of the number of expected balls to be obtained that have the same number of expected balls to be obtained, in other words, it becomes easier to find the display of the number of expected balls to be obtained that has a different number of expected balls to be obtained, and display effects related to the number of expected balls to be obtained. can improve the interest of As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the winning ball display effect, a plurality of expected winning ball number display ZJ1 is displayed before the jackpot game effect.
, ZJ2, ZJ3 and ZJ4 are expanded. According to this configuration, the expected number of acquired balls ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are emphasized, so that it becomes easy to recognize the number of expected acquired balls displayed more and more, and the interest of the display performance related to the number of acquired balls is improved. can be made As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the winning ball display effect, a plurality of expected winning ball number display ZJ1 is displayed before the jackpot game effect.
, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are moved to a predetermined position and reduced, and then the maximum expected winning ball number display ZJ5 is performed. According to this configuration, the number of balls to be obtained display ZJ1,
After ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 become difficult to recognize and arouse the player's anxiety, the player recognizes the display of the maximum number of balls to be obtained, which can make the player feel a lot of excitement. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZJ-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a jackpot pattern to notify the jackpot,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying a plurality of expected acquisition media counts representing the number of game media that can be acquired in the jackpot game,
The third display effect is a effect of displaying the maximum expected number of mediums to be obtained, which indicates the maximum number of mediums that can be obtained in the jackpot game,
The fourth display effect is a effect for performing a jackpot game effect during a jackpot game,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, after the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, after the second display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed, and After the third display effect is performed, the fourth display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZJ-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZJ-1,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, among the plurality of expected medium number displays, the expected medium number displays representing the same number of mediums are displayed in the same manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZJ-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZJ-2,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, among the plurality of displays of the number of expected mediums to be acquired, the expected number of mediums to be obtained indicating a different number of mediums is displayed in a different manner,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZJ-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZJ-3,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the fifth display effect is a effect of enlarging the display of the plurality of expected acquisition medium numbers,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect, and the fourth display effect is performed after the fifth display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect ZJ-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect ZJ-3 or aspect ZJ-4,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the sixth display effect is a effect in which the plurality of expected acquisition medium number displays are reduced while being moved to a predetermined position;
The combination effect may include the sixth display effect,
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed after the second display effect, and the third display effect is performed after the sixth display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Note that the above aspect may be modified as follows.
○The display of the number of expected acquisition media is displayed so as to overlap each other while moving.
○ The display of the number of expected acquisition media is displayed three-dimensionally.

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may include a configuration that does not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type game machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the game machine 1 is a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from game balls to game medals.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit to be operated by the player. . Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button image representing the effect button 63 may be used to execute the display effect. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls.
It is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

As shown in FIGS. 60 to 167, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses display devices (main display device 7, sub-display device 10, etc.) to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined into one display effect.
In other words, two or more of the above-described rendering examples and/or modifications may be combined.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 includes a sub-display device 10 in addition to the main display device 7 (display screen 7a). Alternatively, the display effect performed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 may be performed on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7 .

The present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and modified without departing from its spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Gaming machine 3... Game area 5... Board lamp 7... Main display device 10... Sub display device 9A, 9B... Suspended image (suspended icon)
9C... Relevant pending image (suspended icon)
14 First movable accessory 15 Second movable accessory 17 Large winning opening opening start opening 20 First start opening (first ball entrance)
21 … Second starting port (second entrance)
64 Sub display screen 66 Frame lamp 81 Game control microcomputer 91 Effect control microcomputer 101 Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising display means having a first display area capable of displaying a plurality of types of images and a second display area capable of displaying a plurality of types of images ,
one of the plurality of types of images is a pending icon;
The display means is
a first effect of displaying the plurality of pending icons side by side in a first state in the first display area ;
After the first effect, in the first display area, the arrangement of the plurality of pending icons displayed on the display means while maintaining the display of the plurality of pending icons is changed from the first state to the second state. A second effect that changes to the state of 2,
After the second effect, in the first display area, in a state in which the plurality of pending icons are displayed, the arrangement of the plurality of pending icons displayed on the display means is changed from the second state to the above A third effect that changes to the first state ;
a fourth effect of displaying a plurality of the pending icons in the second display area while not displaying the plurality of pending icons in the first display area after the third effect; , and
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the second effect, the arrangement of the plurality of reserved icons is changed from the first state to the second state without changing the intervals between them.

Images